2001, TFDEN-002-015, 001

FD CONTROLLER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
BASIC OPERATIONS MANUAL

15th edition

・Before attempting to operate the robot, please read through this operating manual
carefully, and comply with all the safety-related items and instructions in the text.
・The installation, operation and maintenance of this robot should be undertaken only
by those individuals who have attended one of our robot course.
・When using this robot, observe the low related with industrial robot and with
safety issues in each country.
・This operating manual must be given without fail to the individual who will be actually
operating the robot.
・Please direct any queries about parts of this operating manual which may not be
completely clear or any inquiries concerning the after-sale service of this robot to any
of the service centers listed on the back cover.
 Table of Contents

Table of Contents

Chapter 1 Introduction
1.1 Configuration of manual............................................................................................................................ 1-1

1.2 How to read the instruction manual .......................................................................................................... 1-2

1.3 Frequently used terms .............................................................................................................................. 1-4

1.4 Basic concepts applying to the robot ........................................................................................................ 1-6

1.4.1 Robot system ................................................................................................................................. 1-6
1.4.2 Overview: from teaching to auto operation .................................................................................... 1-7
1.4.3 Manual operation............................................................................................................................ 1-8
1.4.4 Teaching ......................................................................................................................................... 1-9
1.4.5 Function Command (Function)..................................................................................................... 1-10
1.4.6 Auto operation .............................................................................................................................. 1-11

Chapter 2 Names and functions of the operation switches and keys

2.1 Controller................................................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.1 When the operation box is connected............................................................................................ 2-1
2.1.2 When there is an operation panel .................................................................................................. 2-2
2.2 Operation box............................................................................................................................................ 2-3

2.3 Operation panel......................................................................................................................................... 2-4

2.4 Teach pendant........................................................................................................................................... 2-5

2.4.1 External appearance of teach pendant .......................................................................................... 2-5
2.4.2 LED Functions................................................................................................................................ 2-6
2.4.3 Functions of buttons and switches ................................................................................................. 2-7
2.4.4 Functions of operation keys ........................................................................................................... 2-8
2.4.5 Configuration of display screen.................................................................................................... 2-15
2.4.6 Concerning the operation of the f keys ........................................................................................ 2-18
2.4.7 Touch Panel.................................................................................................................................. 2-20
2.4.8 [JOG DIAL] ................................................................................................................................... 2-22
2.5 To input characters.................................................................................................................................. 2-25

Chapter 3 Turning the power on/off and manual operation

3.1 Turning the control power to ON ............................................................................................................... 3-1

3.2 Mode selection .......................................................................................................................................... 3-2

3.2.1 When the operation box is connected............................................................................................ 3-2
3.2.2 When there is an operation panel .................................................................................................. 3-3
3.3 Turning the motor power to ON................................................................................................................. 3-4

3.4 Moving the robot manually........................................................................................................................ 3-6

3.4.1 Movement Direction ....................................................................................................................... 3-6
3.4.2 Moving the robot manually ............................................................................................................. 3-9
3.4.3 Moving the robot with the [JOG DIAL].......................................................................................... 3-10
3.4.4 Switching the mechanism ............................................................................................................ 3-13
3.4.5 Stopping the robot ........................................................................................................................ 3-14
3.4.6 Setting the manual speed............................................................................................................. 3-14

3
Table of Contents

3.5 Turning the motor power to OFF............................................................................................................. 3-16

3.6 Turning the control power to OFF ........................................................................................................... 3-16

Chapter 4 Teaching
4.1 Teaching procedure................................................................................................................................... 4-1

4.2 Preparations prior to teaching................................................................................................................... 4-2

4.2.1 Input the number of the program.................................................................................................... 4-2
4.2.2 Listing the programs on the display ............................................................................................... 4-3
4.3 Teaching .................................................................................................................................................... 4-4
4.3.1 Concerning the screen displays during teaching ........................................................................... 4-4
4.3.2 Basic teaching operations .............................................................................................................. 4-5
4.3.3 What is the interpolation type?....................................................................................................... 4-6
4.3.4 What is the accuracy level? ........................................................................................................... 4-6
4.3.5 Continue and Pause....................................................................................................................... 4-7
4.3.6 What is the acceleration? ............................................................................................................... 4-9
4.3.7 What is smoothness? ................................................................................................................... 4-10
4.3.8 Number of recordable steps......................................................................................................... 4-11
4.4 Try Teaching <<Operating Mode A>> ..................................................................................................... 4-12
4.4.1 Teaching method .......................................................................................................................... 4-12
4.4.2 Try Teaching ................................................................................................................................. 4-17
4.5 A practice teaching session <<Operating mode S>> ................................................................................ 4-23

4.6 Recording function commands ............................................................................................................... 4-29

4.6.1 Directly selecting a command with the function numbers............................................................ 4-30
4.6.2 Selecting from categorized groups............................................................................................... 4-31
4.6.3 Setting and recording function command parameters (conditions) ............................................. 4-33
4.7 Checking what has been taught.............................................................................................................. 4-34
4.7.1 Outline .......................................................................................................................................... 4-34
4.7.2 Setting of “Check with function” ................................................................................................... 4-34
4.7.3 Checking the step sequence [CHECK GO] ................................................................................. 4-35
4.7.4 Checking the steps in the reverse order [CHECK BACK]............................................................ 4-36
4.7.5 Checking the steps continuously.................................................................................................. 4-36
4.7.6 Switching the continuous/step mode during Check Go operation ............................................... 4-37
4.7.7 Jump to the Specified Step [Step Jump] ...................................................................................... 4-38
4.8 Modifying the program ............................................................................................................................ 4-39
4.8.1 Modifying the robot position ......................................................................................................... 4-39
4.8.2 Modifying movement command data <<Operating mode S>> .................................................... 4-40
4.8.3 Overwriting movement commands............................................................................................... 4-41
4.8.4 Adding movement commands...................................................................................................... 4-44
4.8.5 Deleting movement and function commands............................................................................... 4-47
4.8.6 Movement commands coordinate system select function ........................................................... 4-48
4.9 Using the screen editor function to modify commands........................................................................... 4-52
4.9.1 Modifying with the screen editor function ..................................................................................... 4-52
4.9.2 Batch changing the speed of MOVE command ........................................................................... 4-54
4.10 Program conversion function ................................................................................................................ 4-58
4.10.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................ 4-58
4.10.2 Condition/speed ......................................................................................................................... 4-60
4.10.3 Step copy.................................................................................................................................... 4-62
4.10.4 Angle........................................................................................................................................... 4-64
4.10.5 XYZ shift ..................................................................................................................................... 4-65
4.10.6 Tool ............................................................................................................................................. 4-73
4.10.7 Mirror image ............................................................................................................................... 4-73
4.10.8 Coordinate (3-dimensional shift) ................................................................................................ 4-77

4
 Table of Contents

4.10.9 Language ................................................................................................................................... 4-79

4.10.10 Two point shift........................................................................................................................... 4-80
4.10.11 Expansion/reduction ................................................................................................................. 4-82
4.10.12 External axis shift ..................................................................................................................... 4-84
4.10.13 Hot Edit..................................................................................................................................... 4-85
4.10.14 Unit Conversion........................................................................................................................ 4-86
4.11 Using program conversion function from screen editor ........................................................................ 4-90
4.11.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................ 4-90
4.11.2 Selecting the target step............................................................................................................. 4-91
4.11.3 Cautions in case of operating from screen editor....................................................................... 4-93
4.12 Sample program.................................................................................................................................... 4-94
4.12.1 When two robots should be operated in same working area..................................................... 4-94

Chapter 5 Auto operation (playback)

5.1 Before starting auto operation................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.1 Methods of starting automatic operation ........................................................................................ 5-1
5.1.2 Notations for buttons used in automatic operation......................................................................... 5-2
5.1.3 Playback methods (5 operation modes) ........................................................................................ 5-2
5.1.4 Specifying the step which playback starts...................................................................................... 5-3
5.1.5 Operating speed when the start step is specified .......................................................................... 5-3
5.2 Performing automatic operation (playback)－Multi-station start method－ ............................................................................. 5-4

5.3 Performing automatic operation (playback) ― Internal start method ― ................................................................................ 5-8

5.4 Performing automatic operation (playback) －External start method－ .......................................................................... 5-9

5.5 Operations in different operation modes................................................................................................. 5-11

Chapter 6 File operations

6.1 Copying, deleting and renaming programs............................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.1 Copying programs .......................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.2 Deleting programs .......................................................................................................................... 6-2
6.1.3 Renaming (renumbering) programs ............................................................................................... 6-3
6.2 Concerning the file operation menu .......................................................................................................... 6-4
6.2.1 File operation menu selection and common operations ................................................................ 6-4
6.2.2 Types of usable storage media ...................................................................................................... 6-7
6.2.3 Operable files ................................................................................................................................. 6-8
6.2.4 Folder structure of internal memory ............................................................................................... 6-9
6.2.5 Selection method of Files ............................................................................................................. 6-12
6.3 Inserting the USB Memory...................................................................................................................... 6-13
6.3.1 Types of USB memory that can be used...................................................................................... 6-13
6.3.2 Inserting the USB Memory ........................................................................................................... 6-13
6.4 Copying files............................................................................................................................................ 6-16

6.5 Displaying a list of the files...................................................................................................................... 6-21

6.6 Deleting files............................................................................................................................................ 6-23

6.7 Setting protection for files ....................................................................................................................... 6-27

6.8 Verifying files ........................................................................................................................................... 6-32

6.9 Initializing the USB memory.................................................................................................................... 6-35

5
Table of Contents

6.10 Backing up files ..................................................................................................................................... 6-36

6.11 Restoring files from backup................................................................................................................... 6-39

6.12 Performing automatic backup ............................................................................................................... 6-45

6.13 Restricting file copy ............................................................................................................................... 6-47

Chapter 7 Useful functions

7.1 Using short-cuts ........................................................................................................................................ 7-1

7.2 Monitoring various information of the robot .............................................................................................. 7-2

7.2.1 Starting a multiple number of monitors........................................................................................... 7-2
7.2.2 Switching and closing the monitors................................................................................................ 7-4
7.2.3 Operating the Use Inputs and Outputs monitors............................................................................ 7-5
7.3 Setting the output signals ON or OFF manually ....................................................................................... 7-6

7.4 Using help for information on functions .................................................................................................... 7-7

7.4.1 Calling the help top page................................................................................................................ 7-7
7.4.2 Directly calling a function to be checked out.................................................................................. 7-9
7.4.3 Searches using keywords ............................................................................................................ 7-11
7.5 Displaying T/P Key Help ......................................................................................................................... 7-13
7.5.1 Displaying the T/P Key Help......................................................................................................... 7-13
7.5.2 Operating T/P Key Help ............................................................................................................... 7-14
7.6 Managing programs in folders ................................................................................................................ 7-16
7.6.1 Setting displaying the Folder list .................................................................................................. 7-16
7.6.2 Creating, deleting and renaming folders ...................................................................................... 7-18
7.6.3 Assign the stored folder inside programs..................................................................................... 7-20
7.6.4 Copying and transferring programs within folders ....................................................................... 7-21
7.7 Customizing the Hard Keys .................................................................................................................... 7-22

7.8 Customizing the “Softkey” ....................................................................................................................... 7-24

7.8.1 Changing the Softkey Allocation .................................................................................................. 7-25
7.8.2 Changing the Maximum Number of Pages for Softkey................................................................ 7-37
7.8.3 Setting the Softkey Condition Enable/Disable.............................................................................. 7-38
7.8.4 Saving the Softkey Settings ......................................................................................................... 7-39
7.8.5 Loading Softkey Settings from the File ........................................................................................ 7-41
7.9 Selecting the Program Number from the Program List........................................................................... 7-42
7.9.1 Selecting the Program Number from the Program List ................................................................ 7-42
7.9.2 Displaying Programs for Each Unit .............................................................................................. 7-44
7.9.3 Checking Program Contents ........................................................................................................ 7-45
7.10 Editing Step Comments ........................................................................................................................ 7-46
7.10.1 Inputting step comments ............................................................................................................ 7-46
7.11 Displaying Language Switching Function ............................................................................................. 7-48

7.12 Selecting a Function Command Step and Operating ........................................................................... 7-49

7.12.1 Selecting the playback operation from the function command .................................................. 7-49
7.12.2 Skipping the Step Selected Function Command and Operating................................................ 7-50
7.12.3 Performing Check Go Operation from the Step Selected Function Command ......................... 7-51
7.12.4 Performing Playback Operation from the Step Selected Function Command........................... 7-52
7.13 Estimated power consumption monitor................................................................................................. 7-53
7.13.1 Estimated power consumption monitor ...................................................................................... 7-53
7.13.2 How to initialize the value........................................................................................................... 7-54
7.13.3 Cable length setting.................................................................................................................... 7-55

6
 Table of Contents

7.14 Input robot language for the function parameter................................................................................... 7-56

7.14.1 How to input the robot language style parameter ...................................................................... 7-56
7.15 Banning the operation by locking TP .................................................................................................... 7-58
7.15.1 Locking of R316 TP.................................................................................................................... 7-58
7.15.2 Password change for locking R317 TP ...................................................................................... 7-58

Chapter 8 Basic spot welding operations

8.1 Terms frequently used with spot welding .................................................................................................. 8-1

8.2 f key layout ................................................................................................................................................ 8-2

8.3 Spot welding command............................................................................................................................. 8-3

8.4 Teaching .................................................................................................................................................... 8-4

8.4.1 Spot welding command recording .................................................................................................. 8-4
8.4.2 Manual pressurizing and manual welding...................................................................................... 8-5
8.4.3 When using multiple number of welders ...................................................................................... 8-10
8.5 Sets the spot welding conditions............................................................................................................. 8-11

8.6 Setting the spot weld sequences ............................................................................................................ 8-13

8.7 Spot welding ON/OFF ............................................................................................................................. 8-15

Chapter 9 Basic arc welding operations

9.1 Terms frequently used with arc welding .................................................................................................... 9-1

9.2 f key layout ................................................................................................................................................ 9-2

9.3 Basic arc welding operations .................................................................................................................... 9-4

9.3.1 Inching and retracting the wire ....................................................................................................... 9-4
9.3.2 Inching/Retracting the Wire with the [JOG DIAL]........................................................................... 9-5
9.3.3 Switching between welding ON and OFF ...................................................................................... 9-9
9.3.4 Checking the shielding gas ............................................................................................................ 9-9
9.3.5 Switching the welders................................................................................................................... 9-10
9.3.6 Switching between weaving ON/OFF .......................................................................................... 9-11
9.4 Teaching arc welding............................................................................................................................... 9-12

9.5 Teaching of weaving................................................................................................................................ 9-17

9.6 Creating condition files............................................................................................................................ 9-19

9.6.1 Creating condition files ................................................................................................................. 9-19
9.6.2 Copying, deleting and renaming condition files ........................................................................... 9-21

7
Table of Contents

NOTE

8
Chapter 1 Introduction

This chapter provides a guide to reading this manual, and it explains the frequently
used terms and the basic concepts applying to the robot.

1.1 Configuration of manual..............................................................................1-1

1.2 How to read the instruction manual ............................................................1-2
1.3 Frequently used terms ................................................................................1-4
1.4 Basic concepts applying to the robot ..........................................................1-6
1.4.1 Robot system .......................................................................................1-6
1.4.2 Overview: from teaching to auto operation...........................................1-7
1.4.3 Manual operation .................................................................................1-8
1.4.4 Teaching...............................................................................................1-9
1.4.5 Function Command (Function)...........................................................1-10
1.4.6 Auto operation .................................................................................... 1-11
This is dummy page. DO NOT ERASE.
 1.1 Configuration of manual

1.1 Configuration of manual

This “Basic Operation Manual” explains the basic knowledge and operations required in order to use this
controller.
Please read through this manual, and master the basic operation.

■In order to master the basic operations:

■Step 1 … Learn the basic operations according to the actual operation flow.
Learn the functions which are useful to know, such as how to copy and delete
■Step 2 …
the programs which have been created.
Learn the basic operations that are performed for spot welding, arc welding, and
■Step 3 … other designated applications. Read the relevant chapter that corresponds to
the designated application.

Step Chapter Details provided in the instruction manual

How to use this manual, explanation of

Chapter 1 Introduction
frequently used terms

Chapter 2 Names and functions of

Functions of the operating switches, buttons and
the operation switches
keys on the controller and teach pendant
and keys

1 Chapter 3 Turning the power on/off

and manual operation
How to turn on/off the controllers power
Manual robot operations

Chapter 4 Teaching Basic operating procedures of teaching work

How to play back programs that have been

Chapter 5 Auto operation
created

How to copy or delete programs that have been

Chapter 6 File operations
created

2
Shortcut functions, manual I/O output, help and
Chapter 7 Useful functions
other functions

Chapter 8 Basic spot welding Operations required to perform spot welding

operations work

3
Chapter 9 Basic arc welding
Operations required to perform arc welding work
operations

1-1
1.2 How to read the instruction manual

1.2 How to read the instruction manual

How to use the instruction manual
The basic operations of the controller are described using the following formats in this manual.

The function or work to The description of the

be performed is functions and
displayed here.
restrictions on
operation are
provided here.
As "POINT", important
information which
operators should know
about is provided. The description of the
operation starts here.

The keys to perform the

operations are listed
here in the sequence of
operations (indicated by
the number 1,2, etc.).
"+" indicates that the
keys concerned are
pressed simultaneously;
"→" indicates that the
keys are pressed in As "INFO",
succession one after the information on
other. techniques, etc.
which are useful to
know is provided.

Screen displays on the teach pendant

Not all the screen displays on the teach pendant may be provided in every case.
The screen displays are provided as examples. They may differ depending on the robot used.

Displays relating to descriptions of operations

Descriptions of operations are displayed as follows.

Descriptions Details
Press [Enter]. The keys of the teach pendant are enclosed in square brackets [ ], and
the exteriors of the actual keys are positioned on the left of the
descriptions of their operations.
Example:

1 Press [Enter].

Press f4 <File>. When functions are selected using the 12 icons (f keys) indicated at
both sides of the display screen, the initial assignment of the icon
names and f keys are enclosed in angular brackets < >.
Example:

5 Press f4 <File>.

※ In the actual operation, touch the icon on the

screen.

Align the cursor with When an item displayed on the teach pendant is to be indicated in
“Directory.” cases, for instance, where a candidate is to be selected, the item
concerned is enclosed in quotation marks (“ ”).

1-2
 1.2 How to read the instruction manual

Differences in operations
Some keys and functions have two different operation methods. The operation methods selected for these keys
and functions can be individually changed, if desired.
These operating instructions including this manual describe how to operate these keys and functions based on
default settings. There are two kinds of default settings, “Operating mode A” and “Operating mode S”; and the
differences in operation are illustrated as the following example.

External Indication used in this

Function
appearance manual
<<Operating mode A>>
This is used to set the accuracy of a movement
command which is to be recorded. (What has been
If operations differ due to
set is reflected in the recording status.)
default settings, each of the
<<Operating mode S>> operations is described.

This is used to revise the accuracy of a recorded

[ACC]
movement command.

HINT
ヒント

This function is set by selecting [Constant

Setting] →[5 Operation Constants] →
[1 Operation condition] →[6 Usage of ACC
key].
Capable of operating the following functions.
■ When this is pressed on its own, it will lead to a
short-cut to DELAY (function command)
During teaching, this short-cut records the timer
［END／TIMER］ command (DELAY <FN50> function command)

■ When this is pressed together with [ENABLE], it

will lead to a short-cut to END (function command)
During teaching, this short-cut records the end
command (END <FN92> function command).

You can check which default operating mode your controller was set in by following the procedure below.

1 Press [RESET/R] in the top screen of Teach/Playback mode.

>> The [Shortcut R Code Entry] screen is displayed.

2 Press [2], [8], [6] and [Enter] in this order.

>> The following system environment is displayed.

Check the item in “Operational Mode."

1-3
1.3 Frequently used terms

1.3 Frequently used terms

Explained below, for the benefit of those individuals who will be operating the robot for the first time, are the basic
terms which are frequently used in this manual.

Table 1.3.1 Frequently used terms

Terms Explanation
Teach pendant This is used to perform the manual robot operations, teaching, etc.
Enable switch This is a safety device for ensuring that the robot will not operate unexpectedly
due to incorrect operations. The Enable switch is located on the rear panel of the
teach pendant. Manual robot operations and check go/back operations are only
permitted when the Enable switch is held down.
Teach mode This mode is mainly used for creating programs.
Playback mode This mode is used to automatically execute the created programs.
Motor Power This denotes the status of power to the robot, that is to say, whether it is on or off.
At motor power ON, power is supplied to the robot, and at motor power OFF, the
robot is set to emergency stop.
Teaching This refers to teaching the robot how to move and how to do welding work. What
is taught is successively recorded in the programs.
Program This is a file in which the robot movements, welding work and other execution
procedures are recorded.
Movement Command These commands cause the robot to move.
These commands are used to perform auxiliary jobs during robot operations, such
Function Command
as welding, program branching, and external I/O control.
When movement or function commands are taught, their successive numbers are
Step
written in the program. These numbers are known as steps.
Accuracy The robot reproduces the taught positions accurately but in some cases these
positions need not be accurate. The “accuracy” function specifies how precisely
the robot is to operate.
Coordinate System The robot has coordinates. Normally, they are known as robot coordinates. As
viewed from the front of the robot, the back and forth movement is represented by
X, the left and right movement by Y and the up and down movement by Z, thus
forming three orthogonal coordinates. These coordinates serve as a reference for
calculating operations such as manual operations or shift operations etc. In
addition, there are tool coordinates which are referenced to the tool installation
surface (flange surface).
Axis The robot is controlled by a multiple number of motors. The parts controlled by
these motors are called axes. A robot which is controlled by six motors is called a
6-axis robot.
AUX. Axis Axes other than those of the robot (such as positioners or sliders) are generally
called auxiliary axes.
An alternative term is “external axes.”
Check go/check back This function slowly runs the created programs on a step by step basis to check
the teach positions. It operates in two directions, step forward (check go) and step
backward (check back).
Start Start refers to the playback of a program which has been created.
Automatic operation Both “automatic operation” and “playback” mean the playback of a program in the
/ Playback playback mode.
Stop Stop refers to stopping the robot in the start status (playback).
Emergency stop Emergency stop refers to stopping the robot (or system) in an emergency.
Generally, a multiple number of buttons for initiating emergency stop are provided
in the system, and emergency stop can be applied to the system immediately by
pressing one of these buttons.

1-4
 1.3 Frequently used terms

Table 1.3.1 Frequently used terms

Terms Explanation
Error If an error occurs during a playback operation, the robot is
If an error in set to the stop status, and the servo power (motor power)
operation or is turned off immediately.
teaching or trouble in
Alarm the robot itself has If an alarm occurs during a playback operation, the robot is
been detected set to the stop status. The servo power (motor power) is
during a teaching or not turned off. This type of trouble is less serious than an
playback operation, error.
the operator is
Information alerted to the error or If information occurs, the robot remains in the start status
trouble concerned. even during a playback operation. It includes alarms or
errors that have the potential to develop in the future.

Mechanism A mechanism refers to a unit such as a “manipulator”, “positioner”, “servo gun” or

“servo travel” device that configures a control group and cannot be broken down
any further.
A “multi-mechanism” refers to a configuration where, for instance, a servo gun has
been added to a manipulator. For the multi-mechanism, it is necessary to select
which mechanism will be manually operated.
Unit This refers to the increments in which a program is created.
On some occasions, only one mechanism configures the unit; on other occasions,
multiple mechanisms (multi-mechanism) are involved.
When the “Multi-unit” option is set, multiple units can be operated at the same
time. In other cases, only 1 unit is used overall, so there is no need to be
concerned with the unit.

1-5
1.4 Basic concepts applying to the robot

1.4 Basic concepts applying to the robot

This section describes an overview of operations that you should know before reading chapter 2 and subsequent
chapters.

1.4.1 Robot system

A robot system normally denotes a combination of a robot, a teach pendant, and peripheral
devices which are all connected to one controller.

D
C

A: Robot body
B: Teach pendant
C: Controller
D: Control box

Fig. 1.4.1 Diagram of basic configuration for robot (When the control box is connected)

B
A: Robot body
B: Teach pendant
C: Controller
D: Operation panel

Fig. 1.4.2 Diagram of basic configuration for robot (When the operating panel is equipped)

1-6
 1.4 Basic concepts applying to the robot

1.4.2 Overview: from teaching to auto operation

Proceed as follows to continuously operate the robot.

Creating the program (teaching)

The program is created in the sequence shown below. The entire process is known as
the "teaching work." It refers to creating the program and modifying it into the optimal
form.

Turning on the power,

selecting the program
Preparation
(teach or playback mode)

Manual operations:
Record recording the program

(teach mode)

Playing back the program

Operation check
(teach or playback mode)

YES
OK? End
NO
Modifying,
adding, deleting Modifying, adding or deleting
movement commands
Recording, modifying or
deleting function command

(teach mode)
Auto operation

After the creation of the program has been completed, automatic operation is performed.
When automatic operation is performed, the selected program is repeatedly played back.

Preparation Turning on the power,

starting up the
peripheral devices

Program selection

Start

Auto operation

1-7
1.4 Basic concepts applying to the robot

1.4.3 Manual operation

“Manual operation” refers to moving the robot with the use of the teach pendant. Move the robot to
the position recorded using the “manual operation”.

For manual operation, there is a mode in which each axis of the “robot” is operated separately,
and the mode in which the robot tip is moved in a straight line.

Fig. 1.4.3 Operating the axes separately (independent axis operation)

Fig. 1.4.4 Moving the robot tip in a straight line (robot coordinate operation)

1-8
 1.4 Basic concepts applying to the robot

1.4.4 Teaching
Teach the robot positions to which it is to be moved and the numerical sequence of these
positions ahead of time.
This job is called “teaching,” and it is performed in the following sequence.

1 Select the teach mode.

Teaching is performed in the teach mode.

2 Select the program number.

Select the number of the program to be used.

Successively record the operation positions to which the robot is to move and the
3
robot's postures.
•Move the robot to the recorded position and posture using manual
operation.
•Press [O.WRITE/REC] key to record the step.
•Repeatedly press this key to record the steps in succession.

Step 1
Current Step 5
position (Last step)

Step 2

Step 4

Step 3

4 If necessary, record the function commands.

Record the function commands in the appropriate steps. When the function
commands are recorded, signals can be output to an external source or the
robot can be placed in the standby mode, for instance.
See 1-10 ”1.4.5 Function Command (Function)”.

Record the end command (function command END) that indicates the end of
5
operation.
Record the END command (function command END) in the step that ends
the movement.

6 Check what has been taught and modify it if necessary.

This completes the sequence of the teaching session, and a program is created as a result.

The teaching system outlined above is called the “teaching playback system.”
Alternative systems include the “robot language system” and “off-line teaching system.”
The robot supports all of these systems but only the “teaching playback system” is
explained in this instruction manual.

1-9
1.4 Basic concepts applying to the robot

1.4.5 Function Command (Function)

In order to operate the hand or gun attached to the robot wrist or capture signals that check the
work, function commands (functions) are recorded at the appropriate positions in the program.

Furthermore, in order to perform complicated work, other programs may be called or, depending
on the status of the external signals, operation may jump to other programs. These are also
recorded as function commands.

Typical function commands

The function commands are expressed using a format based on SLIM (Standard Language for
Industrial Manipulators) that is a robot language.
Alternatively, function commands can be specified using the “FN***” format where a 1 to 3 digit
number is input into the *** part (which is called a function number).

Some typical function commands are listed below.

Table 1.4.1 Typical function commands

Function
Function
Command Title Description of function
number
(SLIM)
The specified output signal is set to
SET FN32 Output signal ON
ON.
The specified output signal is set to
RESET FN34 Output signal OFF
OFF.
Operation stands by for the specified
DELAY FN50 Timer
time.
Another program which has been
CALLP FN80 Program call
specified is called.
Conditional When the specified signal is ON,
CALLPI FN81
program call another program is called.
The execution of the program is
END FN92 END
ended.

Teaching example

Step 8
Step 9 END (FN92)
Step 1
Step 5
Step 6 DELAY [2] (FN50)
Step 2 Step 7 RESET [1] (FN34)
Step 3 DELAY [1] (FN50) The square brackets [ ] following an
Step 4 SET [1] (FN32) function command indicate the
parameter which has been set.

In the case of the teaching example above, the robot operates in the following way.

(1) After the robot has moved to the position in step 2

Step 3 DELAY [1] (FN50) ..........Operation stands by for 1 second.
Step 4 SET [1] (FN32) ...............Output signal “1” is set to ON.
(2) After the robot has moved to the position in step 5
Step 6 DELAY [2] (FN50) .......... Operation stands by for 2 second.
Step 7 RESET [1] (FN34) ...........Output signal “1” is set to OFF.

1-10
 1.4 Basic concepts applying to the robot

1.4.6 Auto operation

The following steps are taken to automatically run the program which has been created.

1 Select the playback mode.

One of the following playback methods may be selected.
Step: The program is executed step by step.
Cycle: The program is executed once from start to end.
Continuous: The program is executed continuously.
“Cycle” or “step” playback is selected to check what has been taught or
perform a trial run for auto operation. (The program can be stopped on a
step by step basis in these modes.)
“Continuous” playback is used for actual operations.

2 Proceed with playback.

The robot starts to move from its current position to step 1. (It is also
possible to specify the start step.)

Step 1

Current
Last step position

With one-time playback (cycle),

the robot moves from the current position to step 1 and subsequent steps,
and its movement ends with the last step.

For the second and subsequent times: the robot moves from the step 1
and subsequent steps, and its movement ends with the last step.

Current position

Step 1 Last step

End

1-11
1.4 Basic concepts applying to the robot

NOTE

1-12
Chapter 2 Names and functions of the
operation switches and keys

In this chapter, the functions of the operation switches and keys provided on the
robot controller will be described.

2.1 Controller ....................................................................................................2-1

2.1.1 When the operation box is connected ..................................................2-1
2.1.2 When there is an operation panel ........................................................2-2
2.2 operation box ..............................................................................................2-3
2.3 Operation panel ..........................................................................................2-4
2.4 Teach pendant ............................................................................................2-5
2.4.1 External appearance of teach pendant ................................................2-5
2.4.2 LED Functions......................................................................................2-6
2.4.3 Functions of buttons and switches .......................................................2-7
2.4.4 Functions of operation keys .................................................................2-8
2.4.5 Configuration of display screen ..........................................................2-15
2.4.6 Concerning the operation of the f keys...............................................2-18
2.4.7 Touch Panel .......................................................................................2-20
2.4.8 [JOG DIAL].........................................................................................2-22
2.5 To input characters ...................................................................................2-25
This is dummy page. DO NOT ERASE.
 2.1 Controller

2.1 Controller

2.1.1 When the operation box is connected

The circuit breaker is provided on the front side of the FD11 controller, and the teach pendent and
operation box are connected here as well.

OPERATION BOX

CIRCUIT BREAKER

TEACH PENDANT

Fig. 2.1.1 FD11 Controller (OPERATION Box Specifications)

Circuit breaker
This turns the power of the controller ON and OFF.

Teach pendant
The teach pendant has the keys and buttons to perform teaching, file operation, various
condition settings, etc.

Operation Box
Buttons for performing the minimum required operations such as motor power ON,
automatic operation start and stop, emergency stop, and switching between the teach and
playback modes are provided.

2-1
2.1 Controller

2.1.2 When there is an operation panel

The circuit breaker and operation panel are provided on the front side of the FD11 controller, and
the teach pendent is connected here as well.

OPERATION
PANEL

CIRCUIT BREAKER

TEACH PENDANT

Fig. 2.1.2 FD11 Controller (Operation Panel Specifications)

Circuit breaker
This turns the power of the controller ON and OFF.

Teach pendant
The teach pendant has the keys and buttons to perform teaching, file operation, various
condition settings, etc.

Operation Panel
Buttons for performing the minimum required operations such as motor power ON,
automatic operation start and stop, emergency stop, and switching between the teach and
playback modes are provided.

2-2
 2.2 Operation box

2.2 Operation box

The operation box is provided with the minimum buttons required to exercise basic control over the robot, such
as motor power on, starting and stopping automatic operation, emergency stop, and switching between modes.

ST2 ST3 ST4

(E)
非 常 停 止
EMERGENCY STOP

(A) (D)
運転準備 教示 再生
MOTOR ON TEACH PLAYBACK

(B) (C)

起 動 停 止
START STOP

Fig. 2.2.1 Operation box

Table 2.2.1 Functions of buttons and switches on the operation box

Indication used in this manual Description of function

This is used to set the motor power to ON. When it is set to ON, the robot is
(A) [MOTOR ON BUTTON]
readied for operation.

(B) [START BUTTON] In the playback mode, this starts the program which has been specified.

(C) [STOP BUTTON] In the playback mode, this stops the program which is in the start status.
This is used to select the mode. The teach or playback mode can be selected.
(D) [MODE SELECT SWITCH] This switch is used in combination with the teach pendent “TP selector
switch.”
When this is pressed, the robot is set to emergency stop. Emergency stop is
[EMERGENCY STOP performed by pressing the switch on the control box or on the teach pendant.
(E)
BUTTON] To release emergency stop, turn the button clockwise. (The button will then
return to its original position.)

POINT When a control box is connected, an operation panel cannot be installed.

2-3
2.3 Operation panel

2.3 Operation panel

The operation panel is provided with the minimum buttons required to exercise basic control over the robot such
as motor power ON, switching between the modes, starting and stopping automatic operation, and emergency
stop.

(D) (A) (B) (C) (E)

Fig. 2.3.1 Operation panel

Table 2.3.1 Functions of buttons and switches on the operation panel

Indication used in this manual Description of function

This is used to set the motor power to ON. When it is set to ON, the robot is
(A) [MOTOR ON BUTTON]
readied for operation.

(B) [START BUTTON] In the playback mode, this starts the program which has been specified.

(C) [STOP BUTTON] In the playback mode, this stops the program which is in the start status.
This is used to select the mode. The teach or playback mode can be selected.
(D) [MODE SELECT SWITCH] This switch is used in combination with the teach pendent “TP selector
switch”.
When this is pressed, the robot is set to emergency stop. Emergency stop is
performed by pressing the switch on the operation panel or on the teach
[EMERGENCY STOP pendant.
(E)
BUTTON]
To release emergency stop, turn the button clockwise. (The button will then
return to its original position.)

POINT If an operation panel is installed, a control box cannot be connected.

2-4
 2.4 Teach pendant

2.4 Teach pendant

2.4.1 External appearance of teach pendant

The teach pendent is provided with operation keys, buttons, switches and jog dials etc. for
creating programs and performing various settings.
You can allocate move commands to number keys [7~9] by pressing the [ENABLE] key at the
same time as a number key [7~9], and allocate often used function commands (function groups)
by pressing the [ENABLE] key and a number key [4~6]. Functions can also be allocated to the
[JOG DIAL] .

Be sure to follow the cautions below for the USB port (see fig. 2.4.2).

 Only connect USB memory while operating files.

 When file operations have finished, always remove the USB memory and
close the USB cap.
 Continuing use with the USB memory connected, or failing to close the
USB cap may hinder the dust protection, waterproofing, and anti-spatter
CAUTION properties, which may lead to failure.
 The USB cap is a consumable part. If the USB cap becomes loose, or is
damaged or lost, quickly replace it with a new one. In the time until a new
one is procured, use tape etc. to block up the USB port.

TP Selector Emergency
switch stop button

Touch panel
LCD screen

Jog dial

Operation
keys

Fig. 2.4.1 Teach pendant (Front)

INFO. The design of the operation keys shown in Fig. 2.4.1 may be slightly different to
those on the actual teach pendant.

2-5
2.4 Teach pendant

USB Cap

Enable switch
USB Port

Fig. 2.4.2 Teach pendant (rear)

2.4.2 LED Functions

LEDs are arranged above each teach pendent operation key, and operate as shown below.

(B)

(C)
(A)

Fig. 2.4.3 Teach pendent LED

Table 2.4.1 LED Functions

LED Functions
Color
Flashes during preparation of motor power ON, and lights when motor power is ON
(A) Green (servo ON). It is the same as the green “Motor power ON button” lamp on the
operation panel and control box.
Flashes after the power to the controller is switched on, and lights when the teach
(B) Orange
pendent system starts. At all other times it remains lit.
Lights when a hardware malfunction occurs in the teach pendent.
(C) Red
Normally this remains off.

INFO. Directly after power to the controller is switched on, all of the LEDs light for
approximately 0.5 seconds to check they are operating normally, and then switch
off. After this, they operate as shown in Table 2.4.1.

2-6
 2.4 Teach pendant

2.4.3 Functions of buttons and switches

The buttons and switches on the teach pendant have the following functions.

Table 2.4.2 Functions of buttons and switches

External Indication used in this
Function
appearance manual
This is used to switch between the teach mode and
the playback mode in combination with the [MODE
SELECT SWITCH] on the operation panel or control
[TP SELECTOR SWITCH]
box.
For further details, refer to “3.2 Mode selection” in
Chapter 3.
When this is pressed, the robot is set to emergency
stop.
[EMERGENCY STOP To release emergency stop, turn the button in the
BUTTON] direction of the arrow.
(The button will then return to its original position.)
Used to manually operate the robot in teach mode.
Normally, it is provided on the left side only. There
may be two buttons, one at the left and the other at
the right as an option.

When the enable switch is grasped, power is

supplied to the robot (Motor power ON (servo ON)).
[Enable switch] The robot can be operated manually only while the
switch is grasped.
If an impending danger is sensed, either release the
enable switch or grasp it tightly until a clicking sound
is heard. The robot is set to emergency stop.
For details on how to operate the enable switch, refer
to “3.3 Turning the motor power to ON” in Chapter 3.
The [JOG DIAL] has two operations, a longitudinal
dial rotation operation and a latitudinal push button
operation.
The dial rotation operations move the cursor and
[JOG DIAL] scrolls through screens, and the push button
operation selects items and enters inputs.
Also, a wide range of operations such as frequently
used key operations can be allocated to the dial
rotation operation and push button operation. For
details, see “2.4.8 [JOG DIAL].”

2-7
2.4 Teach pendant

2.4.4 Functions of operation keys

The operation keys provided on the teach pendant have the following functions.

Table 2.4.3 Functions of operation keys

External Indication used in this
Function
appearance manual
The functions are executed by pressing this key
together with other keys.
[ENABLE] Also, various functions can be executed by rotating
or pushing the [JOG DIAL] while holding down this
key.
The functions are executed by pressing this key
together with other keys.
[SHIFT] Also, various functions can be executed by rotating
or pushing the [JOG DIAL] while holding down this
key.

The motor power is set to ON by pressing this key

[MOTOR POWER ON]
together with the [ENABLE] key.

PRESSED ON ITS OWN

MECHANISM SELECTION
When a multiple number of mechanisms are
connected to the system, the mechanism to be
[UNIT/MECHANISM] operated manually is selected.
WITH [ENABLE]
UNIT SELECTION
When a multiple number of units are defined in the
system, the unit to be operated is selected.
This key is used by a system in which a multiple
number of mechanisms are connected, and it has
the following functions.
PRESSED ON ITS OWN
SYNCHRO MOTION ON/OFF
It selects or releases synchronized (cooperative)
[SYNCHRONIZE] manual operation.
WITH [ENABLE]
SYNCHRO MOTION ON/OFF
When synchronized (cooperative) operation is
specified for a move command, “H” appears before
the step number.
PRESSED ON ITS OWN
COORDINATE SYSTEM SELECTION
During manual operation, the coordinate system that
serves as the reference for operation is selected.
Each time it is pressed, the axis independent,
orthogonal coordinates (or user coordinates) or tool
[INTERP/COORD] coordinates are selected and displayed on the LCD
screen.
WITH [ENABLE]
INTERPOLATION TYPE SELECTION
This switches the interpolation type (joint
interpolation, linear interpolation or circular
interpolation) of the recording status.

2-8
 2.4 Teach pendant

Table 2.4.3 Functions of operation keys

External Indication used in this
Function
appearance manual
PRESSED ON ITS OWN
MANUAL SPEED CHANGE
The operating speed of the robot during manual
operation is selected. Each time it is pressed, one of
the 1 to 5 operating speeds is selected (the higher
the number, the faster the speed).
Furthermore, the following function is provided as
well.
<<Operating mode S>>
The playback speed recorded in the steps is also
[CHECK SPD/TEACH determined by the manual speed which has been
SPEED] selected by this key.
This function is set by selecting [Constant
INFO.
Setting] → [5 Operation Constants] →
[4 Record speed] → [Value of recording
method — Decision method].
WITH [ENABLE]
CHECK SPEED CHANGE
The speed during a check go or check back
operation is selected. Each time it is pressed, one of
the 1 to 5 operating speeds is selected (the higher
the number, the faster the speed).
PRESSED ON ITS OWN
CONTINUOUS / NON-CONTINUOUS
Continuous or non-continuous during a check go or
check back operation is selected.
When continuous operation is selected, the
[STOP/CONTINUOUS] operation of the robot does not stop at each step.
WITH [ENABLE]
PLAYBACK STOP
The program being played back is stopped. (This
has the same function as the stop button.)
PRESSED ON ITS OWN

If a multiple number of monitor screens are

[CLOSE/SELECT displayed, the screen targeted for operation is
SCREEN] selected.
WITH [ENABLE]

The selected monitor screen is closed.

PRESSED ON ITS OWN
No function
WITH [ENABLE SWITCH]
[Axis operating keys] AXIS OPERATION
The robot is moved manually. If an auxiliary axis to
be moved, the operation target is selected ahead of
time using [UNIT/MECHANISM].
PRESSED ON ITS OWN
No function
WITH [ENABLE SWITCH]
CHECK GO / BACK
When these are pressed together with the [ENABLE
[CHECK GO] SWITCH], the check go or check back operation is
[CHECK BACK] performed.
Normally, the robot is stopped at each recorded
position (step). It is also possible to move the robot
continuously.
Use [STOP/CONTINUOUS] to select step or
continuous.

2-9
2.4 Teach pendant

Table 2.4.3 Functions of operation keys

External Indication used in this
Function
appearance manual
PRESSED ON ITS OWN
RECORDING A MOVEMENT COMMAND
During teaching, the movement command is
recorded. This can be used only when the last step
in the task program has been selected.
WITH [ENABLE]
OVERWRITING THE MOVEMENT COMMAND
The already recorded movement command is
overwritten by the current recording statuses
(position, speed, interpolation type, and accuracy).
However, the command can be overwritten only
when changes are made to what is recorded for the
movement commands. A movement command
cannot be overwritten by a function command;
neither can a function command be overwritten by
another function command.
[O.WRITE / REC] <<Operating mode A>>
The recording position of a recorded movement
command can be revised using [MOD Position].
<<Operating mode S>>
The recording position, speed and accuracy of a
recorded movement command can each be revised
using [MOD Position], [SPEED] and [ACC],
respectively.
INFO.

The [SPEED] and [ACC] key functions are

set by selecting [Constant Setting] →[5
Operation Constants] → [1 Operation
condition] → [5 Usage of SPD key] or [6
Usage of ACC key].
PRESSED ON ITS OWN
No function
WITH [ENABLE]
INSERTION OF A MOVEMENT COMMAND
<<Operating mode A>>
The movement command is inserted “After” the
current step.
<<Operating mode S>>
[INS] The movement command is inserted “Before” the
current step.
INFO.

“Before” can be changed to “After” or vice

versa by selecting [Constant Setting] →
[5 Operation Constants] →[1 Operation
condition] →[7 Step insertion position].

2-10
 2.4 Teach pendant

Table 2.4.3 Functions of operation keys

External Indication used in this
Function
appearance manual
This key functions in a different way depending on
the application concerned.

When the arc welding application is used

PRESSED ON ITS OWN
EASY SELECTION OF A COMMAND
Frequently used function commands such as the
movement command, welding start and stop
commands and weaving commands are displayed in
the f key, and can be input.
WITH [ENABLE]
No function
[CLAMP ARC] When the spot welding application is used
PRESSED ON ITS OWN
SPOT WELDING COMMAND
It is used to set the spot welding command.
Each time the key is pressed, the ON or OFF is
selected for the recording status.
WITH [ENABLE]
MANUAL PRESS
The spot welding gun is manually pressurized.
Other functions can also be allocated. For details,
see “4.13 Clamp/Arc Key Settings” in the “SETUP”
of the instruction manual.
PRESSED ON ITS OWN
No function

[MOD Position] WITH [ENABLE]

STEP POSITION MODIFICATION
The position stored in the movement command now
selected is changed to the current robot position.
Press this for help concerning an operation or
[HELP] function.
The built-in tutorial function (help function) is called.
PRESSED ON ITS OWN
No function

[DEL] WITH [ENABLE]

STEP DELETION
The step now selected (movement command or
function command) is deleted.
This clears the input or returns the setting screen to
its original status. It also enables R codes (short-cut
[RESET/R]
codes) to be input. The function that is to be used
can be called immediately by inputting an R code.
PRESSED ON ITS OWN
STEP SELECTION
This is used to call a step specified in the program.
[PROG/STEP]
WITH [ENABLE]
PROGRAM SELECTION
The specified program is called.
This enters the menu or numerical input contents.
INFO.

[Enter] Determination operation of numerical input

can also be performed with arrow keys by
<Constant Setting> - [7F-key] – [7 Numerical
input] and switching to “Cursor” under
[Decision method of numerical input].

2-11
2.4 Teach pendant

Table 2.4.3 Functions of operation keys

External Indication used in this
Function
appearance manual
PRESSED ON ITS OWN
CURSOR MOVEMENT
When these keys are pressed, the cursor moves.

WITH [ENABLE]
PAGE UP/DOWN , SETTING MODIFICATION
• On a screen where the settings are configured on
Cursor keys a multiple number of pages, the page is moved.
• Lines are moved in units of multiple lines in the
work program editing screen etc.
• On a service or constant setting screen, for
instance, the selection items arranged horizontally
(radio buttons) are selected.
• On a teach or playback mode screen, the number
of the current step is changed.
PRESSED ON ITS OWN
SHORTCUT FOR SETM function
During teaching, this short-cut calls the output signal
[OUT] command (SETM <FN105> function command).
WITH [ENABLE]
MANUAL SIGNAL OUTPUT
The external signals are set to ON or OFF manually.
During teaching, this short-cut calls the input signal
[IN] wait “positive logic” command (WAITI <FN525>
function command).
<<Operating mode A>>
This is used to set the speed of movement
commands.
(The setting is reflected in the recording status.)
<<Operating mode S>>
This is used to revise the speed of recorded
[SPD] movement commands.
INFO.

This function is set by selecting [Constant

Setting] →[5 Operation Constants] →
[1 Operation condition] →[5 Usage of SPD
key].
<<Operating mode A>>
This is used to set the accuracy of a movement
command which is to be recorded. (What has been
set is reflected in the recording status.)
<<Operating mode S>>
This is used to revise the accuracy of a recorded
[ACC] movement command.
INFO.

This function is set by selecting [Constant

Setting] →[5 Operation Constants] →
[1 Operation condition] →[6 Usage of ACC
key].
PRESSED ON ITS OWN
SHORTCUT FOR DELAY function
During teaching, this short-cut records the timer
command (DELAY <FN50> function command)
［END／TIMER］
WITH [ENABLE]
SHORTCUT FOR END function
During teaching, this short-cut records the end
command (END <FN92> function command).

2-12
 2.4 Teach pendant

Table 2.4.3 Functions of operation keys

External Indication used in this
Function
appearance manual
PRESSED ON ITS OWN
Numerical input
Numbers (0 to 9, decimal point) are input.
WITH [ENABLE]
JOINT INTERPOLATION (with [7] )
A shortcut for a "JOINT" move command
WITH [ENABLE]
LINEAR INTERPOLATION (with [8] )
A shortcut for a "LIN" move command
WITH [ENABLE]
CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION (with [9] )
A shortcut for a "CIR" move command
For arc welding uses
WITH [ENABLE]
APPLICATION FUNCTION 1 (with [4] )
During teaching, commands for arc welding are
displayed on the f keys (f1~f12).
WITH [ENABLE]
APPLICATION FUNCTION 2 (with [5] )
During teaching, commands for weaving are
displayed on the f keys (f1~f12).
WITH [ENABLE]
APPLICATION FUNCTION 3 (with [6] )
During teaching, commands for sensors are
displayed on the f keys (f1~f12).
For uses other than arc welding
Numeric keys/ WITH [ENABLE]
[0] to [9] / [.]
APPLICATION FUNCTION 1 (with [4] )
APPLICATION FUNCTION 2 (with [5] )
APPLICATION FUNCTION 3 (with [6] )
Application functions 1~3 can be allocated to the
desired functions. For details, see “7.7 Customizing
Hard Keys”.
WITH [ENABLE]
"ON" (with [1])
On a setting screen, for instance, a check mark is
placed inside the check box.
WITH [ENABLE]
"OFF" (with [2])
On a setting screen, for instance, the check mark
inside the check box is removed.
WITH [ENABLE]
"REDO" (with [3])
This re-does the operation which was restored by
clearing (undo) the operation immediately before. It
is effective only while creating a new or editing an
existing program.
WITH [ENABLE]
"+" (with [0])
“+” is input.
WITH [ENABLE]
"-" (with [.])
“-” is input.

2-13
2.4 Teach pendant

Table 2.4.3 Functions of operation keys

External Indication used in this
Function
appearance manual
PRESSED ON ITS OWN
Deletion of a number or character
The number or character before the cursor position
is deleted. The key is also used to release a
selection during file operations.
[BS] WITH [ENABLE]
UNDO
The operation performed immediately before is
cleared, and the status prior to the change is
restored.
It is effective only while creating a new or editing an
existing program.

This is used when selecting the function

[FN] (Function)
commands.

Opens the program editing screen.

[EDIT] In the program editing screen, mainly function
commands are changed, added or deleted, and the
parameters of move commands are changed.

[I/F] (Interface) Opens the interface panel window.

2-14
 2.4 Teach pendant

2.4.5 Configuration of display screen

Indicated on the display screens are the program and settings used for the current operation and
the icons (f keys) for selecting the various functions.

1 2 3 4 5
6
10
7

9
Fig. 2.4.4 Configuration of display screen

1 Mode display area

The selected mode (teach, playback or high-speed teach) is displayed here. (The
highspeed teach mode is optional.)
The motor power, operation underway and emergency stopped statuses are also
displayed.

Table 2.4.4 Status display

Playback
Status Teach mode
mode
Motor power OFF

Motor power ON, servo power OFF, now

saving energy (playback mode)

Motor power ON, servo power ON

Motors energized, check GO/BACK

operation underway (teach mode), now
operating (playback mode)
Emergency stopped

2 Program number display area

The number of the selected program is displayed.

2-15
2.4 Teach pendant

3 Step number display area

The number of the step selected in the program is displayed here.
The total number of steps is displayed on a step number.

4 Date & time display area

The current date and time are displayed here.

5 Mechanism display area

The mechanism targeted for manual operation is displayed here.
With a multi-unit specifications robot, the numbers of the units involved in the teaching
are also displayed.

6 Coordinate system display area

The selected coordinate is displayed here.

Table 2.4.5 Coordinate system display

Types of coordinate systems Display
Axis coordinate system

Machine coordinate system

Tool coordinate system

(The number on the left of the icon is the tool number.)
Work coordinate system

Absolute coordinate system (world coordinate system)

Cylindrical coordinate system

User coordinate system

(The number on the left of the icon is the coordinate number.)
Welding line coordinate System

7 Speed display area

The manual operation speed is displayed here. When [ENABLE] is pressed, the check
speed is displayed.
Table 2.4.6 Speed display
Speed Display
Manual speed

Check speed

8 Monitor display area

The contents of the program are displayed here (in the case of the initial settings).

9 f key display area

By touching a display area, called f key, selectable functions are displayed. The six keys
on the left correspond to f1 to f6; the six keys on the right correspond to f7 to f12.
See 2-18 “2.4.6 Concerning the operation of the f keys”.

10 Variable status display area

Various status displays such as “Input wait (I wait)” and “External start selected” appear
as the icons shown in Table 2.4.7 in this area. When this status ends, the icon is cleared.

2-16
 2.4 Teach pendant

Table 2.4.7 Status icon display

Status Icon Status Icon
External signal input waiting (I waiting) Servo gun: Now writing gun search
reference position

“Start selection: External” or “Program Servo gun: Now selecting recording

selection: Internal” now selected position check mode

“Start selection: Internal” or “Program Mechanism connected

selection: External” now selected Number: mechanism number - number of
sub mechanism connected
(The mechanism disconnection function is
an option.)
“Start selection: External” or “Program Mechanism released
selection: External” now selected Number: mechanism number - number of
sub mechanism connected
(The mechanism disconnection function is
an option.)
Software PLC now operating Robot in the start enable area

Software PLC now stopped Now Log in

（The 3 digit number signifies the user ID）

Machine lock now set Record function is allocated to the [JOG

DIAL] function.
Dry run now set Overwrite function is allocated to the [JOG
DIAL] function.
Now connected with external PC via Position correction function is allocated to
Ethernet the [JOG DIAL] function.
Automatic backup proceeding
Interpolation classification switching
(The extent to which the operation has
function is allocated to the [JOG DIAL]
been completed is indicated as a
function.
percentage.)
Temporarily stopped (with station startup Coordinate switching function is allocated
only) to the [JOG DIAL] function.
Holding or now paused
* This is displayed only when the hold Insertion function is allocated to the [JOG
signal or pause signal is input during DIAL] function.
playback.
Mechanism now disconnected Tool fine adjustment function is allocated to
the [JOG DIAL] function.
I/O simulation mode now selected Weld wire inching/retracting function is
allocated to the [JOG DIAL] function.
J5 axis in singular point status
The touch panel is locked.

Not all of the optional functions are listed in the above table.
For details on any of the icons not described in the table, refer to the operating instructions for the optional functions
concerned.

2-17
2.4 Teach pendant

2.4.6 Concerning the operation of the f keys

A number of icons are assigned to the f key display area.
The allocation of icons differs according to the application (use), such as arc welding or spot
welding etc. It is also switched in accordance with the selected mode or operating conditions.

INFO. The initial allocation of the f keys differs according to the application. For details
on the initial allocation, see the sections in chapter 8 and beyond in this
instruction manual that correspond to the application that will be used.

Enter the f key from the touch panel

To select the function allocated to an icon, touch the f key display area icon directly.

f1

Each function can be selected by f2

touching the icon directly.

f3

f4

f5

f6

Normally, a function is selected by pressing one of the f1~f12 icons on its own. However, in some
cases the key must be pressed together with [ENABLE].

← An icon displayed with the mesh display

can be selected by pressing [ENABLE].

When [ENABLE]
is pressed, the
display changes.

← Some icons are only displayed when

[ENABLE] is pressed.

2-18
 2.4 Teach pendant

Enter the f key from the operation key

Inputting using only the f keys, without using the touch panel (this is known as “f key substitute
operation”). There are 2 types of operating method. See Table 2.4.8. In the default settings, “f Key
substitute operation“ is disabled (no key input method).

Table 2.4.8 Key allocation in f key substitute operation

Operation Key Operation Key

For operations in this table, hold down the
Pattern Pattern
[SHIFT] key and press the appropriate operation Pattern Pattern
1 2 key. 2 1

f1 f7

f2 f8

f3 f9

f4 f10

f5 f11

f6 f12

The description below shows how to enable “f key substitute operation.”

1 Change the operator qualification to EXPERT or higher.

2 Select <Constant Setting> - [7 f-Keys] – [9 Alternative F-key operation].

3 Hold down [ENABLE] and press [Left/Right] to select the item.

＋ >> Correspondences between the f keys and operation keys for each setting are shown
in Table 2.4.8.

4 After selecting the item, press f12 <Complete>.

>>This completes the settings.

2-19
2.4 Teach pendant

Settings can also be changed from the shortcut R971.

For details on shortcut operations, see “Chapter 7 Useful Functions”.
Correspondence between shortcuts and constant settings when constant settings
are configured are shown in Table 2.4.9.

POINT Table 2.4.9 Correspondence with Constant Settings

Shortcut Constant settings
0 (None) No key input method
1 (Pattern 1) Same as the numerical figure
2 (Pattern 2) Same as the screen arrangement

2.4.7 Touch Panel

The touch panel is equipped as standard to the teach pendent, and the touch panel is set to be
operable by default. Operations using the touch panel can be enabled or disabled by changing the
setting.
The touch panel can be set to temporarily lock (be inoperable) even when enabled if the teach
pendant is not operated for a set period of time. This is called the “touch panel lock” function, and
prevents unwanted entries being caused by unintentional touching of the touch panel. The touch
panel lock function is enabled by default.

The icon shown below is displayed in the status icon display if the touch panel is
locked by the touch panel lock function.

POINT

The following message is displayed if the touch panel is touched in this case.

The touch panel is automatically unlocked if the operation keys or jog dial are
used.

This section explains how to change the touch panel settings.

2-20
 2.4 Teach pendant

Changing the Touch Panel Settings

1 Change the operator qualification to EXPERT or higher.

2 Select <Constant Setting> - [7 f-Keys] - [10 Touch screen].

>>The following setting screen is displayed.

3 Select the item using [ENABLE] + [Left/Right] to enable or disable touch panel
＋ operation.
>> To change other settings items, use [Up/Down] to move the cursor to the item you
want to change. Settings are as follows.

Item Details
Select “Enable” to enable use of the touch panel or “Disable” to
Use of touch screen
disable use.
Select “Enabled” to use the touch panel lock function or
Touch screen lock
“Disabled” not to use it.
Non-operate time Set the period of non-use after which the touch panel is locked.
Select “Enable” to display a message if the touch panel is
Warning at touch ope. touched while locked. Select “Disabled” not to display this
message.

Touch panel operation cannot be disabled if the “Method of alternative key input of
F-key.” in <Constant Setting> - [7 f-keys] – [9 Alternative F-key operation] is set to
IMPORTANT “Method of inputting key none.”

4 After selecting the item, press f12 <Complete>.

>>This completes the settings.

POINT The touch panel can also be enabled/disabled from the shortcut R970.
For details on shortcut operations, see “Chapter 7 Useful Functions.”

2-21
2.4 Teach pendant

2.4.8 [JOG DIAL]

Jog dials, equipped as standard to teach pendants, can be rotated and pressed, and have a
variety of functions.
The main operations are explained in Table 2.4.10 and table Table 2.4.11.

Table 2.4.10 [JOG DIAL] Functions

Operation When to use Details
When the cursor can be moved
using the [Up, Down, Left, Right] Moves the cursor up and down.
keys
When selecting the robot program １）
Moves the current step.
monitor
When the page can be turned using
＋ Turns the page.
f key
In arc monitor editing mode during Slowly increases and decreases each
arc welding (when changing online) weld condition value.
When the cursor can be moved
＋ using the [Up, Down, Left, Right] Moves the cursor left and right.
keys

＋
Increases or decreases the check speed.

＋
When selecting the robot program
monitor in teach mode

＋
Increases or decreases the manual speed.

＋
When selecting the robot program
Mechanism can be switched.
monitor
When the [Enter] key can be used to
Selects items.
select items.
When selecting the robot program
Unit can be switched.
monitor
＋ When f12 key can be used to enter,
Enters, executes, and writes values.
execute and write values
The jog dial function allocation dialog is
When the cursor can be moved displayed, and the functions shown in
using the [Up, Down, Left, Right] Table 2.4.11 can be allocated to the [JOG
＋ keys while the robot program DIAL].
monitor is being selected (Functions that can be allocated differ for
teach mode and playback mode.) ）
1) In order to perform this operation, [Constant Setting] - [5 Operation/Teaching Conditions]
– [1 Operating conditions] – [8 Step selection with E+up/down keys] needs to be set to
[ENABLE].

2-22
 2.4 Teach pendant

Table 2.4.11 Jog Dial Functions when Allocating Functions

Function
Allocation Operation When to use Details
Status

Executes the record.

Overwrites.

Adjusts the position.

When selecting the robot program
monitor in teach mode
Interpolation can be switched.

Coordinates can be switched.

Inserts the record.

＋
When selecting the robot program １）
Robot can be moved.
monitor in teach mode

Check the operating direction of

inching/retracting. ２）

When selecting the robot program Performs inching/retracting of

＋ monitor the arc weld wire. ２）

Performs inching/retract of the

＋ arc weld wire. ２）

1) For details, see “3.4.3 Moving the robot with the [JOG DIAL].”
2) For details, see “Chapter 8 Basic Operations for Arc Welding.”

POINT The only function that can be allocated in playback mode is wire inching/retracting.

2-23
2.4 Teach pendant

Allocating functions to [JOG DIAL] operations

Frequently used operations such as recording or overwriting can be allocated to the [JOG DIAL] push button
operation, and functions such as manual operation can be allocated to the [JOG DIAL] rotation operation.
This section explains how to allocate operations. Operations are allocated when the robot program monitor is in
the selected state.

1 When robot program monitor is selected in teach mode, hold down [Shift] and
press the [JOG DIAL].
＋
>> A [JOG DIAL] function allocation dialog such as the one shown below is displayed.

2 Rotate the [JOG DIAL] to select the desired icon (from record/overwrite/position
correction/interpolation/coordinates/insert/manual operation), and either press the
push button, or touch the icon.
>> The selected function is allocated, and the icon is displayed in the “Variable status
display area.”

To execute allocated functions

Press the [JOG DIAL] while the robot program monitor is selected.
The same function as when the edit key is pressed during allocation is executed.

 To change the allocated function, perform the same operation.

INFO.  The allocated function can also be changed by pressing the displayed icon.
 For details on the "tool fine adjustments,” see “3.4.3 Moving the robot with the
[JOG DIAL]”

Clearing the allocated function from the [JOG DIAL]

1 With the icon of the function allocated to the [JOG DIAL] displayed in the “Variable
status display area,” select the robot program monitor, and hold down [Shift] and
＋
press the [JOG DIAL].
>> The allocated function is cleared, and the icon display disappears.

INFO. When switching modes, such as from the teach mode to playback mode, the
function allocated to the [JOG DIAL] is automatically disenabled.

2-24
 2.5 To input characters

2.5 To input characters

The method used to input characters is described here.

Functions of soft keyboard

1 When the status in which characters can be input is established, the soft
keyboard starts up.

To select characters
Select characters using one of the following methods.
 Select the characters using the up, down, left and right keys, and press [Enter] or
f11 <Enter>.
 Touch the characters that you want to enter on the screen.

To move the cursor in the character input field

＋ Press the left or right key while holding down [ENABLE].

To input a space
Press f4 or f10 <Blank>.

To delete a character
Move the cursor to the right of the character to be deleted, and press f5 <BS>.
The character to the left of the cursor is now deleted.

2 To record the characters which have been input, press f12 <Complete>.
>> The characters are recorded, and operation returns to the original screen.

2-25
2.5 To input characters

To input letters of the alphabet or symbols

1 Alphanumeric and half-size symbols can be input in the initial start status of the
soft keyboard.

2 Input the characters by following the steps on the previous page.

2-26
Chapter 3 Turning the power on/off and
manual operation

This chapter describes how to turn the power on/off and how to operate the robot
manually.

3.1 Turning the control power to ON .................................................................3-1

3.2 Mode selection............................................................................................3-2
3.2.1 When the operation box is connected ...................................................3-2
3.2.2 When there is an operation panel .........................................................3-3
3.3 Turning the motor power to ON...................................................................3-4
3.4 Moving the robot manually..........................................................................3-6
3.4.1 Movement Direction ..............................................................................3-6
3.4.2 Moving the robot manually ....................................................................3-9
3.4.3 Moving the robot with the [JOG DIAL].................................................3-10
3.4.4 Switching the mechanism ...................................................................3-13
3.4.5 Stopping the robot...............................................................................3-14
3.4.6 Setting the manual speed ...................................................................3-14
3.5 Turning the motor power to OFF...............................................................3-16
3.6 Turning the control power to OFF .............................................................3-16
This is dummy page. DO NOT ERASE.
 3.1 Turning the control power to ON

3.1 Turning the control power to ON

In order to use robot, first turn the controller’s power (control power) to ON.

Before turning on the control power, the controller’s door must be closed without fail.
Receiving an electric shocks from touching any of the power supply areas may result in
death or serious injury.
DANGER

Turning the control power to ON

1 First, check the position of the circuit breaker (power switch). (This position
differs depending on the series and the specifications.)

Breaker

2 Turn the circuit breaker to the ON position.

>> TheFD11 system starts up automatically, and self-diagnosis is commenced.

3 If self-diagnosis is completed without any problems detected, a screen such as

the one shown below is displayed on the teach pendant.

The robot is now ready to operate.

3-1
3.2 Mode selection

3.2 Mode selection

The controller features a teach mode that is mainly used for creating programs, and a playback mode that is for
automatically running programs.

3.2.1 When the operation box is connected

The mode is selected using the [MODE SELECT SWITCH] on the operation box.

Mode selection

1 The mode can be checked on the teach pendant display.

教示 再生
TEACH PLAYBACK 2 Rotate the [MODE SELECT SWITCH] on the operation box to either the teach side
or playback side.
>> The mode switches to the selected mode.

The correlation between the switch positions and the modes selected is shown below.

Mode Switch position Teach pendant display

教示 再生
TEACH PLAYBACK

Teach mode

教示 再生
TEACH PLAYBACK

Playback mode

In this state, the robot cannot be operated manually or automatically.

Continue with the following operations.

3 Turn the [TP SELECTOR SWITCH] on the teach pendant to the teach or playback
position (so that the operation panel and teach pendant are both set to the same
mode).

When one of the following combinations is used, the robot can be operated manually or
automatically.

[TP SELECTOR
Mode Operation box Teach Pendant Display
SWITCH]
教示 再生
TEACH PLAYBACK
Teach
Mode

教示 再生
TEACH PLAYBACK
Playback
Mode

If the operation box and [TP SELECTOR SWITCH] do not match, one of the
INFO. following messages is displayed.
 "E0967 Teach pendant selector switch is set to manual.”
 "A2006 Teach pendant selector switch is set to automatic.”

4 The following explanation concerns manual operation and teaching so keep the
teach mode as the selected status.

3-2
 3.2 Mode selection

3.2.2 When there is an operation panel

The mode is selected using the [MODE SELECT SWITCH] on the operation panel that is installed
on the front of the controller.

Mode selection

1 The mode can be checked on the teach pendant display.

2 To switch the mode, use the [MODE SELECT SWITCH] on the operation panel.

The correlation between the switch positions and the modes selected is shown below.

Mode Switch position Teach pendant display

Teach mode

Playback mode

In this status, however, the robot cannot be operated either manually or automatically.
Perform the following operation to initiate operation.

3 Turn the [TP SELECTOR SWITCH] on the teach pendant to the teach or playback
position (so that the operation panel and teach pendant are both set to the same
mode).

When one of the following combinations is used, the robot can be operated manually or
automatically.

Operation [TP SELECTOR

Mode Teach Pendant Display
Panel SWITCH]

Teach
Mode

Playback
Mode

If the operation panel and [TP SELECTOR SWITCH] do not match, one of the
INFO. following messages is displayed.
 "E0967 Teach pendant selector switch is set to manual.”
 "A2006 Teach pendant selector switch is set to automatic.”

4 The following explanation concerns manual operation or teaching so establish the

manual operation enabled status before proceeding any further.

3-3
3.3 Turning the motor power to ON

3.3 Turning the motor power to ON

To move the robot, turn the motor power to ON. If the robot is not going to be moved, the motor power need not
be turned to ON.

Before turning the motor power to ON, be absolutely sure to check that no one is
near the robot. If the robot should move without warning and come into contact or
sandwich a person, death or serious injury may result.
DANGER

Turning the motor power to ON (in the teach mode)

Take the following steps to turn the motor power to ON in the teach mode.

1 Check that the teach mode has been selected.

If the teach mode has not been selected, turn the [MODE SELECT SWITCH] and set it to
the teach mode.

(Operation Box) 2 Press the [MOTOR ON BUTTON], or hold down the [ENABLE] key and press the
運転準備
MOTOR ON [MOTOR ON] key.
The [MOTOR ON BUTTON], is provided on the operation box or operation panel.
The [ENABLE] and [MOTOR ON] keys are provided on the teach pendant.
>> The [MOTOR ON BUTTON] green lamp flashes.
(Operation Panel) In this state, power is not supplied to the motor, and the robot cannot be controlled.
>> The indicator which indicates motor power ON (servo OFF) appears in the mode
display area of the teach pendant.

（Teach Pendant）

3 Grasp the [ENABLE SWITCH].

>> The green lamp of the [MOTOR ON BUTTON] remains lit.
>> The indicator which indicates motor power ON (servo ON) appears in the mode
display area of the teach pendant.
While the [ENABLE SWITCH] is grasped, power is supplied to the motor, and the
robot can be moved by pressing the [Axis operating keys].

This completes the preparations for operating the robot.

3-4
 3.3 Turning the motor power to ON

Concerning the operation of the [ENABLE SWITCH]

• To operate the robot in the teach mode, the robot must be operated while the [ENABLE
SWITCH] is grasped. (This switch is not used in the playback mode.)
• If the [ENABLE SWITCH] is released, the servo is turned off, and the robot stops
immediately. When the [ENABLE SWITCH] is grasped again, the servo comes back ON.
• Grasping the [ENABLE SWITCH] tightly until a clicking sound is heard also causes the
servo power to be turned off and the robot to stop immediately.
POINT
• Double type [ENABLE SWITCH] may be provided on the rear panel of the teach pendant
as an option. In this case, the servo power goes off when both are grasped at the same
time.
• When the [EMERGENCY STOP BUTTON] has been pressed or the emergency stop
command has been input from an external source during operation, the servo power can
no longer be turned on or off by operating the [ENABLE SWITCH]. In cases like this,
perform steps 2 to 3 above.

When the [ENABLE SWITCH] cannot be operated

• Has the [EMERGENCY STOP BUTTON] on the teach pendant been pressed?
→ Turn the [EMERGENCY STOP BUTTON] clockwise to release it.
• Has the emergency stop command been input from an external source?
INFO. → The preparations for the peripheral devices (on the system side) have not been
completed. First complete the preparations on the system side, and then release the
emergency stop command.
• Are the [TP SELECTOR SWITCH] on the teach pendant and the [MODE SELECT
SWITCH] on the operation panel (control box) both at the “teach” position?
→ Set both switches to the “teach” position.

Turning on the motor power (in the playback mode)

Proceed as follows to turn on the motor power in the playback mode.

1 Check that the playback mode has been selected.

(Operation Panel) 2 Press the [MOTOR ON BUTTON], or hold down the [ENABLE] key and press the
[MOTOR ON] key.
>> The motor power is turned on, and the specified program can be played back at
any time.
>> The indicator which indicates motor power ON (servo ON) appears in the mode
(Operation Box) display area of the teach pendant.
運転準備
MOTOR ON

（Teach Pendant）

[ENABLE SWITCH] need not be operated

POINT In playback mode, the motor power is turned ON (servo ON) when the [MOTOR ON
BUTTON] is pressed. The [ENABLE SWITCH] is not used.

3-5
3.4 Moving the robot manually

3.4 Moving the robot manually

In this section, the robot will actually be moved. Before proceeding, memorize how the robot moves to some
extent.

3.4.1 Movement Direction

The robot is operated in accordance with the selected coordinate system. The following
coordinates systems are the ones that are frequently used.
• Axis coordinate system … Each of the robot's axes moves independently.
• Machine coordinate system … The robot tip moves in a straight line. (The tip moves along
the coordinates referenced to the robot.)
The direction of the axis along which the wrist moves differs
depending on the type of application (such as spot welding
or arc welding) used.

Movements of the robot using the axis coordinate system

RX-

X+ X- RX+

The robot body rotates. The upper arm rotates.

Y- Y+
RY+

RY-

The lower arm moves back and forth. The wrist moves up and down.

Z+

RZ-

Z- RZ+

The upper arm moves up and down. The wrist rotates.

Fig. 3.4.1 Movement directions in the axis coordinate system

3-6
 3.4 Moving the robot manually

Movements of the robot in the machine coordinate system

(for the arc welding application)

Y
X
Y

RX-

RX+

X-
X+

The rotation of the sixth axis rotation center line

The robot moves along the X axis.
centers on the Z axis while the tool tip is fixed.

Y-
RY-

RY+
Y+

The rotation of the torch centers on the torch tip

The robot moves along the Y axis. on the plane formed by the torch line and Z axis
while the tool tip is fixed.

Z+

RZ+

Z- RZ-

The rotation of the torch centers on the torch line

The robot moves along the Z axis. while the torch posture remains fixed and the tool
tip is fixed.
Fig. 3.4.2 Movement directions in the machine coordinate system (for the arc welding application)

3-7
3.4 Moving the robot manually

Movements of the robot in the machine coordinate system

(for the spot welding application)

Y
X

RX-

X-

X+
RX+

The robot rotates around the X axis while

The robot moves along the X axis.
maintaining the tool center.

Y-

RY+
Y+
RY-

The robot rotates around the Y axis while

The robot moves along the Y axis.
maintaining the tool center.
Z+
RZ+ RZ-

Z-

The robot rotates around the Z axis while

The robot moves along the Z axis.
maintaining the tool center.
Fig. 3.4.3 Movement directions in the machine coordinate system (for the spot welding application)

3-8
 3.4 Moving the robot manually

3.4.2 Moving the robot manually

1 Check that the teach mode has been selected.

2 Press the [MOTOR ON BUTTON], or hold down the [ENABLE] key and press the
[MOTOR ON] key.
>> The preparations for moving the robot are now complete.

3 To change the speed, press [CHECK SPD/TEACH SPEED].

>> Any speed from 1 to 5 can be selected. Each time this key is pressed, the speed is
changed by one setting in the following sequence: 1 → 2 ... → 5 → 1, and so on.

INFO. The manual speed can be changed by grasping the [ENABLE SWITCH], and
rotating the [JOG DIAL] while holding down [Shift].

4 The target mechanism for manual operation appears on the teach pendant.

The selected mechanism

is displayed in colors.

5 Grasp the [ENABLE SWITCH].

>> While this switch is grasped, the motor power is turned on.

6 Press the [Axis operation keys] that corresponds to the direction in which the
robot is to be moved.
>> The robot is moved in accordance with the selected coordinate system.

3-9
3.4 Moving the robot manually

3.4.3 Moving the robot with the [JOG DIAL]

If the “Manual operation function” is allocated to the [JOG DIAL], the robot is moved by rotating
the [JOG DIAL].
First, select the operation condition appropriate for the application in the following setting screen.

Selecting the operation conditions for [JOG DIAL] manual operation

An operator qualification of EXPERT or above is required. Select the operator qualification
before operation.
1 In f5 <Constant setting> - [5 Operation Constants] - [1 Operation condition], select
[35 Jogdial manual operation].
>> The following setting screen is displayed.

2 Select [Enable] + [Left/Right].

＋
Select the operation condition appropriate for the application from the 3 setting items in
the following table.

Table 3.4.1 Operation Conditions for [JOG DIAL] Manual Operation

Setting
Operation Description
Item
Fixed The robot operation conditions when the [JOG DIAL] is rotated are set
automatically to the tool coordinate system and manual speed 1.
Select when the [JOG DIAL] manual operation is limited to fine
adjustment of the tool tip position.
In teaching work, a convenient method is to divide operations so that
the axis operating keys are used in normal situations, and [JOG DIAL]
operations are used for fine adjustment work only.
Select The robot operation conditions when the [JOG DIAL] is rotated are the
currently selected coordinate system and the movement amount
corresponding to the manual speed (1 to 5) (for details on setting the
movement amount, see “3.4.6 Setting the manual speed”).
The robot movement amount (movement distance) can be set for each
manual speed (1 to 5). This makes it easy to avoid obstructions on the
teaching line or perform fixed movement operations (for example,
temporarily withdraw the tool tip from the current teaching position in the
vertical direction → move a fixed amount in the horizontal direction →
return to the position in the vertical direction).
Disabled Disables the [JOG DIAL] manual operation.
Select to disable robot movement using the [JOG DIAL] operation.

3 After configuring the setting, press f12 <Complete>.

>> The setting is saved and the display returns to the original screen.

3-10
 3.4 Moving the robot manually

Next, allocate the “Manual operation function” to the [JOG DIAL].

Allocating the manual operation function to the [JOG DIAL]

1 Select the robot program monitor in teach mode, hold down [Shift] and press the
[JOG DIAL].
＋
>> A [JOG DIAL] function allocation dialog such as the one shown below is displayed.

2 Rotate the [JOG DIAL] to select the “Manual operation” icon, and press the [JOG
DIAL]. Alternatively, touch the “Manual operation” icon.
>> The manual operation function is allocated to the [JOG DIAL], and the “Manual
operation” icon is displayed in the variable status display area.

INFO. For details on how to allocate functions to the [JOG DIAL], see “2.4.8 [JOG
DIAL]”.

Rotate the [JOG DIAL] to move the robot

1 Grasp the [ENABLE SWITCH].
>> While the switch is grasped, the motor power is ON.

3-11
3.4 Moving the robot manually

2 Press the [Axis operating keys] in the axis direction (X/Y/Z) that you want to move
the robot in. The [JOG DIAL] rotation direction specifies the actual movement
direction (+/-) of the robot.
>> The following message is displayed.

 When “Fixed” is selected in Constant Setting, the tool coordinate system and manual
speed 1 (inching) are automatically set (however, note that when the manual
operation target mechanism is an external axis, the coordinate system is not
changed).
 When “Select” is selected in Constant Setting, the coordinate system and manual
speed settings are not changed.
 When the [Axis operating keys] is released, the message disappears. In addition, the
coordinate system and manual speed that were set automatically in Fixed Conditions
return to the previous values.

Robot does not move when the [Axis operating keys] is pressed
If the “Manual operation function” is allocated to the [JOG DIAL], the robot will not move
even when the [Axis operating keys] is pressed.
POINT Press either the [+] or [-] key for the [Axis operating keys]
The role of the [Axis operating keys] is to specify the axis direction that you want to move
the robot in.
The manual operation results are the same whether the [+] or [-] key is pressed.

3 Rotate the [JOG DIAL] in the direction (+/-) you want to move the robot. Rotating
the [JOG DIAL] towards the back (upwards direction) moves the robot in the +
direction, and rotating it to the front (downwards direction) moves the robot in the
– direction.
>> The robot operates at the “specified speed” in the “specified direction” of the
“specified coordinate system”, moves the “specified distance”, and then automatically
stops.
 When the [JOG DIAL] is rotated to the back (upwards direction) 1 notch, the robot
moves at the “selected speed” for the “specified distance” in the “+ direction of the
pressed [Axis operating keys]” of the “selected coordinate system”, and then
automatically stops.
For example, if the [JOG DIAL] is rotated to the back (upwards direction) 1 notch while
the [X+] or [X-] is pressed, the robot moves at the “selected speed” for the “specified
distance” in the “X axis + direction” of the “selected coordinate” system, and then
automatically stops.
 When the [JOG DIAL] is rotated to the front (downwards direction) 1 notch, the robot
moves at the “selected speed” for the “specified distance” in the “- direction of the
pressed [Axis operating keys]” of the “selected coordinate system”, and then
automatically stops.
 If the [JOG DIAL] is rotated in the same direction while the robot is moving or after it
automatically stops, the robot continues to move. At this time the moving distance is
calculated as (manual speed 1 set distance) x (the number of [JOG DIAL] rotated
notches).

3-12
 3.4 Moving the robot manually

The following 2 methods are available for stopping the robot while it is moving.
POINT
Stop the robot by releasing the [Axis operating keys] while the robot is moving.
Stop the robot by rotating the [JOG DIAL] 1 notch in the opposite direction while the robot is
moving.
After the robot stops automatically, it remains in an “Operating” status.
After the [JOG DIAL] is rotated, when the robot moves for the specified distance, it
automatically stops. At this time, the robot operation has stopped, but the robot controller
continues in the “Operating” status to prepare for the next rotation (the “Robot moving”
Basic Outputs are ON).
When the [Axis operating keys] is released or the [JOG DIAL] is rotated 1 notch in the
opposite direction, the stopped status is entered (the “Robot moving” Basic Outputs are
OFF).
After the robot stops automatically, it does not move when the [JOG DIAL] is rotated in
the opposite direction.
For example, the [JOG DIAL] is rotated to the back (upwards direction) to move the robot.
Then, after the robot has stopped automatically, when the [JOG DIAL] is rotated to the front
(downwards direction), the robot does not move for the first operation because it is the stop
operation described above. When the [JOG DIAL] is rotated to the front (downwards
direction) again, the robot moves.
The robot movement amount can be set for each manual speed (1 to 5).
The robot movement distance when the [JOG DIAL] is rotated 1 notch can be set for each
manual speed (1 to 5) in <Constant setting> - [5 Operation Constants] - [2 Manual Speed].
For manual speeds 2 to 5, the rotation angle and movement speed for each axis can also
be set.
If manual operations using the [Axis operating keys] and manual operations using the [JOG DIAL]
are frequently switched, the following simple operation can be used to switch between the two.

Switching to manual operation using the axis operating keys

If manual operations using the axis operating keys and tool fine adjustment work using the [JOG
DIAL] are frequently switched, the following simple operation can be used to switch between the
two.
1 With the manual operation function allocated to the [JOG DIAL], press the [JOG
DIAL].
>> Each time the [JOG DIAL] is pressed, the icon displayed in the variable status display
area changes.

 If a x mark is displayed on the icon, manual operations using the normal axis operating
keys is enabled (in this case, manual operations cannot be performed using the [JOG
DIAL]).
 Conversely, if a x mark is not displayed on the icon, manual operations using the [JOG
DIAL] are enabled (in this case, manual operations using the axis operating keys
cannot be performed).
 While an axis operating keys is being pressed (during operation), the icons do not
change when the [JOG DIAL] is pressed.

3.4.4 Switching the mechanism

This procedure is used to select the mechanism to be manually operated when a multiple number
of mechanisms have been connected. This operation can be performed irrespective of whether
motor power is ON or OFF.
1 The mechanism selected for manual operation is displayed on the teach pendant.

The currently selected

mechanism is displayed
in color.

3-13
3.4 Moving the robot manually

2 To switch the mechanism, press [UNIT/MECHANISM].

>> The selected mechanism changes (and the display of the teach pendant changes.)
Given below is an example where a mechanism is switched in a configuration
consisting of a manipulator and positioner.

Name of manipulator Positioner name

Mechanism number Mechanism number

3 After switching the mechanism, manual operation using the newly selected
mechanism is possible.
While holding the [ENABLE SWITCH], press the axis keys to operate the mechanism.

3.4.5 Stopping the robot

If some kind of danger is perceived while the robot is being operated manually in the teach mode,
or if work is to be suspended, “release" the [ENABLE SWITCH] or “grasp it tightly.” The servo
switches OFF, and the robot stops immediately.

3.4.6 Setting the manual speed

To change the settings of manual speeds 1 to 5, edit them in the following setting screen.

An operator qualification of EXPERT or above is required. Select the operator qualification

before operation.
1 Select f5 <Constant setting> - [5 Operation Constants] - [2 Manual Speed].
>> The following setting screen is displayed.

2 Move the cursor to the item you want to set, enter the setting, and press [Enter].
Number

3 After configuring the setting, press f12 <Complete >.

≫ The setting is saved and the display returns to the original screen.

3-14
 3.4 Moving the robot manually

For manual speed 1 (inching), set the movement distance instead of the speed.
INFO.
In manual operation with manual speed 1, the robot automatically stops after
moving the set distance.
To continue moving, press the axis operating keys again.

Setting the robot movement amount when the [JOG DIAL] is rotated 1 notch
An operator qualification of EXPERT or above is required. Select the operator qualification
before operation.
1 Select f5 <Constant setting> - [5 Operation Constants] - [2 Manual Speed].
>> The following setting screen is displayed.

2 Move the cursor to the item you want to set, enter the movement amount, and
Number press [Enter].

About the distance (rectangular) setting

When operating with a rectangular coordinate system (machine, tool, user, world,
workpiece, cylindrical, weld line), set the movement distance in the X, Y and Z
directions (not including θ in a cylindrical coordinate system).
About the angle (axis) setting
・When operating with an axis coordinate system, set the rotation angle for each axis
(including θ in a cylindrical coordinate system).
・Set the rotation angle based on the position (RX, RY, RZ) when operating with the
rectangular coordinate system.

3 After configuring the setting, press f12 <Complete>.

>> The setting is saved and the display returns to the original screen.

POINT To move the robot with the [JOG DIAL]

When [Select] is selected in f5 <Constant setting> - [5 Operation Constants] - [1
Operation condition] - [35 Jogdial manual operation], the robot movement
amount (distance/angle) when the [JOG DIAL] is rotated 1 notch can be set for
each manual speed (2 to 5).

3-15
3.5 Turning the motor power to OFF

3.5 Turning the motor power to OFF

For both the teach mode and playback mode, to turn the motor power OFF (servo OFF), press the
[EMERGENCY STOP BUTTON].

Turning off the motor power

1 Press the [EMERGENCY STOP BUTTON] at the top right of the teach pendant.
>> The motor power is now turned off (servo off).
If the robot is moving, it will stop immediately.

2 The [EMERGENCY STOP BUTTON] is locked. To turn the motor power back on,
the lock must be released.
To release the lock, turn the button in the direction of the arrow.

INFO. An [EMERGENCY STOP BUTTON] is also provided on the operation panel or control box.
The robot is stopped by pressing any [EMERGENCY STOP BUTTON].

3.6 Turning the control power to OFF

To suspend the robot operation, turn off the control power.

Turning the control power to OFF

1 Check that the robot has stopped.

2 Set the circuit breaker to the OFF position.

>> The control power is now turned off.

To restart, disconnect the primary power supply, and then wait for approximately 5
IMPORTANT seconds before reconnecting the power supply.

3-16
Chapter 4 Teaching

This chapter describes the teaching work.

4.1 Teaching procedure ....................................................................................4-1

4.2 Preparations prior to teaching.....................................................................4-2
4.2.1 Input the number of the program..........................................................4-2
4.2.2 Listing the programs on the display......................................................4-3
4.3 Teaching .....................................................................................................4-4
4.3.1 Concerning the screen displays during teaching..................................4-4
4.3.2 Basic teaching operations ....................................................................4-5
4.3.3 What is the interpolation type? .............................................................4-6
4.3.4 What is the accuracy level? .................................................................4-6
4.3.5 Continue and Pause.............................................................................4-7
4.3.6 What is the acceleration? .....................................................................4-9
4.3.7 What is smoothness?.........................................................................4-10
4.3.8 Number of recordable steps ............................................................... 4-11
4.4 Try Teaching <<Operating Mode A>> .......................................................4-12
4.4.1 Teaching method................................................................................4-12
4.4.2 Try Teaching.......................................................................................4-17
4.5 A practice teaching session <<Operating mode S>>...................................4-23
4.6 Recording function commands .................................................................4-29
4.6.1 Directly selecting a command with the function numbers...................4-30
4.6.2 Selecting from categorized groups.....................................................4-31
4.6.3 Setting and recording function command parameters (conditions) ....4-33
4.7 Checking what has been taught................................................................4-34
4.7.1 Outline................................................................................................4-34
4.7.2 Setting of “Check with function”..........................................................4-34
4.7.3 Checking the step sequence [CHECK GO]........................................4-35
4.7.4 Checking the steps in the reverse order [CHECK BACK] ..................4-36
4.7.5 Checking the steps continuously........................................................4-36
4.7.6 Switching the continuous/step mode during Check Go operation ......4-37
4.7.7 Jump to the Specified Step [Step Jump].............................................4-38
4.8 Modifying the program ..............................................................................4-39
4.8.1 Modifying the robot position ...............................................................4-39
4.8.2 Modifying movement command data <<Operating mode S>> ...........4-40
4.8.3 Overwriting movement commands.....................................................4-41
4.8.4 Adding movement commands ............................................................4-44
4.8.5 Deleting movement and function commands .....................................4-47
4.8.6 Movement commands coordinate system select function ..................4-48
4.9 Using the screen editor function to modify commands .............................4-52
4.9.1 Modifying with the screen editor function ...........................................4-52
4.9.2 Batch changing the speed of MOVE command..................................4-54
4.10 Program conversion function ..................................................................4-54
This is dummy page. DO NOT ERASE.

4.10.1 Outline..............................................................................................4-54
4.10.2 Condition/speed ...............................................................................4-54
4.10.3 Step copy .........................................................................................4-54
4.10.4 Angle ................................................................................................4-54
4.10.5 XYZ shift...........................................................................................4-54
4.10.6 Tool ..................................................................................................4-54
4.10.7 Mirror image .....................................................................................4-54
4.10.8 Coordinate (3-dimensional shift) ......................................................4-54
4.10.9 Language .........................................................................................4-54
4.10.10 Two point shift ................................................................................4-54
4.10.11 Expansion/reduction .......................................................................4-54
4.10.12 External axis shift ...........................................................................4-54
4.10.13 Hot Edit ..........................................................................................4-54
4.10.14 Unit Conversion..............................................................................4-54
4.11 Using program conversion function from screen editor ...........................4-54
4.11.1 Outline ..............................................................................................4-54
4.11.2 Selecting the target step...................................................................4-54
4.11.3 Cautions in case of operating from screen editor .............................4-54
4.12 Sample program .....................................................................................4-54
4.12.1 When two robots should be operated in same working area............4-54
 4.1 Teaching procedure

4.1 Teaching procedure

Proceed with teaching by following the steps below.

1 Select the teach mode.

Teaching is performed in the teach mode.
Preparations prior to
teaching
2 Input the number of the program.
Page 4-2 ～
Input the number of the program to be created.
Any number from 0 to 9999 can be input.

Record the movement commands (positions to which the robot is to

3
move and postures).

・ Move the robot to the recorded position and posture by

manual operation.
・ Press [O.WRITE/REC] to record the step (movement
command).
・ Record the steps (movement commands) in sequence by
repeating this process.
Teaching

Page 4-4 ～ 4 If necessary, record the function commands.

Record the function commands in the appropriate steps. If
function commands are recorded, signals can be output to an
external device or the robot can be made to stand by.

Record the end command (function command END <FN92>) that

5
shows the program end.
Record the end command (END <FN92> function command) in
the step that will conclude the operation as the final step.

6 Check the teaching contents.

Checking of contents
Move in numerical order through the recorded steps and check
Page4-34 ～ the recorded positions and postures.

Modify 7 Revise the teaching contents if necessary

Change the recorded points, add or delete steps, etc.
Page 4-39 ～

4-1
4.2 Preparations prior to teaching

4.2 Preparations prior to teaching

4.2.1 Input the number of the program

When teaching the robot new movements, provide a number to the program which will now be
created. Any number from 0 to 9999 can be input.

Input the number of the program.

1 Select the teach mode.

2 While holding down [ENABLE], press [PROG/STEP].

＋ >> The [Program Selection] window now opens.

3 Input the number of the program in the “Designated program” field, and press
[Enter].

When “1” is to be specified as the program number, for instance, press the [1] numeric
key.

4 Press [Enter].
>> Program “1”, a new program, is now opened.

At this point, the teaching can now begin.

If you do not know which numbers are not yet used

INFO. If you do not know which numbers are not yet used, check the programs
already created by listing them on the display.
See page 4-3 “4.2.2 Listing the programs on the display”.

4-2
 4.2 Preparations prior to teaching

4.2.2 Listing the programs on the display

A convenient way to open an already created program is to list the programs on the display and
then make the selection.
The number can also be directly specified as described in “4.2.1 Input the number of the
program”.

Listing the programs on the display

1 Select the teach mode.

2 While holdings down [ENABLE], press [PROG/STEP].

＋ >> The [Program Selection] window now opens.

3 Align the cursor with “Directory”, and press [Enter].

>> A list of the programs already created is now displayed.

4 Align the cursor with the program to be opened, and press [Enter].
>> The selected program is now opened.

Concerning the contents displayed when programs are listed

The contents displayed are as follows.
1 2 3

POINT

1： The program filenames are displayed in this column. The filenames are indicated
using the “robot name.xxxx” format. “xxxx” denotes the number of the program.
2： The number of recorded steps is displayed in this column.
3： If comments have been registered, they are displayed in this column.

4-3
4.3 Teaching

4.3 Teaching

4.3.1 Concerning the screen displays during teaching

Various information is displayed on the screen during teaching as shown below. Before
proceeding with teaching, remember this information as background knowledge.

１ ２ ３

７
６

1 Program No.
The number of the currently selected program is displayed.
If not even one step has been recorded, “Free” is displayed; if one or more steps have
been recorded, “EX” is displayed.
2 Step No.
The number of the currently selected step is displayed.

3 Comment
The contents of the comment (REM <FN99> function command) recorded at step 1 in
the program are displayed as the comment of the program itself. The maximum number
of characters which can be used for the REM function command is 199. However, the
comment which consists of the first 38 of these characters appears in this area.
4 Manual Speed
The speed set here is reflected as the movement command of the robot set in
<<Operating mode S>>.
Each time [CHECK SPD/TEACH SPEED] is pressed, the speed of the recording status
is switched.
5 Recording status
The currently set speed, interpolation method, etc. are displayed here. The movement
commands are recorded under the conditions displayed in recording status by pressing
[O.WRITE/REC].
6 Cursor
This cursor indicates operation target. It is displayed as a green bar.

7 Program contents
The recorded steps are displayed here.
The step numbers are provided for both the movement commands and function
commands.

4-4
 4.3 Teaching

4.3.2 Basic teaching operations

There are two types of teaching, “movement command teaching” and “function command
teaching.”

Teaching using the movement commands

(1) Operate the robot manually until it reaches the position to be recorded.
(2) Set the speed, interpolation type and other data.
Speed …This is the speed at which the robot is to move to the recorded position.
Interpolation type …Select the tracks of the operations up to the recorded position.
Accuracy …This refers to the degree by which the path along which the tool moves
as it passes through the recorded point of each step is distanced from
the recorded point, thereby describing an arc on the inside of these
points. This is also called accuracy.
(3) The movement command is recorded by pressing [O.WRITE/REC].

Concerning the movement command data settings

All the movement command data can be changed after teaching. Therefore, until
POINT operators become familiar with the operation of the robot, they should simply
remember “how to record the robot positions”.
The data is revised upon completion of the teaching session.
See page 4-39 “4.8 Modifying the program”.

Teaching using the function commands

(1) Press [FN].
(2) Select the function command to be recorded, and press [Enter].
(3) Specify the parameter (condition) of the function command, and press [Enter].
When there is more than one parameter (condition), press [Enter] with each parameter.

To correct input errors

• If the wrong function or command has been selected, press [RESET/R].
• To correct a numerical value, etc. specified in an function command, press [BS].
• To delete the last operation, press [ENABLE] + [BS].

The operating method of teaching differs according to the set “Operating mode.”
There are two types of operating mode, <<Operating mode A>> and <<Operating
mode S>>.
For details on the operating method, check the set operating mode, and read the
appropriate section for that operating mode.
POINT <<Operating mode A>> Page 4-12 “4.4 Try Teaching <<Operating Mode A>>”
<<Operating mode S>> Page 4-23 “4.5 A practice teaching session <<Operating
mode S>>”

The set operating mode can be checked in the system environment display.
For details, see “1.2 How to read the instruction manual.”

4-5
4.3 Teaching

4.3.3 What is the interpolation type?

How the tool tip is to be moved is determined by the interpolation type.
Table 4.3.1 Interpolation type
Interpolation type Path of tool tip movement
Joint interpolation Since each axis moves
JOINT
(JOINT) independently, the path of the tool
JOINT JOINT
tip is not a straight line.

Line interpolation If the next step (target step) The tool tip moves LIN
involves linear interpolation, the tool in a straight line.
(LIN)
tip moves in a straight line that
connects the steps. JOINT JOINT
If the target step and the step that JOINT
Circular
follows involve circular CIR2
interpolation CIR2
(CIR) interpolation, the tool tip moves
along an arc.
CIR2
CIR1

4.3.4 What is the accuracy level?

This refers to the degree to which the path along which the tool moves as it Amount of inward turn
passes through the recorded point of each step describes an arc on the Recorded point
inside of the recorded point. A1 to A8 can be specified as this degree.
A1 Low
When A1 is specified, the tool tip will pass through the recorded point.
When A2 or above is specified, the time required for playback is reduced ：
depending on how far the tool passes along an arc on the inside of the ：
：
recorded points.
Select a stringent (lower) accuracy level at the welding points and a lax A8 High
(higher) level in the air cutting areas.
This controller performs inward turn even if the interpolation classification of
the linked step is different.
Control over the robot operations that involve accuracy levels differs depending on the application used.

When the arc welding application is used Accuracy levels when arc welding is
performed
When a level from A1 to A8 is specified, the overlap speed ratio Overlap
changes step by step across a range from 0 to 100%. Level
speed ratio
Even if the accuracy level remains the same, the path of the robot is A1 0%
changed by the recording speed. (The higher the recording speed, the A2 5%
further inside the arc which is described.) A3 10 %
Even if the playback speed is changed, the inward turn tracks are A4 15 %
calculated so as not to affect the tracks. However, the actual amount of A5 25 %
inward turn may differ due to machine curvature or servo control delay. A6 50 %
Changing the playback speed means speed changes when the speed A7 75 %
override or low safety speed functions are used. A8 100 %

When the spot welding application is used Accuracy levels when spot welding is
When a level from A1 to A8 is specified, the inside arc amount changes performed
step by step across a range from 0 to 500 mm. Inside arc
Level
amount
If the accuracy level remains the same, the path of the robot is not
A1 0 mm
affected even when the recording speed is changed.
A2 5 mm
Similarly, even when the playback speed changes, there is hardly any A3 10 mm
effect on the path of the robot. (The “playback speed” is the speed A4 25 mm
resulting from a change made by speed override, the low safety speed A5 50 mm
or other actual speed during playback.) A6 100 mm
A7 200 mm
A8 500 mm
(NOTE) In case of a manipulator of which the number of axes is seven or more, the default control setting
is “Overlap speed ratio”. Do not change this default setting.
INFO. “Accuracy” corresponds to “Overlap” in Daihen robots prior to the EX-C series. “With overlap”
can be used as A8, and “No overlap” can be used as A1.

4-6
 4.3 Teaching

4.3.5 Continue and Pause

The accuracy level described in the previous section can be divided into two types of control
methods, “continue” and “pause.”
With the “continue” method, the robot tool passes smoothly along the inside of the tool path with
no reduction in its speed. (“Continue” is described in “4.3.4 What is the accuracy level?”.)
Since this control method generates the path in such a way that the tool moves along the inside of
the path formed by the recorded points, it is used for those areas where the tool does not make
contact with the work but moves from one point to the next through the air.

With the “pause” method, which is also referred to as “in-position check,” each time the command
position inside the robot reaches a step, the actual robot arrival is awaited before advancing to the
next step.
This method is used at steps such as spot welding which require a high level of positioning
accuracy.

To select continue or pause, open the screen editing screen, and select “0” or “1” at the position
shown in the figure below. When “1” is selected, “P” appears following accuracy levels “A1-A8.”
This indicates that pause has now been set.

“Continue/pause” indicated here (without “P”: pass; with “P”: pause).

↓

Fig. 4.3.1 Example of steps displayed with “pause”

An alternative way to set continue or pause as the recording status is to use the
[Continue/Pause] f key.

For linear interpolation For joint interpolation

Recorded point
A1

Recorded point A8

A1

A8

Continue As soon as the robot tool has reached the point which is
away from the recorded point by the distance equivalent
to the pulse amounts of the axis encoders which
correspond to the accuracy level set, the robot considers
that the tool has reached the recorded point, and it starts
moving the tool toward the next recorded point.

The robot tool does not continue through the recorded points but passes smoothly along
the inside of the tool path with no reduction in its speed.
Exactly how far inside the tool path the robot tool moves depends on the accuracy level
setting.

Recorded point Recorded point

A1P A1P

A8P A8P

Pause

Both A1P and A8P tool tip continue through the recorded points. However, the positioning
accuracy differs according to the accuracy level. The lower the figure used for the accuracy
level, the greater the deceleration at the recorded points and the higher the positioning
accuracy which is achieved.
Record the accuracy level for those steps requiring positioning accuracy.

4-7
4.3 Teaching

When input signal is checked

The timing to check the input signal of function command varies depending the existence of “P” (in-position
check) mark on move command. Please refer to the following table explaining its timing by sample program.

【Sample program】
1. MOVE A1
2. MOVE A1
3. MOVE A1
4. MOVE A8 (with “P” mark or without “P” mark)
5. WAITI (read input signal）
6. SETM
7. MOVE A1

When input signal is ON When input signal is OFF

S tep .5 WAI TI

S tep .6 SE TM

S t ep.4

St ep.2
S tep .3
S t ep.7
S tep .1
Step 4 Inp ut sign al w as ON I np ut sig na l w as O F F
is w he n pass in g throu gh ste p 3 w he n p assin g t hrou gh ste p 3

recorded
When step 4 (move command just before WAITI command) is recorded without "P" mark,
without input signal is checked (read) at the timing of passing through step 3 (one step before step
“P” mark 4). In case that plural step without "P" mark continues, the timing to check (read) input
signal is "just one step before".

If input signal was ON at that timing, input signal is not checked (read) any more and robot
moves on the short-cut trajectory like above figure.
If input signal was OFF at that timing, robot makes a brief stop at step 4 and starts waiting
for input signal. Even if input signal was ON while moving from step 3 to step 4, in-position
check is carried out at step 4.

Step 4 inp ut sign al w as inp ut signa l w as

ON w he n OF F w he n
is a rriving to th e a rriving to th e
ste p ste p
recorded
with
“P” mark
When step 4 (move command just before WAITI command) is recorded with "P" mark,
in-position check (command reaches to the recorded position and wait for robot arrival) is
carried out at step 4, and then input signal is checked (read).

If input signal was ON at that timing, robot starts moving to the next step.
If input signal was OFF at that timing, robot keeps stopping and waiting for the input signal.

4-8
 4.3 Teaching

4.3.6 What is the acceleration?

The “acceleration” is a function which adjusts the smoothness by adjusting the acceleration of the
robot operation. When vibration arises due to a factor such as the rigidity of the tool or work, the
robot can be moved gently by using the function in the movement command concerned. As a
result, the amount of vibration is reduced. Unlike the “accuracy level” which expresses the
positioning roughness when the tool passes through the recorded points, “acceleration” functions
even when there is one movement command.

“Acceleration” can be specified for each movement command, and one of four different settings (0,
1, 2 or 3) can be selected. At an acceleration setting of 0 (D0), the robot accelerates or
decelerates at its maximum capacity, and the higher the setting used, the more smoothly (that is
to say, the lower the acceleration) the robot moves. (Factory setting)
Speed

Normal speed curve

(=D0)
Time

Fig. 4.3.2 “Acceleration”

Open the screen editing window, and set a level from 0 to 3 at the position shown in the figure
below.
A number appears after “D.” The display is cleared only when 0 has been set.

This is the “acceleration” setting.

↓

Fig. 4.3.3 Example of “acceleration” step display

Furthermore, if the “Accel” F key is used, the acceleration can be set in the recording status.

When “acceleration” is set, it always takes longer for the robot to move.
Since this will adversely affect the cycle (tact) time, do not record the function in
IMPORTANT movement commands unnecessarily.

Both “acceleration" and “smoothness” can be recorded at the same time.

IMPORTANT Both will function simultaneously.

4-9
4.3 Teaching

4.3.7 What is smoothness?

“Smoothness” is a function that adjusts the smoothness by changing the acceleration speed of the
robot axes. When vibration arises due to a factor such as the rigidity of the tool or work, the robot
can be moved gently by using the function in the movement command concerned. As a result, the
amount of vibration is reduced. Unlike the “accuracy level” which expresses the positioning
roughness when the tool passes through the recorded points, “smoothness” functions even when
there is one movement command.

“Smoothness” can be specified for each movement command, and one of four different settings (0,
1, 2 or 3) can be selected. At a smoothness setting of 0 (S0), the robot accelerates or decelerates
at its maximum capacity, and the higher the setting used, the more smoothly (that is to say, the
lower the acceleration speed) the robot moves. (Factory setting)

Effects produced by “smoothness”

Speed

Time

Fig. 4.3.4 “Smoothness”

Open the screen editing window, and set a level from 0 to 3 at the position shown in the figure
below.
A number appears after “S.” The display is cleared only when 0 has been set.

This is the “smoothness” setting.

↓

Fig. 4.3.5 Example of “smoothness” step display

Furthermore, if the “Smooth” F key is used, the smoothness can be set in the recording status.

When “Smoothness” is set, it takes longer for the robot to move.

Since this will adversely affect the cycle (tact) time, do not record the function in
IMPORTANT movement commands unnecessarily.

Both “acceleration" and “smoothness” can be recorded at the same time.

IMPORTANT Both will function simultaneously.

4-10
 4.3 Teaching

4.3.8 Number of recordable steps

The recommended maximum number of steps that should be recorded in a program is
approximately 300.
If the number of steps exceeds 300, divide the steps into multiple programs, and then call the
programs divided from the parent program using the program call command (FN80).
By dividing, the programs can be reused, and management and maintenance also become easier.

Teaching involving large numbers of steps Reducing the numbers of steps for teaching to facilitate management

Program No.1 Program No.1 Main

1 REM “Task program” 1 REM “Main program”

2 SET [01] 2 CALLP [100]
3 WAITI [10] 3 CALLP [200]
4 REM “Process 1 start” Program No.100 Sub 4 CALLP [300]
5 100% JOINT A8 5 CALLP [400]
6 100% JOINT A8 1 REM “Process 1” 6 END
: 2 100% JOINT A8
108 100% JOINT A8 3 100% JOINT A8
109 REM “Process 1 end” Divided. :
110 REM “Process 2 start” 105 100% JOINT A8
111 100% JOINT A8 106 END Program No.200 Sub
112 100% JOINT A8
: 1 REM “Process 2”
200 100% JOINT A8 2 100% JOINT A8
201 REM “Process 2 end” Divided. 3 100% JOINT A8
202 REM “Process 3 start” :
203 80% JOINT A8 104 100% JOINT A8
204 100% JOINT A8 105 END Program No.300 Sub
:
313 100% JOINT A8 1 REM “Process 3”
314 REM “Process 3 end” 2 100% JOINT A8
: Divided. 3 100% JOINT A8
500 100% JOINT A8 :
501 END 112 100% JOINT A8
113 END

Fig. 4.3.6 Example of teaching with reduced numbers of steps

If the “A2150: Program is too large” error message appears during teaching or
screen editing, it means that the number of steps stored in a task program is too
high. This error occurs when the file size exceeds 64Kb.
In a case like this, divide the task program in the manner shown in the example
above.

IMPORTANT When dividing an existing task program, press the [PROG./STEP] key, select
“Copy,” and copy the steps into a new task program. (Step copy function)
The step copy function can also be selected by selecting <Service utilities> - [9
Program
Conversion] - [2 Step copy].

The “A3084: Media device is full” error message sometimes appears during teaching,
screen editing, file editing or a file operation. This error is caused by insufficient
memory as defined in the cases described below.

• There is not enough space or no space at all in the internal memory device to
record new data.
IMPORTANT • There is not enough space in the internal memory to edit or operate the specified
file.

In such a case, make more space in the internal memory by “deleting unused files” or
“saving files which have not been used recently onto a USB memory and deleting
them.”

4-11
4.4 Try Teaching <<Operating Mode A>>

4.4 Try Teaching <<Operating Mode A>>

4.4.1 Teaching method

There are broadly 2 types of teaching method for <<Operating mode A>>. In one method, the
recorded status is used for teaching (Fig. 4.4.1 (A)), and in the other method the whole screen is
used for teaching (Fig. 4.4.1(B)). The teaching method can be selected by the operation used for
teaching the movement command. Use whichever method is easier.

Recording status

(Switching operation)

(Switching operation)

(Switching operation)

(A) Teaching the movement command from the recorded (B) Teaching the movement command from 1
status screen
Fig. 4.4.1 Teaching Method

INFO. When the teaching method in Fig. 4.4.1 (B) is used, the teaching operation
can be done in almost exactly the same way as Daihen robots prior to the
EX-C series.

There are specialized operations in both (A) and (B) in Fig. 4.4.1. In addition to them, operations
can be performed using [ENABLE] + number keys ([7]~[9]).
For teaching with [ENABLE] + number keys ([7]~[9]), the settings in Table 4.4.1 need to be
configured.

Table 4.4.1 [Constant Setting] - [7 f-Keys] – [8 HARD KEY] settings

<Constant settings> (A) Teaching the movement
(B) Teaching the movement
- [7 f-Keys] command from the
command from 1 screen
- [8 HARD KEY] settings recorded status
“The use of the hard key” Use Use
“The instruction method of the
Simple teaching Detailed teaching
movement order”

INFO. For details of the setting procedures for [Constant Setting] - [7 f-Keys] – [8
HARD KEY], see “7.7 Customizing the Hard Keys” in “Chapter 7 Useful
functions.”

4-12
 4.4 Try Teaching <<Operating Mode A>>

Teaching the movement command from the recorded status

1 Use the [Axis operating keys] to move the robot to the position to be recorded.

2 In the recorded status, the movement command is already in the selected state.

Recording status

Set the move method, speed, and accuracy level from this state to the teaching step.

3 While pressing [ENABLE], press [INTERP/COORD] and set the interpolation

＋ specification for the recorded status.
>> Each time it is pressed, the interpolation classification of the recorded status
switches in order between “JOINT” → “LIN” → “CIR” → “JOINT.”

Alternatively, hold down [ENABLE] and press [7~9] to set the interpolation
specification directly.
>> Press [ENABLE] + [7] → Interpolation classification switches to “JOINT.”
Press [ENABLE] + [8] → Interpolation classification switches to “LIN.”
or Press [ENABLE] + [9] → Interpolation classification switches to “CIR.”

4 Press [SPD].
>> The speed correction screen is displayed.

5 Enter the desired speed (e.g. “100”), and press [Enter].

[Number]
Key >> “100%” is displayed in the recording status.

6 To specify the accuracy level, press [ACC].

>> Each time the button is pressed, the accuracy level changes in order from A1 to A8.

7 Press [O.WRITE / REC].

>> The step is recorded.

4-13
4.4 Try Teaching <<Operating Mode A>>

Details after the movement command is recorded

Step numbers are added to the recorded steps, which are then written to the
program.

POINT
1 2 3 4 5

1 : Step number. Specify this step number to perform step jump.

2 : Set speed.
3 : Interpolation classification. JOINT, LIN, or C1/C2 is displayed.
4 : Accuracy. Set to A8 for “With overlap,” and A1 for “No overlap.” “P” is
added when specified for positioning.
5: Tool number.

POINT To perform the operations marked within the dotted lines above, see “4.4.1
Teaching method.”

4-14
 4.4 Try Teaching <<Operating Mode A>>

Teaching the movement command using the whole screen

1 Press [CLAMP ARC].
>> Frequently used commands are displayed in the f keys.

POINT Perform operation 1 when using the f keys for teaching.

When using the keys inside the dotted lines (number keys) in the subsequent
explanation, this operation is not needed.

 When f1 <Key switch> is pressed, a different command group is

INFO. displayed in the f keys.
 When [CLAMP ARC] is pressed again, the f key display returns to the
previous display.

2 Use the [Axis operating keys] to move the robot to the position to be recorded.

3 Press the f key that corresponds to the interpolation classification that you want
to record. Alternatively, hold down [ENABLE] and press the corresponding
number key ([7]~[9]).
>> The corresponding screen as shown below is displayed.
f7 <Positioning P> Or [ENABLE] + [7] → Joint interpolation (JOINT)
f8 <Linear L> Or [ENABLE] + [8] → Linear interpolation (LIN)
f9 <Circular C> Or [ENABLE] + [9] → Circular interpolation (C1/C2)

or E.g: For Joint Interpolation (JOINT)

4-15
4.4 Try Teaching <<Operating Mode A>>

4 Enter the desired speed (e.g. “100”), and press [Enter].

[Number]
Key

5 Align the cursor to “Overlap”, then hold [ENABLE] and press [Left /Right].
＋
Select “Yes/No.” “Numerical input” is selected when performing fine settings of the
accuracy, but in normal circumstances it is sufficient to select “Yes/No.”

6 It is normally sufficient to set 4 speed and 5 With overlap/No overlap, so proceed

to operation 9.
For advanced purposes, use operations 7 and 8.

7 Set the tool number in “Tool."

Normally, there is only 1 tool (torch or hand), so this is not changed from “1.” If this is
incorrectly specified, the position of the robot itself does not change. However, the robot
interpolation accuracy is affected during playback because the tool control point (TCP) is
different.
Specify the tool number only when operation requires the tool to be changed a number of
times using a tool changer etc.

8 Detailed settings such as numeric specification of the accuracy and speed can be
done from the “Details” tab.
Press [CLOSE/SELECT SCREEN] to switch tabs.

For details on these conditions, see the robot’s built-in reference manual.

9 After configuring all of the conditions, press f12 <Complete>.

>> The step is recorded.

POINT To perform the operations marked within the dotted lines above, see “4.4.1
Teaching method.”

INFO. When the cursor is moved to “Interp.” the interpolation classification

can be switched. This is useful in situations such as when the wrong
command is selected due to mistaken key operation.

4-16
 4.4 Try Teaching <<Operating Mode A>>

4.4.2 Try Teaching

Upon completion of the preparations, try a practice session in teaching.
In this section, the program shown below will be created.

Teaching
Teaching start position
As shown in the figure on the left,
Step 1
(work home point) Step 6 move the robot from step 1 to step
5, and record the positions.
Superimpose the recording position
for step 6 at the same position as
step 1.
Step 2 Step 5 This is done in order to ensure that
the robot operation will move
directly from step 5 to the step 1
Step 3 Step 4 position without being interrupted
(actual work start position) (actual work end position) during playback.

Fig. 4.4.2 Teaching example

Recording step 1 (work home point)

Record step 1 as the work home point. Here, record using the teaching method that uses the
record status.

Teaching start position

Step 1
(work home point)

1 Use the [Axis operation keys] to move the robot to step 1.

As step 1, set the robot to the position which will serve as the work home point.

2 In the recording status, movement commands have already been selected.

Recording status

From this state, specify the method, the speed and the accuracy level of the movement
up to step 1.
For step 1, try setting “joint interpolation” for the movement method, “100%” for the
speed and “1” for the accuracy level.

3 While holding down [ENABLE], press [INTERP/COORD], and set the interpolation
＋ specification of the recording status to “JOINT.”
>> Each time this is pressed, the interpolation type of the recording status is switched in
the following sequence: “JOINT” → “LIN” → “CIR” → “JOINT”, etc.

4 Press [SPD].
>> The speed correction screen is displayed.

4-17
4.4 Try Teaching <<Operating Mode A>>

5 Input “100,” and press [Enter].

100 >> “100%” is displayed in the recording status.

6 To specify the accuracy level, press [ACC].

>> Each time it is pressed, the accuracy changes in sequence by one level from A1 to
A8.

7 Press [O.WRITE/REC].
>> Step 1 is now recorded.

Recording step 2 (just before the actual work start position)

Record step 2 near the actual work start position. The actual work start position denotes the
position where the actual welding or other work will be performed.

Step 1
(work home point)

Step 2

1 Use the [Axis operation keys] to move the robot to step 2.

As step 2, set the robot to just before the start position of the work. In terms of the
posture, set the robot to the posture which is close to the one in which the robot will
actually perform the work in step 3.

2 Set the movement method and speed up to step 2.

In the same way as for step 1, try setting “joint interpolation” for the movement method
and “100%” for the speed.
The movement command stored last is left for the recording status. To use the
previous condition as is, press [O.WRITE/REC] without changing the value.
>> Step 2 is now recorded.

4-18
 4.4 Try Teaching <<Operating Mode A>>

Recording step 3 (actual work start position)

Record the position where the actual welding or other work is to start as step 3.

Step 2

Step 3
(actual work start position)

1 Use the [Axis operation keys] to move the robot to step 3.

Since step 3 is the position where the actual welding and other work are to start,
manually operate the robot until its posture is optimal for the work to be performed.

2 Set the movement method and speed up to step 3.

3 Press [O.WRITE/REC].
>> Step 3 is now recorded.

Recording step 4 (actual work end position)

Record the position where the actual welding or other work is to end as step 4. Try recording this
step and the following steps using the teaching method that uses the whole screen.

POINT  If the f keys are not displayed, press [CLAMP ARC] to display them.
 To perform the [ENABLE] + [7~9] operation, see “4.4.1 Teaching method.”

Step 3 Step 4
(actual work start position) (actual work end position)

1 Use the [Axis operation keys] to move the robot to step 4.

The movements of the robot by manual operations up to step 4 need not be in a straight
line. A detour may be taken but operate the robot manually in such a way that it does not
make contact with the work piece.

4-19
4.4 Try Teaching <<Operating Mode A>>

2 Use linear interpolation for the movement to step 4.

Press f8 <Linear L> or [ENABLE] with [8].
or >> Linear interpolation (LINE) is selected.

3 Set the speed and overlap to enabled or disabled.

4 After configuring all of the conditions, press f12 <Complete>.

>> Step 4 is recorded.

Recording step 5 (position away from the work piece)

Record the position away from the work piece as step 5.

Step 5

Step 4
(actual work end position)

1 Use the [Axis operation keys] to move the robot to step 5.

As step 5, set the robot in the appropriate position at some distance from the work piece.

2 Use “joint interpolation” for the movement to step 5.

Press f7 <Joint P>.
>> Joint interpolation (JOINT) is selected.

3 Set the speed and overlap to enabled or disabled.

4-20
 4.4 Try Teaching <<Operating Mode A>>

4 After configuring all of the conditions, press f12 <Complete>.

>> Step 5 is recorded.

Recording step 6 (same position as for step 1)

Record the same position as for step 1 as step 6.

Step 6

Set to the same position.

Step 5

1 Press [PROG/STEP].
>> The [Step Selection] screen now appears.

2 Input “1” in “Designated step”, and press [Enter].

>> The cursor moves to step 1.

3 While grasping the [Enable switch], press [CHECK GO]. (Keep pressing it until
the robot stops.)
＋ >> The robot moves to the position recorded in step 1.

4 To record the position where the robot stopped (position in step 1) as step 6, call step
5.

4-21
4.4 Try Teaching <<Operating Mode A>>

Press [PROG/STEP].
>> The [Step Selection] screen now appears.

5 Select “Bottom”, and press [Enter].

>> The cursor moves to the last step (step 5).
This is now the state in which step 6 can be recorded.

6 The conditions in step 5 will be used as is, so press [O.WRITE/REC].

>> Step 6 is now recorded.

Recording the end command (End function command)

Since all the steps have now been recorded, record the end command at the end of the program.
The end command must be recorded without fail.

1 Press f6 <END>. Alternatively, hold [ENABLE] and press [END/TIMER].

>> The end command is now recorded.

or

This now completes the creation of the program.

Next, check the robot operations, postures, etc.

4-22
 4.5 A practice teaching session <<Operating mode S>>

4.5 A practice teaching session <<Operating mode S>>

Upon completion of the preparations, try a practice session in teaching.
In this section, the program shown below will be created.

Teaching
Teaching start position
As shown in the figure on the left,
Step 1
(work home point) Step 6 move the robot from step 1 to step
5, and record the positions.
Superimpose the recording position
for step 6 at the same position as
step 1.
Step 2 Step 5 This is done in order to ensure that
the robot operation will move
directly from step 5 to the step 1
Step 3 Step 4 position without being interrupted
(actual work end position)
(actual work start position) during playback.

Fig. 4.5.1 Teaching example

Recording step 1 (work home point)

Record step 1 as the work home point.

Teaching start position

Step 1
(work home point)

1 Use the [Axis operation keys] to move the robot to step 1.

As step 1, set the robot to the position which will serve as the work home point.

2 In the recording status, movement commands have already been selected.

Recording status

From this state, specify the method, the speed and the accuracy level of the movement
up to step 1.
For step 1, try setting “joint interpolation” for the movement method, “100%” for the
speed and “1” for the accuracy level.

3 While holding down [ENABLE], press [INTERP/COORD], and set the interpolation
＋ specification of the recording status to “JOINT.”
or >> Each time this is pressed, the interpolation type of the recording status is switched in
the following sequence: “JOINT” → “LIN” → “JOINT”, etc.

4-23
4.5 A practice teaching session <<Operating mode S>>

4 Press [CHECK SPD/TEACH SPEED], and set the manual speed to “5” (the
recording status speed also changes along with the manual speed. When “5” is
set, “100%” is displayed).

5 To specify the accuracy level, press [ACC].

>> Each time it is pressed, the accuracy changes in sequence by one level from A1 to
A8.

6 Press [O.WRITE/REC].
>> Step 1 is now recorded.

Recording step 2 (just before the actual work start position)

Record step 2 near the actual work start position. The actual work start position denotes the
position where the actual welding or other work will be performed.

Step 1
(work home point)

Step 2

1 Use the [Axis operation keys] to move the robot to step 2.

As step 2, set the robot to just before the start position of the work. In terms of the
posture, set the robot to the posture which is close to the one in which the robot will
actually perform the work in step 3.

2 Set the movement method and speed up to step 2.

In the same way as for step 1, try setting “joint interpolation” for the movement method
and “100%” for the speed.

The movement command stored last is left for the recording status. To use the
previous condition as is, press [O.WRITE/REC] without changing the value.
>> Step 2 is now recorded.

4-24
 4.5 A practice teaching session <<Operating mode S>>

Recording step 3 (actual work start position)

Record the position where the actual welding or other work is to start as step 3.

Step 2

Step 3
(actual work start position)

1 Use the [Axis operation keys] to move the robot to step 3.

Since step 3 is the position where the actual welding and other work are to start,
manually operate the robot until its posture is optimal for the work to be performed.

2 Set the movement method and speed up to step 3.

3 Press [O.WRITE/REC].
>> Step 3 is now recorded.

Recording step 4 (actual work end position)

Record the position where the actual welding or other work is to end as step 4.

Step 3 Step 4
(actual work start position) (actual work end position)

1 Use the [Axis operation keys] to move the robot to step 4.

The movements of the robot by manual operations up to step 4 need not be in a straight
line. A detour may be taken but operate the robot manually in such a way that it does not
make contact with the work piece.

2 Set the move method and speed up to step 4.

Set the move method to “Interpolation on (linear),” and the speed to "500mm/s.”

While pressing [ENABLE], press [INTERP/COORD] and set the interpolation

＋ specification for the recorded status to linear interpolation (“LIN” is displayed in
the recorded status).

Press [CHECK SPD/TEACH SPEED], and set the speed to “500mm/s.”

4-25
4.5 A practice teaching session <<Operating mode S>>

3 Press [O.WRITE/REC].
>> Step 4 is now recorded.

Recording step 5 (position away from the work piece)

Record the position away from the work piece as step 5.

Step 5

Step 4
(actual work end position)

1 Use the [Axis operation keys] to move the robot to step 5.

As step 5, set the robot in the appropriate position at some distance from the work piece.

2 Set the move method and speed up to step 5.

Set the move method for step 5 to “Joint interpolation”, and speed to “100%.”

While pressing [ENABLE], press [INTERP/COORD] and set the interpolation

＋ specification for the recorded status to “JOINT.”

Also, press [CHECK SPD/TEACH SPEED], and set the speed to “100%.”

3 Press [O.WRITE/REC].
>> Step 5 is now recorded.

4-26
 4.5 A practice teaching session <<Operating mode S>>

Recording step 6 (same position as for step 1)

Record the same position as for step 1 as step 6.

Step 6

Set to the same position.

Step 5

1 Press [PROG/STEP].
>> The [Step Selection] screen now appears.

2 Input “1” in “Designated step”, and press [Enter].

>> The cursor moves to step 1.

3 While grasping the [Enable switch] press [CHECK GO]. (Keep pressing it until
the robot stops.)
＋ >> The robot moves to the position recorded in step 1.

4 To record the position where the robot stopped (position in step 1) as step 6,
call step 5.

Press [PROG/STEP].
>> The [Step Selection] screen now appears.

5 Select “Bottom” and press [Enter].

>> The cursor moves to the last step (step 5).
This is now the state in which step 6 can be recorded.

6 The conditions in step 5 will be used as is, so press [O.WRITE/REC].

>> Step 6 is now recorded.

4-27
4.5 A practice teaching session <<Operating mode S>>

Recording the end command (End function command)

Since all the steps have now been recorded, record the end command at the end of the program.
The end command can be recorded either by specifying function number FN92 or by selecting the
END function command from the list of commands. (The end command must be recorded without
fail.)

1 Press [FN], then press [9] → [2] → [Enter].

Alternatively, hold [ENABLE] and press [END/TIMER].
>> The end command is now recorded.

or

This now completes the creation of the program.

Next, check the robot operations, postures, etc.

4-28
 4.6 Recording function commands

4.6 Recording function commands

In order to operate the hand or gun attached to the robot wrist or capture signals that check the work, function
commands (functions) are recorded at the appropriate positions in the program.
Furthermore, in order to perform complicated work, other programs may be called or, depending on the status of
the external signals, operation may jump to other programs. These are also recorded as function commands.

The basic function commands are expressed using a format based on SLIM (Standard Language for Industrial
Manipulators) which is a robot language.
Alternatively, function commands can be specified using the “FN***” format where a 1- to 3-digit number is input
into the “***” part (which is called a function number).

Some typical function commands are shown below.

Table 4.6.1 Typical function commands

Function
Function
Command Title Description of function
number
(SLIM)

SET FN32 Output signal ON The specified output signal is set to ON.

RESET FN34 Output signal OFF The specified output signal is set to OFF.

This causes the robot to stand by for the

DELAY FN50 Timer
specified time.
Another program which has been
CALLP FN80 Program call
specified is called.
When the specified signal is ON, another
CALLPI FN81 Conditional program call
program is called.

END FN92 END The execution of the program is ended.

This attaches a descriptive comment in

REM FN99 Comment
the program.
Input signal wait This causes the robot to stand by until the
WAITI FN525
(positive logic) specified signal is set to ON.
Input signal wait This causes the robot to stand by until the
WAITJ FN526
(negative logic) specified signal is set to OFF.

4-29
4.6 Recording function commands

4.6.1 Directly selecting a command with the function numbers

This section explains how to select function commands directly, using the function numbers.

Selecting function commands (How to directly select a command with the function
numbers)
1 Press [FN] at the position where the function command is to be recorded.
>> The list of function commands is now displayed.

2 The function commands can be rearranged in the order of function number or in

＋ alphabetical order using expressions in the SLIM format.
To select the sorting sequence, press [left or right] while holding down [ENABLE].

3 Either select the function command from the list or input its function number, and
press [Enter].

4-30
 4.6 Recording function commands

4.6.2 Selecting from categorized groups

This section explains how to select function commands from categorized groups. This method is
useful since it allows you to find the command you want to record from among categorized groups,
even if you don’t remember the function number.
To make a selection by group, it is necessary to have [Constant Setting] — [5 Operation
Constants] — [1 Operation condition] — [11 Selection of a function] set to “Group”. These settings
become the default status for the robot set in <<Operating mode A>>.

Selecting function commands (When selecting from categorized groups)

1 Press [FN] at the position where the function command is to be recorded.
>> The function groups will be displayed on the f keys.

2 Selecting a program call (CALLP) is given here as an example.

Press f6 <Program/Step call>.
>> The function commands related to program calls and step calls will be displayed on
the f keys. At the same time, the function commands being displayed in “Function
Record Status” in the center of the screen will be narrowed down.

4-31
4.6 Recording function commands

3 Press f9 <CALLP>.
>> The program call command is now selected.

It can also be selected using the following methods.

• Select from the list in the center of the screen using [Up/Down] [Enter].
• Input its function number, and press [Enter].

4-32
 4.6 Recording function commands

4.6.3 Setting and recording function command parameters (conditions)

This section describes how to input and record parameters (conditions) after the function
commands have been selected.
Recording the output signal ON command (SET <FN32> function command) will be used here as
an example.

Setting and recording function command parameters (conditions)

1 Either select the output signal ON command (SET) from the list or input its
function number (FN32), and press [Enter].
>> The output signal ON command is now selected.

2 Input the number of the output signal using the [Number input keys].
The parameters which are to be set and their input ranges are displayed on the screen.

2 3

1 Name of parameter and its input range

2 Function number
3 Setting (in this case, 100 is set as the output number)

To correct input errors

To delete the wrong setting which has been input for a parameter, press [BS].

When there are 2 or more parameters

In the case of an function command with 2 or more parameters, input the first
parameter, and then press [Enter]. Proceed to input the second and subsequent
parameters.

3 Upon completion of the parameter settings, press [Enter].

>> The output signal ON command is now recorded.

4-33
4.7 Checking what has been taught

4.7 Checking what has been taught

4.7.1 Outline
After the program has been created, be absolutely sure to check what has been taught.
This checking work is called the check operation. When the check operation is performed, the robot can be
made to stop at each step so that its position and posture at each step, and the path of its movement between
steps can be checked. If necessary, modifications can be made.
Use [CHECK GO] and [CHECK BACK] on the teach pendant for the check operation. “Check go” refers to
moving the robot step by step starting with the lowest step number; “check back” refers to operating the robot
starting with the highest step number.
The robot can also be moved through all the steps continuously.

4.7.2 Setting of “Check with function”

This setting is necessary to execute function step in [Check GO] operation.

<Service> [1 Teach/Play Condition] [9 Check with function] = [Enabled]

(If this setting was [Disabled], only move step is executed in [Check GO] operation.)

Change this setting and press <Complete> key.

4-34
 4.7 Checking what has been taught

4.7.3 Checking the step sequence [CHECK GO]

The operation of the program created in the previous section will be checked here.
The screen that appears when teaching is completed should be the one shown below.

If the created program has not been selected, select it using the method described in “4.2
Preparations prior to teaching” (Page 4-2).

1 Press [PROG/STEP] in order to call the step which is to be checked first.

>> The [Step Selection] screen now appears.

2 Input [0] in “Designated step”, and press [Enter].

>> The cursor moves to step 0 ([START]).

POINT To check from the start of the program, specify “0” as the Designated
step.

3 To specify the speed to be used during the check operation, press [CHECK
＋ SPD/TEACH SPEED] while holding down [ENABLE]. Here, select “3” to ensure
safety.
>> Each time the [CHECK SPD/TEACH SPEED] key is pressed, the speed changes in
sequence to the next of the 5 settings.
“1” is the slowest speed, and “5” is the fastest.

INFO. The check operation speed can be changed by grasping the [ENABLE
SWITCH], and rotating the [JOG DIAL] while holding down [Enable].

4-35
4.7 Checking what has been taught

4 Press [CHECK GO] while grasping the [ENABLE SWITCH].

>> While [CHECK GO] is pressed, the robot starts moving toward step 1, and when it
＋ reaches step 1, it stops.

When the step is

reached, the display
turns yellow.

When [CHECK GO] is released while the robot is moving, the robot stops.
The robot also stops when the enable switch is released during operation. However,
in this case, the servo power is turned off immediately without the acceleration or
deceleration applying a heavy load to the mechanisms. Before releasing the enable
switch, try to remember to release [CHECK GO] and wait for the robot to come to a
standstill.

5 To move to step 2, first release [CHECK GO] and then press it again.
Check up to the final step by repeating these operations.
When the final step is reached, the robot operates again from step 1.

4.7.4 Checking the steps in the reverse order [CHECK BACK]

The robot can also be operated in the reverse order of the steps.

1 Press [CHECK BACK] while grasping the [ENABLE SWITCH].

>> The robot now moves in the reverse order of the steps.
＋ When step 1 is reached by [CHECK BACK], the robot operates no further. (Check
back cannot be performed to the final step.)

2 The operation method after the speed has been switched or robot has stopped at a step,
etc. are the same as for Check Go.
The robot also stops when the enable switch is released during operation. However, in
this case, the servo power is turned off immediately without the acceleration or
deceleration applying a heavy load to the mechanisms. Before releasing the enable
switch, try to remember to release [CHECK BACK] and wait for the robot to come to a
standstill.

4.7.5 Checking the steps continuously

The robot can be operated continuously step by step by holding down [CHECK GO] or [CHECK
BACK].
When the continuous mode is specified, the robot passes along an arc on the inside of the
recorded points, reflecting the accuracy levels taught at each step.

1 Press [STOP/CONT].
>> “CONT” is displayed in the [Step number display area].

2 Perform the Check Go/Check Back operation. Hold down the [CHECK GO] or
[CHECK
＋ BACK] key.
>> The robot operates continuously step by step.

3 To release the continuous mode, press [STOP/CONT] again.

4-36
 4.7 Checking what has been taught

4.7.6 Switching the continuous/step mode during Check Go operation

The continuous mode can be switched to the step mode and vice versa by pressing down [Shift]
while pressing [CHECK GO].
While pressing the [Shift], the display is shown to switch from the continuous mode to the step
mode and conversely, therefore Check Go is operated following the mode which is switched.

When the continuous mode

1 Press the [STOP/CONT].
>> “CONT” is displayed in the [Step number display area].

2 Perform the Check Go operation. Press down the [CHECK GO].

>> The robot operates continuously step by step.
＋

3 Pressing down the [Shift] while Check Go operation, switching from the
＋ continuous mode into the step mode.
>> During this time, the display changes from "[CONT]” to “[step].”
While this “step” is displayed, Check Go is considered as the completion when the
current step has been completed as the same Check Go of “BREAK” mode.
When Check Go is completed, the display returns from “[step]” to “[CONT].”

4 To release the step mode, release the [Shift].

Or release the [CHECK GO].
>> When the mode release is completed, the display returns from “[step]” to “[CONT].”

When the step mode

1 Press [Stop/Cont].
>> Nothing has been displayed in the [Step number display area].

2 Perform the Check Go operation. Pressing down the [CHECK GO].

>> The robot operates step toward the next step.
＋

3 Pressing down the [Shift] while playback, switching from the step mode into the
＋ continuous mode.
>> During this time, the display changes from “ ” (no display) to "[CONT].”
While this “CONT” is displayed, Check Go is considered as the completion when the
final step has been completed, and the robot operates continuously step by step as
the same Check Go of the continuously mode.
When Check Go is completed, the display returns from “[CONT]” to “ ” (no display).

4 To release the continuous mode, release the [Shift].

Or release the [CHECK GO].
>> When the mode release is completed, the display returns from “[CONT]” to “ ” (no
display).

4-37
4.7 Checking what has been taught

4.7.7 Jump to the Specified Step [Step Jump]

When you want to move to a specified step, press [PROG/STEP] and specify the number of the
step to which you want to move.
However, when you move the robot using [CHECK GO] operation after specifying the step,
always be sure to specify a move command step. You can specify an function command step and
only move the cursor, but an error will occur when you do [CHECK GO].

1 Press [PROG/STEP].
>> [Step Selection] screen appears.

2 When designating the number of the step, input the number of the step in
Number “Designated step”, and press [Enter].
>> The cursor moves to the step which has been designated.

3 When you move relatively from the current step, without specifying a step
number, specify the jump destination in the “Edit” column.
>> The cursor moves to the step which has been designated.

You can select from among the following items.

Movement destination Movements of the cursor

Next Move Step Move from the current step to the next move step (skip function
command steps).
Prev. Move Step Move from the current step to the previous move step (skip
function command steps).
Last Move Step Move to the last move step in the program.
Bottom Move to the last step in the program.
Copy Call the step copy function.
This is the same as selecting <Service Utilities> — [9 Program
Conversion] — [2 Step copy].

4 “Select Interpolation” specifies the operation method when moving to a step.

＋ Before inputting a step number, you can switch using [LEFT/RIGHT] while holding
down [ENABLE].

Movement format Movements of the robot

depend on step At the time of a check operation to the specified
step, operation is done according to the
interpolation classification of the target step. For
example, when the target step is “LIN”, movement
is done using linear interpolation.
Joint At the time of check operation to the specified
step, movement is done using joint interpolation.

5 While grasping the [ENABLE SWITCH], press [CHECK GO].

>> The robot moves as far as the designated step.
＋

4-38
 4.8 Modifying the program

4.8 Modifying the program

This section describes how to modify the commands which have been recorded in the program.
The commands can be modified in a number of ways as follows.

Table 4.8.1 How to change the steps

Description of modification Operation method Reference page

Modifying the position
[ENABLE] + [MOD Position] Page 4-39
only
Modifying the speed only
[SPD]
<<Operating mode S>>
Modifying the accuracy Page 4-40
Movement
command only [ACC]
modification <<Operating mode S>>
[ENABLE] + [O.WRITE/REC]
Modifying everything
※ Use this method to modify the
together
interpolation type, tool number, etc. Page 4-41
(Movement command
since they cannot be modified
overwriting)
separately.
Adding movement commands [ENABLE] + [INS] Page 4-44
This is added automatically with the same
Adding function commands method as in new teaching. It is added at
the same position as the move command.
Deleting movement commands and
[ENABLE] + [DEL] Page 4-47
function commands
[EDIT]
※ The parameters of the function
Using the screen editing function to
commands cannot be modified in the Page 4-52
modify commands
teach screen. Use the screen editing
function to modify commands.

4.8.1 Modifying the robot position

Try changing the position of step 2 in the program such as the following.

Current step 2
New step 2

Modifying the robot position

1 Move the robot to step 2 using [CHECK GO] (or [CHECK BACK]).

Alternatively, the step may be called.

INFO. An alternative to the operation in 1 is to call step 2 by selecting [PROG/STEP]
→ [2] → [Enter]. In this case, however, what happens is that only the display
moves and the robot fails to move to step 2. To move the robot, designate the
step and then press [CHECK GO].

4-39
4.8 Modifying the program

2 Use the [Axis operation keys] to operate the robot manually to set it to the position
and posture to which they are to be changed.

3 Hold [ENABLE] and press [Modify position].

＋ >> A confirmation screen is displayed.

4 Select “OK” and press [Enter].

>> The position is now modified.

This completes the modification of the step 2 position.

4.8.2 Modifying movement command data <<Operating mode S>>

The speed and accuracy recorded in a movement command can be modified separately without
changing the position data of the robot. This method can only be used when <<Operating mode
S>> is set. This method cannot be used for modification when <<Operating mode A>> is set.
Overwrite the linear command, or use screen editing.
Modifying the speed and accuracy in step 3 is given here as an example.

Modifying movement command data

1 Press [PROG/STEP] → [3] → [Enter].
>> The cursor moves to step 3.

2 To change the speed, press [SPD].

>> The [Modify speed] screen now appears.

3 Use the [Number input keys] to input the value.

4 Press [Enter].
>> The new specified speed is recorded.

5 To change the accuracy, press [ACC].

>> The [Modify accuracy] screen now appears.

6 Press [Enter].
>> The new specified accuracy is recorded.
This completes the modification of the step 3 speed and accuracy.

4-40
 4.8 Modifying the program

4.8.3 Overwriting movement commands

Steps can also be overwritten.
When a step has been overwritten, all the data including the position of the robot, its speed and
interpolation type is modified.
Changing joint interpolation in step 3 to linear interpolation is given here as an example.

Overwriting movement commands <<Operating mode A>>

1 Press [PROG/STEP] → [3] → [Enter].
>> The cursor moves to step 3.

2 To change the position, use the [Axis operation keys] to operate the robot
manually.

Modifying with the teaching method using the recorded status

3 While holding down [ENABLE], press [INTERP/COORD], and set the

＋ interpolation specification of the recording status to linear interpolation. (“LIN”
is displayed for the recording status.)

4 After pressing [SPD], input a suitable value.

5 While holding down [ENABLE], press [O.WRITE/REC].

＋ >> A confirmation screen now appears.

6 Select “OK” and press [Enter].

>> The step is overwritten.

4-41
4.8 Modifying the program

Modifying with the teaching method using the whole screen

7 Press f8 <Line L>.

>> A confirmation message is displayed.
or

8 Select “YES” and press [Enter].

9 Set the speed and overlap to enabled or disabled.

10 After configuring all of the conditions, press f12 <Complete>.

>> A confirmation message is displayed.

11 Select “YES” and press [Enter].

>> The command is overwritten.

4-42
 4.8 Modifying the program

Overwriting movement commands <<Operating mode S>>

Changing joint interpolation in step 3 to linear interpolation is given here as an example.

1 Press [PROG/STEP] → [3] → [Enter].

>> The cursor moves to step 3.

2 To change the position, use the [Axis operation keys] to operate the robot
manually.

3 While holding down [ENABLE], press [INTERP/COORD], and set the interpolation
＋ specification of the recording status to linear interpolation. (“LIN” is displayed for
the recording status.)

4 Press [CHECK SPD/TEACH SPEED], and set a suitable value for the speed.

5 While holding down [ENABLE], press [O.WRITE/REC].

＋ >> A confirmation screen now appears.

6 Select “OK” and press [Enter].

>> The step is overwritten.

4-43
4.8 Modifying the program

4.8.4 Adding movement commands

Using the following work program as an example, a new step will now be added between steps 1
and 2

Step 1

New step 2

Current step 2
→ Step 3

The position at which the command is added differs between <<Operating mode A>> and
<<Operating mode S>>. The added position of the new step is “After the current step” for
<<Operating mode A>>, and "Before the current step” for <<Operating mode S>>.

The position at which the command is added is set by [Constant Setting] — [5

INFO. Operation Constants] — [1 Operation Condition] — [7 Step insertion position],
so you can change it.
However, you must be EXPERT level or above to make changes.

Adding movement commands <<Operating mode A>>

1 Move the robot to step 2 using [CHECK GO] (or [CHECK BACK]).
To add a step, move to the step before the location where you want to add the step.
＋ Moving the cursor as shown below adds the step after the first step.

2 Use the [Axis operation keys] to operate the robot manually, and set the robot to
the position and posture to be added.

Modifying with the teaching method using the recorded status

3 Set the speed and interpolation classification using the same method as when
doing new teaching.

4 While holding down [ENABLE], press [INS].

＋ >> A confirmation screen now appears.

5 Select “OK” and press [Enter].

>> This completes the addition of the new step.
All the previous steps 2, 3 and up are incremented by one to become steps 3, 4
and up.
The numbers of the steps recorded as the parameters of jump/call and other
function commands are automatically modified at this time.

4-44
 4.8 Modifying the program

Modifying with the teaching method using the whole screen

6 Selects commands.
>> A confirmation message is displayed.
or

＋
7 Select “NO” and press [Enter].

8 Set the speed and overlap to enabled or disabled.

9 After configuring all of the conditions, press f12 <Complete>.

>> A confirmation message is displayed.

10 Select “OK” and press [Enter].

>> A new step is now added.
The order of the 2nd step and 3rd step etc. all increase by 1 to become the 3rd step
th
and 4 step etc.
The step numbers recorded as parameters for function commands such as
jump/call etc. are automatically modified at this time.

4-45
4.8 Modifying the program

Adding movement commands <<Operating mode S>>

1 Move the robot to step 2 using [CHECK GO] (or [CHECK BACK]).
To add a step, move to the step after the location where you want to add the step.
＋ Moving the cursor as shown below adds the step before the 2nd step.

2 Use the [Axis operation keys] to operate the robot manually, and set the robot to
the position and posture to be added.

3 Set the speed and interpolation classification using the same method as when
doing new teaching.

4 While holding down [ENABLE], press [INS].

＋ >> A confirmation screen now appears.

5 Select “OK” and press [Enter].

>> This completes the addition of the new step.
All the previous steps 2, 3 and up are incremented by one to become steps 3, 4 and
up.
The numbers of the steps recorded as the parameters of jump/call and other function
commands are automatically modified at this time.

4-46
 4.8 Modifying the program

4.8.5 Deleting movement and function commands

Using the following work program as an example, step 5 will be deleted here.

Current step 6
→ Step 5

Current step 5

Deleting movement and function commands

1 Press [PROG/STEP] → [5] → [Enter].
>> The cursor moves to step 5.

2 While holding down [ENABLE], press [DEL].

＋ >> A confirmation message now appears.

3 Select “YES” and press [Enter].

>> This completes the deletion of step 5.
The previous step 6 is decremented by one to become step 5.
The numbers of the steps recorded as the parameters of jump/call and other
function commands are automatically modified at this time.

4-47
4.8 Modifying the program

4.8.6 Movement commands coordinate system select function

Usually, when position recording is performed with the T / P key, it is recorded as encoder data.
With this setting change, you can specify the encoder, angle, machine coordinate system (robot
coordinate system), user coordinate system, and record it. Likewise, when recording pose files
you can record in the specified coordinate system. Pose file can be recorded on the robot
program monitor. If you do not select a pose file, it is recorded as pose file number 0.

*For details about the pose file, refer to "Chapter 6 How to Use the Robot Language" of the "Robot
language" of the instruction manual.

POINT This function is available on the software version FDV04.37 or later.

Set the constant

1 Set the operator class to EXPERT or higher in advance.

2 Select the f5<Constant Setting> – [5 Operation Constants] – [1 Operation

condition].
>> Screen as below will be shown.

3 Press f9 < >, or f10 < > to switch pages.

>> Screen as below will be shown.
or

4 Move the cursor to "47 Move command recording method" and hold down
＋ [ENABLE] and press [Left / Right] to set it to [Extension].

4-48
 4.8 Modifying the program

5 When setting has completed, press f12 <Complete>.

>> The setting is saved.

Set the f-key <Move command select>

1 Select the f5<Constant Setting> – [7 f-Keys] – [2 Softkeys in Teach mode].
>> Screen as below will be shown.

2 Press f9 < >, or f10 < > to make the setting Move to the 0 page.

or
3 Move the cursor to [CODE] of f key to perform setting and set [2020 Move
command select].

Number f key Display

2020 Encoder
Angle Every time press
Robot coordinate the F key, the
User coordinate coordinate
Pose XX system switches
Pose record
(XX: Pose variable number)

4 When setting has completed, press f12 <Complete>.

>> The setting is saved.

4-49
4.8 Modifying the program

How to record move command

1 Specify the coordinate system you want to record with f key <Move command
select> and press [O.WRITE / REC].
>> Move command is recorded in the selected coordinate system.

It is displayed as follows on each monitor.

[Robot Program] monitor

There is no change
on the surface

On the robot program monitor, it is displayed as before.

When moving to each step, the coordinate system is displayed on the f-key <Move
command select>.
In the [screen editor] screen, editing is possible with the coordinate system specified by f-
key <Move command select>.

About position correction

When "correct" or "overwrite" the position, it is corrected in the coordinate system
specified by f-key <move command select>.
The position recorded as an encoder can be corrected / overwritten as other coordinate
system such as robot coordinate system.

About pose recording

Pose variables can be recorded in the pose file specified on the robot program monitor. If
not specifying a pose file, it is recorded in pose file 0.
If recording the position while [Pose record] is displayed in the f-key <move command
select>, the pose variable number is incremented in the specified pose file and newly
added.
When "Pose 10" is displayed, it is recorded at pose variable 10 in the specified pose file.

4-50
 4.8 Modifying the program

[Pose File] monitor

User coordinate

Encoder

Angle

Machine
coordinate

On the pose file monitor, user coordinates, encoders, angles, and machines coordinates
(robot coordinate) can be selected.
It is possible to edit each step in the specified coordinate system.
The specified coordinate system is displayed in abbreviated form next to the step
number.

The abbreviation of the coordinate system displayed on the screen is as follows.

U: User coordinate
E: Encoder
J: Angle
X: Machine coordinate(Robot coordinate)

Please make sure that editing and recording are correct in the selected coordinate
system.
CAUTION If it is recorded in wrong coordinate system, unexpected behavior can occur.

4-51
4.9 Using the screen editor function to modify commands

4.9 Using the screen editor function to modify commands

All the data recorded in the program can easily be modified using the screen editor function. The screen editing
function can be used in the teaching mode, and during playback in the playback mode.
The operations which can be performed using the screen editor function are listed below.

Table 4.9.1 Operations which can be performed using the screen editor function
Operation Details
All the data (such as the speed, interpolation type and position data)
recorded for movement commands can be modified. (To correct position
Data modification
data, you must be EXPERT level or above.)
Further, the data recorded for function commands can also be modified.
File Copy One line or several lines can be copied and inserted into another position.
Cut One line or several lines can be deleted.
Paste The copied or deleted line or lines are inserted at another position.
An function command can be inserted at any position.
Function command insertion,
In addition, an function command can be changed into another function
replacement
command.
Function command search Function commands can be searched.
Screen Separation The screen can be divided into the top half and bottom half.
The speed of MOVE command set in two or more lines can be batch
Batch changing of the speed
changed.

4.9.1 Modifying with the screen editor function

This section describes how to select and modify the screen editor function.

Selecting the screen editor function

1 In the teach mode or when step playback has been selected in the playback mode,
press [EDIT].
>> The screen display for the currently selected program is now switched.
12
４

13
５

６
１

10 ７

８
11

２ ３

4-52
 4.9 Using the screen editor function to modify commands

1 Cursor
The cursor can be moved to the data.

2 Description of data
A description of the data at the cursor position and the range of the values in
which the data can be input are displayed here.

3 Input field
To change the data at the cursor position, input the new value here, and press
[Enter].

4 Find Function
This is used to search the function commands.

5 Cut
This is used to cut (delete) the selected line or lines. The cut line or lines can be
inserted at any position using “Paste”.

6 Copy
This is used to copy the selected line or lines. The copied line or lines can be
inserted at any position using “Paste”.

7 Paste
This is used to insert the cut or copied line or lines at any position.

8 Cancel
This is used to terminate program editing without reflecting the modifications
made.
It is also used to cancel a cut or copy operation at any point.
[RESET/R] also has the same functions.

9 Complete
This is used to save the modification results and terminate the program editing.

10 Other Direction
This is used to select the direction during pasting.
When “reverse direction” is selected, the order of the data in the cut or copied
lines is reversed, and the data is pasted in this reverse order.

11 Screen Separation
This is used to divide the screen into the top half and bottom half.
Use [CLOSE/SELECT SCREEN] to select the half of the screen where
operations are to be performed.

12 Step Keep
Normally, when screen editing ends, it automatically returns to the step it was
at prior to starting screen editing. If you press this key while holding down
[ENABLE], it will stay at the step it was at in screen editing when it returns to
the program screen (write is also done). This is useful in cases such as when
you found a step in screen editing that can be an indicator for Check GO and
Check BACK operations.
However, in such cases, the displayed step will differ from the actual robot step.
Therefore, you need to be careful when doing Check GO and Check BACK
operations after that.

13 Search Direction
Switch the search direction between up and down.

4-53
4.9 Using the screen editor function to modify commands

2 Move the cursor to the desired position, input the new numerical value in the
“Input” field in response to the guide message displayed in the “Description of
data” field, and press [Enter].
>> The contents of the program directory now change to the new number that was input.
At this time, the program contents are not rewritten.

3 To reflect the changes, press f12 <Complete> or press the [EDIT] key again.
>> The program contents are updated, the screen editor function is exited, and the
original screen is restored.
or

To quit the function without reflecting the changes, press the [RESET/R] key.

4.9.2 Batch changing the speed of MOVE command

The speed of MOVE command set in two or more lines can be batch changed while performing
the screen edit.

Batch changing the speed of MOVE command

1 Press [SPD] with holding [ENABLE].
＋ >> The currently appeared cursor is highlighted as a speed batch change start step.

2 Press [Up/Down].
>> The highlighted line(s) can be adjusted as a range of the target steps to make
changes.

4-54
 4.9 Using the screen editor function to modify commands

3 To cancel selecting a target step, press [Cancel] or [RESET/R] key.

>> The highlighted lines are restored.
or
4 Press [SPD].
>> The display changes to the “Speed change” screen. The range of speed change is
indicated by the “Start Step” and “End Step”.

INFO. Without the range selecting operation

If pressing [SPD] without specifying the range for change-target steps
([ENABLE] + [SPD]), all steps are to be targeted.

5 Refer to Table 4.9.2, and set the conditions for batch changing.

6 To set “Confirm”, align the cursor on it and press [Enter].

>> Every time you press this key, the status (ON/OFF) is switched.

7 To set “Conv. method”, align the cursor on it and press [Enter].

>> Every time you press this key, the status (Ratio/Direct) is switched.

When switched to “Direct”, the pull-down list for the interpolation type appears on the
right side.
If pressing [Enter] as moving to the pull-down list, alternatives (Joint/Line/Circular) are
displayed. Then, select an appropriate interpolation type with [Up/Down] key.

Entering 8 To set “Speed”, align the cursor on it, enter the speed value, and press [Enter]
the speed
value

4-55
4.9 Using the screen editor function to modify commands

9 Press f12 <Execute>.

>> Now, the speed batch change starts.

If “Confirm” has been set to OFF, the screen-editor window is restored after executing
the speed batch change.

If “Confirm” has been set to ON, on the other hand, the screen as below appears.

Button Action
[YES] The speed of the indicated step is changed, proceeding to “Confirm”
in the next step.
After changing the speed in the last step, the screen-editor window is
restored.
[NO] The speed of the indicated step is not changed, proceeding to
“Confirm” in the next step.
After changing the speed in the last step, the screen-editor window is
restored.
[CANCEL] The speed change is aborted for the indicated step and after, and
then the speed batch change screen is restored.

10 To reflect the change just made, restore the screen-editor window and press f12
<Complete> or [EDIT].
or >> The program details are updated, the screen editing function exits and the screen
returns to the previous screen.

11 If not to reflect the change, restore the screen-editor window, and press
[RESET].

Table 4.9.2 Condition settings for the speed batch changing

Condition
Setting range Meanings Default
parameter
Confirm ON Pressing f12 <Execute>, the “Confirm” message ON
appears by every step, which enables to select
ON/OFF/Cancel.
OFF All steps from the start step to the end step are batch
changed without any confirming action.
Conv. method Ratio Designates the ratio (%) to the current record speed for Ratio
changing.
(Example: To make the speed half, designate 50%.)
All steps are the targets for change.
Direct：Joint Designate the speed only for the step of which
interpolation type is “Joint”.
The step of “Line/Circular” is not changed.
Direct：Line/Circular Designate the speed only for the step of which
interpolation type is “Line/Circular”.
The step of “Joint” is not changed.

4-56
 4.9 Using the screen editor function to modify commands

Condition
Setting range Meanings Default
parameter
Speed Ratio 0～200% 50%
Note that the value after change does not exceed the
upper/lower limit of the record speed.
Direct：Joint Use the unit in entering the value specified in “Joint Minimum
Interpolation” on the record speed screen. value within
The screen appears by proceeding to f5<Constant S the available
etting> - [5 Operation Constants] – [4 Record Spee range
d].
Direct：Line/Circular Use the unit in entering the value specified in “Line/
Circular” on the record speed screen.
The screen appears by proceeding to f5<Constant S
etting> - [5 Operation Constants] – [4 Record Spee
d].

In the step with the multi-mechanism configuration, the target step will be the one of which
interpolation type agrees with that of the speed-based mechanism. And only the speed of
IMPORTANT that mechanism within the step is to be changed.

4-57
4.10 Program conversion function

4.10 Program conversion function

4.10.1 Outline
The menu below is explained at this chapter.
These functions can make it possible to apply various conversions to the programs.

<Service> [9 Program conversion]

No. Functions Descriptions

Function to change conditions of the steps.
1 Condition/speed
(Speed, Accuracy, Tool No., Override, Smooth etc.)
Function to copy the steps.
2 Step copy
It is also possible to coping to other programs.
Function to increase or decrease the angle (J1, J2,) of each
3 Angle axis of move command.
(e.g.: Increase angle of J1 axis＋10[deg])
Function to increase or decrease TCP position and tool angle of
move command.
4 XYZ shift
(e.g.; Increase X coordinate +100[mm] at user coordinate system
reference.)
It is a convenient function in case that tool such as arc welding
torch deformed by impact. It is possible to utilize it again after
correcting the existing program, in case if reference point
program are prepared with the tool, which is before deformation.
5 Tool ・Please refer to instruction manual ”Set up” for more detail.
・It is also possible to call this function from “Easy setting:
2points tool length setting” function of the tool constants
settings screen. “Easy setting : 2-Point Length Set 2”
Can create the bilateral symmetry program.
6 Mirror image
Possible to define reference plane.
By using three reference points, which was created in advance
and newly created three reference points, it is possible to convert
7 Coordinate(3-dimensional shift) programs at (Δx, Δy, Δz, ΔRx, ΔRy, ΔRz)(:3-dimentional
shift). Possible to using for correction in case of dislocating work
table etc.
Conduct mutual conversion between Robot language program
8 Language and executable form program.
Please refer to instruction manual “Robot language”.

4-58
 4.10 Program conversion function

No. Functions Descriptions

9 Two point shift Function to parallel shifting the work program by using two points.
10 Expansion/reduction Scaling up and down of the selected range program.
This is the function to shift the positional data of external axis
(positioner etc.). It is possible to increase/ decrease the positional
data of external axis by inputting numerical value directly at the
External axis shift menu of “3 Angle”, however it is possible to adjust the amount of
11 (Auxiliary mechanism corporation increase/ decrease by “actual alignment” in case of using this
shift) function.
・Please refer to the instruction manual “External axis shift”.
・ To use this function, it is necessary to have optional
software “External axis shift”.
Open the screen edit screen of designated program. Possible to
13 Hot Edit
use during playback (Automatic operation).
There is usually no compatibility to work program between
different units. However, in case if only common mechanism
15 Unit Conversion
exists for two units then it is possible to extract the movement of
the mechanism as work program of one unit.

It is necessary to switch the operator qualification to “EXPERT” to use the functions

below.
POINT Switch by using shortcut “R314” before hand.

“Hot Edit”
“Unit Conversion”

4-59
4.10 Program conversion function

4.10.2 Condition/speed
At this screen, condition of Speed, Accuracy and Tool No. etc. is changeable.
Set the each items and then press “Execute” then, conversion will be conducted.

（Setting example）

（Before alteration）

（After alteration）

Items Range Description

Source program No. 0-9999 Program No. of Source program.
Program No. of Destination program. Work program of
conversion result is saved on this No. In case of designating
Destination program No. 0-9999
the same No. as “Source program”, be careful since original
work program will be overwritten.
Designate the range to be converted by step No. When
Start/end Step 1-9999 executing conversion, Function Command (FN), which is
included in this range are neglected.
Set the increase and decrease amount of speed by
percentage.(%)
If 100 are designated, it cannot be altered.
Speed rate (%) 0-150 [%] (Caution）
At this screens Speed rate can only increase and decrease by
percentage. Please refer to “4.9.2 Batch changing the speed of
MOVE command” to set the speed such as “500 mm/s” directly.
Conduct ON/OFF setting of “In position” (P).
Not operate/
Continue/Pause “Continue”: “P” disappears. (=OFF)
Continue/ Pause
“Pause”: “P” indicates. (=ON)
Set accuracy. (A1-A8)
Accuracy 0-8
In case of designating “0”, alteration cannot happen.
Set the Tool No. (T1-T32)
Tool 0-32
In case of designating “0”, alteration cannot happen.
Set the “Acceleration (D0-D3)”.
Acceleration In case of designating “Not operate” then, alteration cannot
Not operate/ happen.
None /1/2/3 Set the “Smoothness (S0-SD3).
Smoothness In case of designating “Not operate” then, alteration cannot
happen.

4-60
 4.10 Program conversion function

・In case if opening this screen from ”Screen editor”, ” Source program No.” and
“Destination program No.” are fixed. It cannot be selected.

・In case if opening this screen from ”Screen editor”, it is possible to select the range by
soft-key.

INFO.

・Refer to “4.3 Teaching” for more detail about each parameter.

・Only tool No. within move command will be altered at “Tool” setting of this screen. Robot
posture cannot be influenced by the alteration of tool No. Use “Tool conversion”, in case
of desiring to correct the appropriate position and posture to the new tool when altering
the tool length.
→”4.10.6 Tool”

4-61
4.10 Program conversion function

4.10.3 Step copy

At this screen, step data can be copied to itself or other program.
Conversion can be executed if setting each item and press “Execute”.

Item Range Description

Source program No. 0-9999 Program No. of copy source.
Steps 1-9999 Designate the range of copy source step.
Program No of which desired to copy to. It is possible to
Destination program No. 0-9999 designate the program No. of copy source. （The file will be
overwritten in this case.）
Step No. of copy source. Coping will be executed just after the
Insert Steps 1-9999 designated step No. In case of designating the step No., which
is midstream of program then, it is considered as insert operation.
If setting “Reverse” then, the selected steps will be copied in
reverse order.

Order of copy Order/Reverse Order Reverse

・This function can be conducted by the shortcut R335 “Step copy”.

INFO.
・”Order of copy” is convenient for teaching of out-bound / in-bound motion path, which is
material handling program. However, it is necessary to correct the order and positions to
be executed regarding with function command.

There are possibilities of occurring unexpected interference. Make sure to check the robot
movement by “Check-Go” operation.
CAUTION

4-62
 4.10 Program conversion function

Example 1: Copy to the end of program

PROGRAM 100

PROGRAM 101

Setting example

Result
PROGRAM 101

Programs are copied

after step 4.

Example 2: Copy to the midstream of program by reverse order.

PROGRAM 100

PROGRAM 101

Setting example

Result
PROGRAM 101 Programs are copied
after step 2 in reverse
order.

4-63
4.10 Program conversion function

4.10.4 Angle
At this screens each axis and angle of designated range steps can increase and/or decrease by numerical
input.
Set the each items and then press “Execute” then, conversion will be conducted.
（Setting example）

（Before alteration）

（After alteration）

Item Range Description

Source program No. 0-9999 Program No. of Source program.
Program No. of Destination program. Work program of conversion
result is saved on this No. In case of designating the same No. as
Destination program No. 0-9999
“Source program”, be careful since original work program will be
overwritten.
Designate the range to be converted by step No. When executing
Start/end Steps 1-9999
conversion, function command (FN) will be neglected.
Input the increase and decrease amount.
Depends on the
J1, J2,  （Set ”0” to the axis, which has no alteration.）
axis
Axis of rotation : [deg] / Axis of direct drive : [mm]

・ In case of opening this screen from “Screen editor”, “Source program No.” and
“Destination program No.” are fixed. It cannot be selected.

・In case if opening this screen from ”Screen editor”, it is possible to select the range by
soft-key.
INFO.

・Moving command of ”Angle” format are converted into “encoder value” format

・This function cannot use for move function of “Cartesian coordinate value” format.

・There are possibilities of occurring unexpected interference. Make sure to check the
robot movement by “Check-Go” operation.

・In case that the conversion result go beyond the software limits, error message indicates
CAUTION and records the value of software limit instead. If not checking the program after
alteration then, interference between peripheral equipments may occur.

4-64
 4.10 Program conversion function

4.10.5 XYZ shift

At this screen coordinate of designated range steps can shift by inputting numerical value.
Set the each items and then press “Execute” then, conversion will be conducted.

(Setting example)

Item Range Description

Source program No. 0-9999 Program No. of Source program.
Program No. of Destination program. Work program of conversion
result is saved on this No. In case of designating the same No. as
Destination program No. 0-9999
“Source program”, be careful since original work program will be
overwritten.
Designate the range to be converted by step No. When executing
Start/end Steps 1-9999
conversion, function command (FN) will be neglected.
< Numerical input >
Input shift amount by numerical value.
< Teach point >
Function to set shift amount by operating the robot manually. Shift
amount can be set by software key “Posi Before” and “Posi After”
Numerical input/ Operate the robot manually and press these keys then, the
Shift Amount
Teach point position will be set as reference position. Please check when
pressing “Posi after”, the calculated shift amount will indicate on
the screen.

Parallel shift Cannot set up on Set the amount of Parallel shift.(Unit: [mm])
Rotation shift this screen. Set the amount of Rotation shift.(Unit: [deg])
Possible to select form of expression, which explains tool posture
used for “Rotation shift”.

RPY method/
Rotation method Euler
Euler method RPY
method
method

4-65
4.10 Program conversion function

Item Range Description

Select the reference coordinate system to be used for conversion.

< Robot Coordinate >

Shift will be executed by Robot coordinate standard of each
mechanism. In case that multiple mechanism exists, it is
possible to set individually whether conducting shift or not.
However, it cannot be selected depending on the types of
mechanism.(Since shift calculation cannot be done.)

Robot coordinate/
(Supplement）In case that the each installation angles of robot are different, and
User coordinate/ desire to execute shifting to the same direction at floor surface(ground surface)
Coordinates World coordinate/ reference then, use < World coordinate >
Tool coordinate/
Work coordinate < User coordinate >
Shift will be executed by User coordinate standard.
It is necessary to set the No. of User coordinate.

< World coordinate >

Shift will be executed by Absolute coordinate standard (World
coordinate standard).

< Tool coordinate >

Shift will be executed by Tool coordinate standard of each step.

< Work coordinate >

Shift will be executed by Work coordinate standard.

・ In case of opening this screen from “Screen editor”, “Source program No.” and
“Destination program No.” are fixed. It cannot be selected.

・In case if opening this screen from ”Screen editor”, it is possible to select the range by
soft-key.

・Moving command of ”Angle” format are converted into “encoder value” format
INFO.
・This function cannot use for move function of “Cartesian coordinate value” format.

・Control range of ”Rotation shift” and “Parallel shift” are set at the screen below. If
necessary, alter them. It is necessary to switch the operator qualification to “EXPERT” or
above to open this screen. Switch it by using shortcut “R314” before hand.

<Constant setting> [3 Machine Constants] [6 Shift Amount Limit]

・”Rotation shift” is the rotation of tool direction at each coordinate. It cannot be applied
to rotation of work table (rotation of whole program) etc. Please refer to”4.10.8
Coordinate (3-dimensional shift)”for using program conversion function to such usage.

・There are possibilities of occurring unexpected interference. Make sure to check the
robot movement by “Check-Go” operation.
・In case that the conversion result go beyond the software limits, error message indicates
CAUTION and records the value of software limit instead. If not checking the program after alteration
then, interference between peripheral equipments may occur.

4-66
 4.10 Program conversion function

Robot coordinate
“Robot coordinate” is the Cartesian coordinate system, which locates on the origin of mechanism.
It is also called “Robot coordinate” or “Base coordinate”.

(Manual operation coordinate=Icon in case of “Robot coordinate”.)

Examples of Robot coordinate

Mechanism1

Mechanism2

+Z

+Y +Z

+X World coordinate
+Z

+Y
Robot
coordinate1 +X +X

+Y

Robot
coordinate2

・In case of conducting cooperative control, it is necessary to set positions and directions
of the Robot coordinate to every mechanism. Initial value is located as same as World
coordinate.

・Settings for the positions and directions of each Robot coordinate can be done at screen
INFO. below.

< Constant setting > [12 Format and Configuration] [5 Installation Angle]
(Requires to have operator qualification of “EXPERT” or above for setting.)

・ Positional accuracy of cooperative control are influenced by the errors of each

mechanism installing position. Please refer to instruction manual “Cross-Mastering” in
case of improving the accuracy.

As a reference, settings of Robot coordinate of Mechanism 1 and 2 are indicated below.

Size of grid is 500[mm] X 500[mm].
X axis Y axis Z axis X rotation Y rotation Z rotation
Mechanism
[mm] [mm] [mm] [deg] [deg] [deg]
1 0 -1000 0 0 0 90
2 0 1500 0 0 0 -90

4-67
4.10 Program conversion function

(Reference) Regarding with “Installation angle” setting at the time of operating memory format.

Regarding with the setting method, which supported at each robot (Floor, wall,
INFO. ceiling and tilt), please refer to each specification or inquire our NACHI branch
close from your location. Also, there is a case that operation range are limited
depending on the setting method.

Floor - Setting example

INFO.

・Rotation angle are all 0 degree.

・At “Mechanism Relation” screen, set “Ground” for robot installing position.

Wall – Setting example

INFO.

・Set 90 degree at “Y axis rotation”.

・At “Mechanism Relation” screen, set “Ground” for robot installing position.
(Do not select “Wall”.)

Ceiling – Setting example

INFO.

・Set 180 degree at “X axis rotation”.

・At “Mechanism Relation” screen, set “Ground” for robot installing position.
(Do not select “Ceiling”.)

4-68
 4.10 Program conversion function

Operate the robot for Wall and Ceiling specification at absolute coordinate
system
Settings for coordinate system, which is used by manual operation, can be done
at following screen. If it is necessary, please set a setting to be able to use
“Absolute coordinate system (World coordinate system)” at this screen. (e.g.: Set
“World“ at “3 Coord. 3”.)

<Constant setting> [５ Operation Constants] [5 Coordinate registration]

When selecting “Absolute coordinate system (World coordinates)”, then

robot moves toward following direction.
INFO.
Wall +Z

+X
+Y

Ceiling +Z

+X
+Y

4-69
4.10 Program conversion function

Operate the robot for Wall and Ceiling specification at Machine coordinate
system

When selecting “Machine coordinate system (Robot coordinates system)”,

then robot moves toward following direction.

Wall

+Z
+Y

+X

INFO.

Ceiling +Y

+X

+Z

4-70
 4.10 Program conversion function

User coordinate system

Cartesian coordinates, which the user can create freely on the pallet and work table etc. It is necessary to
designate the No. of user coordinate to be reference in advance to execute shifting at User coordinate.

（Manual operation coordinate= Icon in case of “User coordinate”.）

Examples of tool coordinate

+Z

+X

User coordinate1
+Y +Z

+Y
+X
User coordinates 2

User coordinates can be created at the screen below.

(Operator qualification of “EXPERT “or above is required for settings.）
INFO.
< Service > [10 User Coord. Definition]

Please refer to instruction manual “Set up” for more detail.

Absolute coordinate system (World coordinate system)

Cartesian coordinate system, which is defined only one to each controller and be the reference of all
coordinate system

（Manual operation coordinate= Icon in case of “World coordinate”.）

・World coordinate system are always located at (X,Y,Z)=(0,0,0) and horizontal to floor. It
INFO. cannot alter.
・In case that the robot is only one, usually Robot coordinate system of the robot are
aligned with World coordinate system.

4-71
4.10 Program conversion function

Tool coordinate system

This is the Cartesian coordinate system, which has tool center point (TCP) as origin. Shifting at Tool
coordinate system standard is executed referring to the tool No., which is set according to every move
command. Please be careful that direction of the Tool coordinate system changes at every move command
according to the posture of the mechanism (=robot).

Example of Tool coordinate system

Arc welding torch Spot welding gun Gripper

+Z
+Z

+Z

+Y
+X
+X +Y

+X

Setting of Tool coordinate system (Tool Constants) can be done at screen below.
INFO. Operator qualification of “EXPERT “or above is required for settings.
< Constant Setting > [3 Machine Constants] [1 Tool Constants]

Refer to instruction manual “Set up” for more detail.

Work coordinate system

This is the Cartesian coordinate system, which set at the tip of “Operation reference mechanism”. Shift
conversion at Work coordinate system is executed based on the calculation of direction of operation reference
mechanism (direction of Work coordinate system) at each move command, and calculates the direction. Please
pay attention that direction of Work coordinate system changes according to movement of the mechanism each
time.

Example of Work coordinate system

Tool
Side

Work side

INFO. In case of the synchronic motion robot, ”Work coordinate system” is set at the arm tip of
the positional reference robot.

4-72
 4.10 Program conversion function

4.10.6 Tool
When “Tool Constants (Lengths and angles” are changed, it is possible to correct the existing program
according to the new Tool Constants. For more detail, refer to Instruction manual “Set up”.

4.10.7 Mirror image

It is possible to flip the steps of designated range horizontally. Once setting the each items, and press
“Execute” then, the conversion will be executed.

Item Range Description

Source program No. 0-9999 Program No. of Source program.
Program No. of Destination program. Work program of conversion
result is saved on this No. In case of designating the same No. as
Destination program No. 0-9999
“Source program”, be careful since original work program will be
overwritten.
Designate the range to be converted by step No. When executing
Start/end Steps 1-9999
conversion, function command (FN) will be neglected.
st
< Disable（1 axis 0 deg >
In case of not setting the mirror side Refer to (p4-54).
Specify the mirror side Enable/Disable
< Enable >
In case of setting the mirror side Refer to (p4-54).

INFO. ・Move command of “Angle” format are converted into “Encoder value” format.

・This function cannot used for move command of “Cartesian coordinate system” format.

・There are possibilities of occurring unexpected interference. Make sure to check the
robot movement by “Check-Go” operation.
CAUTION
・In case that the encoder origin of each axis are not set exactly, or the installation position
and the angle are not exact, then the accuracy of conversion result declines. Be sure to
check the movement with Check-Go, and correct position if necessary.

・In case that the conversion result go beyond the software limits, error message indicates
and records the value of software limit instead. If not checking the program after
alteration then, interference between peripheral equipments may occur.

4-73
4.10 Program conversion function

In case of not setting the mirror side

Simply turn around signs of J1, J4 and J6.

Centered on 0 degree position (Center line of the picture) of J1 axis, reversed posture is created.
0 degree position 0 degree position
Before change After change

4-74
 4.10 Program conversion function

In case of setting mirror side

Set two mirror sides at this screen.

After finish setting, press “Execute” then, conversion conducts and program files are created.

Select “Teach point” then, use

this key in case of recording
the reference point at this
screen.

If setting “Designation of mirror

side” to “Enable” then it
indicates.

Item Range Description

< Program >

Program/ Import program and set mirror side.
Specify the mirror side
Teach point < Teach point >
Directly set two mirror sides in this screen.

Set three reference points.

Old standard points
Import from program or record directly at this screen.
Set three reference points.
New standard points
Import from program or record directly at this screen.
Set the Contiguity Ratio, which desired to be the program of
Congruity 0-100 [%] conversion result.
Usually use 80 percent of initial setting.
Robot/ Select the reference coordinate system to be converted.
User/
Coordinate
World
Work

・When recording reference point, it is strongly recommended to prepare the designated

tool, which can point out dots precisely and the Tool Constant, which are configured
CAUTION accurately. If the accuracy of reference point is not precise enough, then the accuracy of
conversion declines. Be careful that accuracy of “Tool length” will influence largely to the
calculation results.

・There are possibilities of occurring unexpected interference. Make sure to check the
robot movement by “Check-Go” operation.

4-75
4.10 Program conversion function

Example of conversion

This is the example of creating the mirrored program by giving 2 surfaces(Mirror surface), which is consist of
three standard points, and on the top of the same shaped work table, which locates different. Please pay
attention to the coordinate and order of reference point.

Mirror side 2

R22 PRG201
Mirror side1

P21
R21
PRG200
P22 R11
R23
P24 R12
P11
P23
P14
P12

PRG101 P13

PRG100 R13
Mirror
conversion

R11 (X,Y,Z)
R12 (X,Y,Z)
R13 (X,Y,Z)
R21 (X,Y,Z)
R22 (X,Y,Z)
R23 (X,Y,Z)

<Program>
If selecting this, then it is possible to
import three steps from the created
program as reference points.

<Teach point>
If selecting this, then it is possible to
record the coordinate of reference
points with manual operation at this
screen. (It is also possible to input
Source program PRG 100 XYZ by numerical value.)
P11, P12, P13, P14

Old standard points PRG 200

R11, R12, R13

New standard points PRG 201

R21, R22, R23

The program PRG101 to be created as a result

P21, P22, P23, P24

4-76
 4.10 Program conversion function

4.10.8 Coordinate (3-dimensional shift)

Steps of designated range can convert into 3-dimensional.
After finish setting, press “Execute” then, conversion conducts and program files are created.

Item Range Description

Source program No. 0-9999 Program No. of Source program.
Program No. of Destination program. Work program of conversion
result is saved on this No. In case of designating the same No. as
Destination program No. 0-9999
“Source program”, be careful since original work program will be
overwritten.
Designate the range to be converted by step No. When executing
Start/end Steps 1-9999
conversion, function command (FN) will be neglected.
Old standard points Import from program or record directly at this screen.
New standard points Import from program or record directly at this screen.
Set the Contiguity Ratio, which desired to be the program of
Congruity 0-100 [%] conversion result.
Usually use 80 percent of initial setting.
Robot/ Select the reference coordinate system to be converted.
User/
Coordinate
World
Work

・In case that the encoder origin of each axis are not set exactly, or the installation position
and the angle are not exact, then the accuracy of conversion result declines. Be sure to
check the movement, and correct position if necessary.

・Move command of “Angle” format are converted into “Encoder value” format.

・This function cannot used for move command of “Cartesian coordinate system” format.

INFO. ・If the accuracy of reference point is not precise enough, then the accuracy of conversion
declines. To avoid this, it is recommended to create designated Tool Constants, which can
point out dots precisely when creating reference point.

4-77
4.10 Program conversion function

Example of conversion 1: Copy the program to the other work table, where the location and direction
differs.

This is the examples that prepare 2 sets of three reference points, and create the same program on the work
tables of the same shape, which locates at different position. Please be careful of the coordinate system and
order of reference point.

R21 PRG201

P21
R22
PRG200
P24 R11

P22 R12
P11
P23
P14
P12
R23
P13

PRG101
PRG100 R13

3-dimensional
shift

R11 (X,Y,Z)
R12 (X,Y,Z)
R13 (X,Y,Z)
R21 (X,Y,Z)
R22 (X,Y,Z)
R23 (X,Y,Z)

<Program>
If selecting this, then it is possible to
import three steps from the created
program as reference points.

<Teach point>
If selecting this, then it is possible to
record the coordinate of reference
points with manual operation at this
screen.

Source program PRG 100

P11, P12, P13, P14

Old standard points PRG 200

R11, R12, R13

New standard points PRG 201

R21, R22, R23

The program PRG101 to be created as a result

P21, P22, P23, P24

4-78
 4.10 Program conversion function

Example of conversion 2: Correcting the positional deviation of work table

It is possible to correct the deviation, even after the teaching has completed. However, it is necessary to
prepare three reference points in advance.

R23

R13

P12 P13

P11 P14
R22

R11
R12
R21
Origin position of work table

Deviated work table

Record common 3 points of

original program as reference
points “R21,R22,R23”.

Source program PRG 100

P11, P12, P13, P14 It is desirable to prepare these 3 points in
advance. However if not available, it is O.K. to
Old standard points PRG 200 select any 3 points of the program. In that case,
R11, R12, R13 make sure to select the point, which is as far as
possible.
New standard points PRG 201
R21, R22, R23

The program PRG101 to be created as a result

P21, P22, P23, P24

・For example, it is recommended to create three reference points on the work table in
advance when creating teach program as the picture above. If in case that the designated
reference points does not exist, then select 3 teaching points, which can be pointed out
precisely from the work programs, and prepare the program, which only contains these 3
INFO. points as the program of reference points use. Also, place the distance between those
points as far as they can. In case the distance is too close then, calculation error will be
large.

・Move command of “Angle” format are converted into “Encoder value” format.

・This function cannot used for move command of “Cartesian coordinate system” format.

4.10.9 Language
Please refer to Instruction manual “Robot language”.

4-79
4.10 Program conversion function

4.10.10 Two point shift

By using two reference points, it is possible to parallel shifting steps of the designated range. Set the each
items and then press “Execute” then, conversion will be conducted.

Item Range Description

Source program No. 0-9999 Program No. of Source program.
Program No. of Destination program. Work program of conversion
result is saved on this No. In case of designating the same No. as
Destination program No. 0-9999
“Source program”, be careful since original work program will be
overwritten.
Designate the range to be converted by step No. When executing
Start/end Steps 1-9999
conversion, function command (FN) will be neglected.
Standard point / Program 0-9999 1st standard point.
Step1 1-9999 Designate with program and step No.
Standard point2/Program 0-9999 2nd standard point.
Step2 1-9999 Designate with program and step No.
When designating two steps then, shift amount will be calculated
Shift and indicates here. Make sure to check that there is no
problem with the amount of this shift.
Robot/ Select the reference coordinate system to be converted.
User/
Coordinate
World
Work

（Example of conversion）

Parallel shift amount is

Standard
point2 calculated from 2
points.

Standard
point1
P14
P11
P13
P12

4-80
 4.10 Program conversion function

・If desired to conducting parallel shift with numerical value base then, please refer to
“4.10.5 XYZ shift”.

INFO. ・If the accuracy of reference point is not precise enough, then the accuracy of conversion
declines. To avoid this, it is recommended to create designated Tool Constants, which can
point out dots precisely when creating reference point.

・Please make sure to check the shift amount indicates at the screen. In case of indicating
the value, which is too large then, check the setting of standard point.

4-81
4.10 Program conversion function

4.10.11 Expansion/reduction
It is possible to designate the step range and expand or reduce the operation locus.
Set the each items and then press “Execute” then, conversion will be conducted.

Item Range Description

Source program No. 0-9999 Program No. of Source program.
Program No. of Destination program. Work program of conversion
result is saved on this No. In case of designating the same No. as
Destination program No. 0-9999
“Source program”, be careful since original work program will be
overwritten.
Designate the range to be converted by step No. When executing
Start/end Steps 1-9999
conversion, function command (FN) will be neglected.
Expansion Ratio 1-999[%] Set the expansion/reduce ratio.
Select the method of expansion and reduction.
One Dimension/ Refer to the next page for detail.
Expansion Mode Three Dimension/ < One Dimension >
Center of circle < Three Dimension >
< Center of circle >
Select the method to determine the direction of expansion and
reduction.
< Program >
Program/
Expansion Direction Refer to the recorded program and use the coordinate.
Teach point
< Teach point >
Operate the robot manually and use the coordinate, which was
set at this screen.
In case of setting “Expansion Direction” to “Program” then, set the
Program 0-9999
No. here.
In case of setting “Expansion Direction” to “Program” then, set the
step No. of standard point. In case of “Teach point”, it is possible
Step1 1-9999
to set the coordinate by < Record Current Position > key.
(Numerical value input key cannot be used.)
In case of setting “Expansion Direction” to “Program” then, please
set step No. of direction point here. In case of “Teach point”, it is
Step2 1-9999
possible to set the coordinate by < Record Current Position >
key. (Numerical value input key cannot be used.)
Robot/ Select the reference coordinate system to be converted.
User/
Coordinate
World
Work

There are possibilities of occurring unexpected interference. Make sure to check the robot
movement by “Check-Go” operation.
CAUTION

4-82
 4.10 Program conversion function

Extension and reduction at “One Dimension”

Specific coordinate, which is called “Standard point” as a standard, expansion can conduct only the
designated direction. 2nd point is necessary to determine the direction.

（Example）By using Step1 and 2, extend the program of step 1 to 5.

1 1
2
2

3
3

5 5

4
4

Standard point= Step 1 / direction point= Step 2

Rate of extension＝200%

Extension and reduction at “Three Dimension”

All distance will be extended /reduced from specific coordinate, which is called “Standard point” to each point.

（Example）Lower left recorded point as “Standard point”, extend program of step 1 to 5.

1 2

1
2

Standard 3
5
point A

5
4 4

Standard point= Point A（Point, record at this setting screen.）

Rate of extension＝200%

4-83
4.10 Program conversion function

Extension and reduction at “Center of circle”

By designating the step, which is using circular interpolation (CIR1 or CIR2)（calculated automatically）
extension and reduction is conducted center point of arc as “Standard point”. Except that using center point of
arc as “Standard point”, conversion rules are same as “3-Dimension”.
Center point, LIN
LIN calculated
automatically. 1
1

3 2
3 2
CIR2 CIR1
CIR2 CIR1
Standard point= Step 2 (CIR1)
Rate of extension＝150%

It is strongly recommended to check the selected range of steps before conversion

thoroughly.
CAUTION

4.10.12 External axis shift

This is mainly used for arc welding robot, which rotates rotation positioner 180 degree each and repeat the
same work. Shift amount setting can be done by numerical value at “Angle” (Page 4-54), however at this menu.
Setting can be done by actual alignment (: by operating robot manually). For more detail, please refer to
instruction manual “External axis shift”.

Work B Work A

Work A Work B

INFO. It is necessary to have the optional software “External axis shift” to use this function.
It is possible to confirm whether this software is installed or not at screen below.
<Constant setting> [1 Control Constants] [5 Option Setting]

4-84
 4.10 Program conversion function

4.10.13 Hot Edit

It is possible to open the screen editor of designated program. Since this function can be used during
playback (During automatic operation), correction of the program can be conducted without pausing the
production. The contents, which has changed will be valid when next cycle starts (When the program file is
loaded to work memory).

It is necessary to switch operator qualification to EXPERT and above to use this function.
Please switch it by shortcut “R314” before hand.

Depend on the editing contents, there are possibilities of interference with

peripheral equipments may occur.
Please pay extra attention for operation. And do not conduct the significant
change as a No, 1 principle

Editing work below may possibly change the movement route, so it may occur the
interference with peripheral equipments. Therefore, it is strongly recommended to
CAUTION check editing at Teach mode and by Check-Go operation for the works below.

・Changing positional information of move command. (Coordinate value and each axis and
angle)
・Adding, coping and deleting of move command.
・Alteration of interpolation types(LIN / JOINT / CIR1 / CIR2 etc.)
・Alteration of accuracy value(A1 to A8）
・Alteration of moving speed at move command.
・Value of each variable (Integer variable, Real variable etc.)

INFO. It is possible to open the program, which is not during playback. This enables to check the
contents of program without stopping the production. However, please be extra careful
not to edit by error.

4-85
4.10 Program conversion function

4.10.14 Unit Conversion

In case of only common mechanism exists between two units, then it is possible to convert into work program
of the other unit by extracting position data of those mechanisms. It is necessary to prepare external
memory (USB memory), which saved backup data from copy source to use this function before hand.

Item Range Description

Source program No. 0-9999 Program No. of Source unit.
Program No. of Destination unit. Work program of conversion
result is saved on this No. In case of designating the same No. as
Destination program No. 0-9999
“Source program”, be careful since original work program will be
overwritten.
Source Mechanism of source unit indicates.
Destination Mechanism of destination unit indicates.
In case that there are number of same mechanism, then set
Num 0-9 mechanism No. of the Destination here. If assigned “0”, positional
data of that mechanism will be deleted.

・Step of Function Command（FN） does not change by this conversion.

・Before opening this screen, select the Destination unit by key operation below before
POINT hand.

・This function is for the service engineer, who understands system structure
thoroughly. So that this function can change work program structure of the robot
CAUTION significantly.

・After converting the program, please make sure to check the robot movement by
“Check-Go” operation. Robot may interfere with peripheral equipment due to the change
of the operation.

・There is a case that Source program and value of the speed differs depending on
mechanism configuration.

4-86
 4.10 Program conversion function

(Example of conversion 1)
This is the example of creating program of 2 mechanisms. Extract positional data of two mechanisms from
programs of three mechanisms as below. Since same mechanism does not exist to the Destination, positional
data of mechanism 3 (In this example, Slider TRV001) will be automatically deleted.

UNIT1.001 UNIT2.002

1 1

2 2

4-87
4.10 Program conversion function

(Example of conversion 2)
This is the example of creating programs of 2 mechanisms by extracting the positional data of (One robot +
one positioner) from the program of (One robot + two positioners). In this case, since two same mechanisms
exist at the conversion source, it is necessary to designate which position of mechanism should be copied to
the conversion source.

Delete mechanism 3 of UNIT1

UNIT1.001 UNIT2.002

1
1
2
2

Delete mechanism 2 of UNIT1

UNIT1.001 UNIT2.002

1
1
2

3 2

4-88
 4.10 Program conversion function

To use this function, it is necessary to switch operator qualification of “EXPERT” or above.

Please switch it by shortcut “R314” before hand.

Operation procedure
1 Create the backup data, which contains source unit at USB memory (RC external
memory 1) in advance. (Please refer to Chapter 5 for backup operation.)
2 Install the USB memory to CPU board of the controller.

3 Select the unit (here, unit 2) to be the Destination.

＋

→
4 Open <Service> [9 Program Conversion] ［15 Unit Conversion］.

5 Press, <Program List>.

6 Screen of Program list will be displayed, then select （/WORK/PROGRAM/）of the

source No. in the backup folder by using cursor.
（In here, select “UNIT1.001”.）

7 Press ［Enter］ and decide on the file then, press < Execute >.

8 Screen as below will be shown. Set No. of the Destination program.

Leave mechanism 2, and

delete mechanism 3

9 Press <Execute>.
Conversion is executed and work program “UNIT2.002” is created.

4-89
4.11 Using program conversion function from screen editor

4.11 Using program conversion function from screen editor

4.11.1 Outline
There are “Program Conversion” keys on the left side of the editing screen.
By using these keys, it can call some “Program Conversion Function”.

When pressing “Program Conversion” key then, the keys as below are shown on the left and right side of
screen.

Icons Description

Change condition of the step, which was selected.

→ “4.10.2 Condition/speed”

Expand or decrease the angle (J1, J2,) of each axis, which was selected.
→ “4.10.4 Angle”

Apply the parallel shifting to the selected steps.

→ “4.10.5 XYZ shift”

Use this function to select the target step by numbers.

It is possible to use during operation of range selection.

Use this function to select multiple steps.

Starting point will be the step, which the cursor currently has set.

Return to the original screen.

4-90
 4.11 Using program conversion function from screen editor

4.11.2 Selecting the target step

Before using “Program Conversion Function”, select one or multiple steps as target.

Supplement
When opening Screen editor, one step has already been selected in the beginning.

（To release the selection, press [R] key.）

Execute conversion only with the steps, which has selected.

It is possible to execute Program Conversion Function from this condition immediately.

Condition / Speed → “4.10.2 Condition/speed”

Each axis and angle → “4.10.4 Angle”
Parallel shift → “4.10.5 XYZ shift”

Execute conversion after selecting multiple steps.

Refer to the below, and execute conversion function after selecting the range.
→”(C) Selecting multiple steps.”

There are some procedures available for step selecting as below.

(A) Selecting one step (Cursor key operation)

(1) Align the cursor (: underline) to the target step.

Select target step by cursor

key.

It is possible to start selecting range from this state.

INFO. →”(C) Selecting multiple steps”

(2) Execute the desired program conversion function.

Condition / Speed → “4.10.2 Condition/speed”

Each axis and angle → “4.10.4 Angle”
Parallel shift → “4.10.5 XYZ shift”

4-91
4.11 Using program conversion function from screen editor

(B) Selecting one step (Numerical input)

(1) Press “Step Select” key.

(2) Input step No. then, press [Enter].

Example:

(3) Cursor moves to the designated step.

It is possible to start selecting range from this state.

INFO. →”(C) Selecting multiple steps”

(4) Execute the desired program conversion function.

Condition / Speed → “4.10.2 Condition/speed”

Each axis and angle → “4.10.4 Angle”
Parallel shift → “4.10.5 XYZ shift”

4-92
 4.11 Using program conversion function from screen editor

(C) Selecting multiple steps

(1) Press “Range Select” key.

(2) By moving cursor key, selected range can increase and/or decrease.
(To release the selection, press[R] key.)
Starting point of selected
range

Besides cursor key, direct input step No. of end of selected range can be
INFO. done by using “Step Select” key.

(3) Once the range selection is completed then, execute program conversion function.

Condition / Speed → “4.10.2 Condition/speed”

Each axis and angle → “4.10.4 Angle”
Parallel shift → “4.10.5 XYZ shift”

4.11.3 Cautions in case of operating from screen editor

Even executing conversion by calling Program Conversion Function from “Screen Editor”, in
case of selecting “No” at below screen when releasing the selection by [R] key then, program file
will not be changed.

4-93
4.12 Sample program

4.12 Sample program

4.12.1 When two robots should be operated in same working area

In case that two robots are operated in same working area, robot program should include interlock in order to
avoid collision of two robots.

Robot 1 Robot 2

Working
area

Prerequisites

・Robot 1 and robot 2 are operated at same working area.

・Output signal 1 is defined ON at outside the working area and OFF at inside the working area. (So
output signal 1 needs to be ON from the beginning of start at outside the working area).
・Output signal 1 is connected to the input signal 1 of another robot, and its logic is not changed.

Robot 1 Robot 2

Output 1 Input 1
Input 1 Output 1

・If both robots are going to enter the working area at the same time, robot 1 has priority.
・Maximum delay time from output signal 1 ON until input signal 1 ON is 0.1 second.

Sample Program

Robot 1 (has priority) Robot 2

Move to P1 Move to P4
“P” is necessary Move to P2 “P” is necessary Move to P5

Move to P3
“P” is necessary Move to P2
Move to P6
Move to P1 “P” is necessaryMove to P5

Move to P4

4-94
 4.12 Sample program

Detail of sample Program

Robot 2: Before entering the working area

Step 3: Confirm I nput 1 ON

-> Check robot 1 is outside t he working area
Step 4: Output 1 OFF
Robot 1: Before e ntering the working area -> inform Robot 1 that Robot 2 is inside the working area
Step 5: DELAY 0.1 second
St ep 3: Conf irm Input 1 ON -> Priority robot is possible to enter t he work ing area at t he
-> Check robot 2 is outside the working area same time, so Robot 2 waits for a while
St ep 4: Output 1 OFF Step 6: Confirm I nput 1 ON
-> inform Robot 2 that Robot 1 is inside the working area -> Check robot 1 is outside t he working area

Working area
Step5 Step7 Step2
Step2

Robot 1 ● ● ● ● Robot 2
P2 P3 P6 P5
Step6 Step8
I nput signal 1
O N -> Entering allowed
O FF -> Entering prohibit ed St ep1
Step1
●
P1 ● Step8
Step10 P4

Robot 1: After getting out from the working area Robot 2: After getting out from the work ing area
St ep 7: Output 1 OFF Step 9: Output 1 OFF
-> inform Robot 2 that Robot 1 is out side the working area -> inform Robot 1 that Robot 2 is outside the working area

Robot program should be created so that he enters the working area after checking another robot is
already outside the working area by reading the input signal 1.

It is, robot 1 confirms that input signal 1 is ON (means robot 2 is outside the working area) with WAITI
command.
If input signal 1 was OFF, robot 1 waits until input signal 1 becomes ON.
After confirming ON, robot 1 informs to robot 2 that robot 1 is going to enter the working area by making
output 1 OFF. Then robot 1 enters the working area.
Robot 1 makes output 1 ON when getting out from the working area.

In case that both robots are going to enter the working area at the same time, it's possible that WAIT
command is cleared at the same time.
So robot 2, which does not have priority, has to confirm input signal 1 again after short time delay.
This short time must include the maximum delay time from output signal 1 ON until input signal 1 ON.

4-95
4.12 Sample program

NOTE

4-96
Chapter 5 Auto operation (playback)

This chapter described how to automatically run (playback) the programs that have
been created.

5.1 Before starting auto operation.....................................................................5-1

5.1.1 Methods of starting automatic operation ...............................................5-1
5.1.2 Notations for buttons used in automatic operation ................................5-2
5.1.3 Playback methods (5 operation modes)................................................5-2
5.1.4 Specifying the step which playback starts .............................................5-3
5.1.5 Operating speed when the start step is specified..................................5-3
5.2 Performing automatic operation (playback)－Multi-station start method－ ...............................5-4
5.3 Performing automatic operation (playback) ― Internal start method ― ..................................5-8
5.4 Performing automatic operation (playback) －External start method－.............................5-9
5.5 Operations in different operation modes ................................................... 5-11
This is dummy page. DO NOT ERASE.
 5.1 Before starting auto operation

5.1 Before starting auto operation

This section describes the basic knowledge required to perform auto operation.

5.1.1 Methods of starting automatic operation

There are three methods for starting operation. Table 5.1.1 indicates the starting methods.
Normally, the starting method is set prior to shipment or prior to delivery according to the
customer’s specifications.
The operation method for automatic operation differs according to the start method used. Read
through the section of the following explanation that corresponds to customer start method.

Table 5.1.1 Start method

Start method Details

This is the method that starts/reserves the program by pressing the [START
BUTTON] on the start box or control box installed at each station.
The programs to be started are allocated ahead of time for each station.
(The teach pendant is used for the allocation.)
ST2 ST3 ST4
Robot
非常 停 止
EM E R GE N C Y S T O P

運転準備 教示 再生

bench 1
M O TO R O N

Multi-station Start
TE ACH LAY BC
P AK

bench 3
Work

Work
起 動 停 止
START STOP
Operation box

Operation box

Work Task programs are started or

bench 2
reserved by pressing the [Start
Operation
box button] on the operation box
installed at each station.

This is the method that runs the program selected by the Teach Pendant as
is. Start and stop are performed using the control box (station 1), operating
panel or teach pendant.

Run the program

Internal start selected by the
Teach Pendant.

The series of tasks relating to automatic operation include start, program

selection and stop are input from an external device such as a host
controller or control console in front of the operator.
host controller, control
Teach pendant console, etc.

The start input and

program number input
are initiated from the
external source.

External start
FD11
controller

In this case, the start signal and program select signal from the external
device must be set ahead of time so that they will be input to the basic input
signal “external start” and “program select bits” of the controller. In addition,
the signal reading method (binary, discrete or BCD) must be specified. For
further details, refer to the Installation Manual part of the operating
instructions.

5-1
5.1 Before starting auto operation

5.1.2 Notations for buttons used in automatic operation

When doing automatic operation (playback) either with an internal start or station start, the
[MOTOR ON BUTTON], [START BUTTON] button and [STOP BUTTON] are used.

These buttons are on the control box on the front of the controller (station 1), start box (station 2
and later), operating panel and teach pendant.

Table 5.1.2 Buttons needed for automatic operation (playback)

Installation location
Button Operation Start Operation
Teach Pendent
(Notations in Box Box Panel
this chapter)
運転準備
MOTOR ON

[MOTOR ON BUTTON] None ＋

起 動
START

[START BUTTON] ＋ ＋

停 止
STOP

[STOP BUTTON] ＋

In factory default settings, the [START BUTTON] on the Teach pendent is

POINT disabled.

If you start automatic operation from the Teach pendent, set the [Starting key] to
"Enabled" by selecting the menu <Constant Setting>- [7 f-Keys]-[11 Starting
key].

5.1.3 Playback methods (5 operation modes)

There are five operation modes for the playback methods. One of these modes is selected prior to
playback, but the mode can also be selected during playback.
Either “Cycle” or “Continuous” is selected during actual operations. All the other modes are
selected when checking what has been taught or when trying out an auto operation.

Table 5.1.3 Playback methods

Playback methods Details

• While the [START BUTTON] is held down, one step of the program
Step is executed. (When it is released, the robot stops.)
• To advance to the next step, press the [START BUTTON] again.
• When the [START BUTTON] is pressed once, the program is
Cycle executed once from start to end.
• When the last step is reached, the robot stops.
• When the [START BUTTON] is pressed, one step of the program is
executed, and the robot stops.
Cycle step by step
• To advance to the next step, press [ENABLE] + f8 <Step by Step>.
• When the last step is reached, the robot stops.

Continue • When the [START BUTTON] is pressed, the program is executed

repeatedly.

• When the [START BUTTON] is pressed, one step of the program is

executed, and the robot stops.
Continuous step by step • To advance to the next step, press [ENABLE] + f8 <Step by Step>.
• When the last step is reached, operation returns to the first step,
and the program is executed again.

5-2
 5.1 Before starting auto operation

5.1.4 Specifying the step which playback starts

Where playback is to start can be specified at any step from the teach pendant. (When the
program has just been selected, the program start, namely step 0, is specified.)
However, instances in which the step can be specified are the following.

Table 5.1.4 Specifying the step from which playback starts

First startup after program
Start method Startup after a stop
selection
Multi-station start Step specification disabled Step specification enabled
Internal start Step specification enabled Step specification enabled
Ext. play start. Step specification disabled Step specification enabled

POINT In case of the factory default setting, it is not possible to playback a program
from a function command step. To make it possible, it is necessary to make a
setting. For details, refer to "7.12 Selecting a Function Command Step and
operating". And, there are some function commands that cannot be designated
as a start step even if this setting is made.

5.1.5 Operating speed when the start step is specified

When a step other than step 0 has been selected from the teach pendant and playback has been
started, the robot moves from the current position to the specified start step at the safety speed
(less than 250 mm/sec.). This operation prevents unforeseen interference and other trouble
resulting from the operator selecting the incorrect step. The safety speed restriction is canceled
starting from the next step.
If the selected step (any step except 0) is a function command, the safety speed restriction comes
into effect for the first operation to the movement command step. In the default settings, playback
cannot be performed with a function command step selected. For details, see "7.12 Selecting a
Function Command Step and Operating.”
If a start step is selected for the program start (namely, step 0), the program runs at normal speed
instead of safety speed.
If, for instance, step 2 is selected from the teach pendant to start the operation, the robot will move
at the safety speed until step 2. From step 3 onward, it will move at the specified speed.

Movement of robot at a
speed below safety speed

Step 2
(start step)
Current
position
Step 1
Step 3

Fig. 5.1.1 Robot movements at safety speed

If <Service Utilities> - [1 Teach/Playback Conditions] – [20 Recover to stopped position] is

set to [Enabled], and [After Step Set] in the detailed conditions is set to [Current position],
the robot operates at the specified speed, not the safety speed.
WARNING Restart operation after checking operation in advance using the check operation.

5-3
5.2 Performing automatic operation (playback)－Multi-station start method－

5.2 Performing automatic operation (playback)－Multi-station start method－

The playback procedure to be followed when the multi-station start method is used is described here.

Allocating the programs to be started to stations

It is necessary to allocate the programs to be started to stations in advance for the multi-stage
station method.
The program is allocated in the teach mode.

1 Press <Station Set>.

Or select <Constant Setting> — [5 Operation Constants] — [7 Condition of Multi

station starter].

>> The allocation screen now appears.

The screen below shows a case with three stations.

2 Input the number of the task program to be started for each station.

3 To facilitate the setting, press f9 <Program List> while the cursor is in the
“Program” column.
>> A list of programs is now displayed.

5-4
 5.2 Performing automatic operation (playback)－Multi-station start method－

4 Select the program, and press [Enter].

>> The selected program is allocated.

5 When a program has been allocated to each of the stations, press f12 <Complete>.
>> The allocation is stored in the memory.

f9<Station Set> is displayed on “The number of station” set over 1 with proceeding <Constant
POINT Setting> and [5 Operation Constants] and then [6 Number of station]. When “The number of
station” is set on 0, the f9<Station Set > is not displayed.

Start the program

Upon completion of the allocation, start the task program.

1 Establish the playback mode.

At this time, the program selected in the teach mode becomes deselected (as the select
program is not started in multi-station startup, the program becomes deselected
immediately after switching to the playback mode).
When one of the station start buttons is pressed, the program number and program
details of the program allocated to that station are displayed, and playback starts.

2 Select the playback method required.

＋ f4 / f5 The playback method (operation mode) can be selected by pressing the
[ENABLE] and the f4 key together or by pressing [ENABLE] and the f5 key
together (in other words, one of these two combinations of keys is pressed
together).

f4 f5 Operation
• When f4 is set to step continuous, the
mode is switched from “Cycle” →
“Continue” → “Step” every time f5 is
pressed.
• When f4 is set to single step, the mode
is switched from “Cycle Step by Step”
→ “Continuous Step by Step” →
“Step” every time f5 is pressed.

• When f4 is pressed while f5 is at any

setting, single is switched to
continuous or continuous is switched
to single.

5-5
5.2 Performing automatic operation (playback)－Multi-station start method－

3 Press the [MOTOR ON BUTTON] on the control box.

>> The motor power is now turned on. The [MOTOR ON BUTTON] lights.

This now completes the preparations for auto operation.

4 Press the [START] button on the control box installed at the station to be started.
>> Automatic operation now starts in accordance with the playback method selected.
For details on the movements of the robot using each playback method, the stop
methods and restart methods, refer to page 5-11 “5.5 Operations in different
operation modes”.

Reserving and canceling the reservation of the station to be started next

If, when a multiple number of stations are available, the [START] button on station (B) is pressed
while station (A) has started, station (B) will be set to the reserved status. Upon completion of the
station (A) playback, station (B) will start. However, a station which has already started cannot be
reserved. (While station (A) has started, station (A) cannot be reserved.)

Reservations can be made for a multiple number of stations.

1 Press the [START] button on the station to be reserved.

>> The task program allocated to that station is set to the reserved status, and the
[START] button flashes.

2 To cancel the reservation, press the [START] button on the station being reserved.
>> The reservation is now canceled.

Checking the reservations

To check the reserved stations and programs, start the "station reservation start status monitor."

1 Press <Station Monitor>.

>> The station reservation start status monitor now starts.

“Run” indicates now starting, “Yet” means no start,

and the numbers indicate the reservation sequence.

The station number is indicated here.

5-6
 5.2 Performing automatic operation (playback)－Multi-station start method－

2 To exit the monitor, press [CLOSE/SELECT SCREEN] to set the station reservation
start status monitor to active.

Then press [CLOSE/SELECT SCREEN] while holding down [ENABLE].

＋
3 The reservations can also be checked using the following method. (This method involves
allocating the station reservation start status monitor to monitor 2.)

After pressing <Service Utilities>, press [4 Monitor 2].

>> A list of the monitor functions that can be displayed now appears.

4 Select [13 Station reservation status], and press [Enter].

>> The station reservation start status monitor now starts.

5-7
5.3 Performing automatic operation (playback) ― Internal start method ―

5.3 Performing automatic operation (playback) ― Internal start method ―

The playback procedure to be followed with the internal start method is described here.

Selecting the playback method

1 Establish the playback mode.

2 Select the playback method required.

＋ f4 / f5 The playback method (operation mode) can be selected by pressing the
[ENABLE] and the f4 key together or by pressing [ENABLE] and the f5 key
together (in other words, one of these two combinations of keys is pressed
together).

f4 f5 Operation
• When f4 is set to step continuous, the
mode is switched from “Cycle” →
“Continue” → “Step” every time f5 is
pressed.
• When f4 is set to single step, the mode
is switched from “Cycle Step by Step”
→ “Continuous Step by Step” →
“Step” every time f5 is pressed.
• When f4 is pressed while f5 is at any
setting, single is switched to
continuous or continuous is switched
to single.

3 Press [ENABLE] and [PROG/STEP] to select the program which is to be played

＋ back.
When operation is transferred to the playback mode while the task program remains
selected in the teach mode, the task program concerned is played back.

4 Press the [MOTOR ON BUTTON].

>> The motor power is now turned on. The [MOTOR ON BUTTON] lights.

5 Press [START BUTTON].

>> Automatic operation now starts in accordance with the playback method selected.
For details on the movements of the robot using each playback method, the stop
methods and restart methods, refer to page 5-11 “5.5 Operations in different
operation modes”.

5-8
 5.4 Performing automatic operation (playback) －External start method－

5.4 Performing automatic operation (playback) －External start method－

The playback procedure to be followed with the external start method is described here.

Selecting the playback method

1 Establish the playback mode.

2 Select the playback method required.

＋ f4 / f5 The playback method (operation mode) can be selected by pressing the
[ENABLE] and the f4 key together or by pressing [ENABLE] and the f5 key
together (in other words, one of these two combinations of keys is pressed
together).

f4 f5 Operation
• When f4 is set to step continuous, the
mode is switched from “Cycle” →
“Continue” → “Step” every time f5 is
pressed.
• When f4 is set to single step, the mode
is switched from “Cycle Step by Step”
→ “Continuous Step by Step” →
“Step” every time f5 is pressed.
• When f4 is pressed while f5 is at any
setting, single is switched to
continuous or continuous is switched
to single.

3 Input the external motor power ON signal from the external device.
>> The motor power is now turned on. The [MOTOR ON BUTTON] lights.

4 Input the number of the program to be started (program selection bit) from the
external device.
5 Input the external start signal from the external device.
>> Automatic operation now starts in accordance with the playback method selected.
For details on the movements of the robot using each playback method, the stop
methods and restart methods, refer to page 5-11 “5.5 Operations in different
operation modes”.

5-9
5.4 Performing automatic operation (playback) －External start method－

Switching startup methods and program selection methods

When internal startup or external startup is being used with the controller, the startup method can
be switched using a simple operation. (Internal can be changed to external and vice versa.) For
instance, even when “external start” has been selected, it is possible to switch to “internal start”
temporarily in order to check what has been taught.

Internal or external can be selected as the method to select the task program to be played back.

1 The current settings can be checked on the display of the teach pendant.

In the case of the screen shown above, internal is selected both as the start method and
program select.
The allocation of the f-keys shown above differs depending on the application. If they
are not displayed, check and change the settings by performing the operations
described in 3.

2 The method can be switched between <Start Con/Prog Con> and <Start Ext/Prog
＋ Ext> by pressing f2 while holding down [ENABLE].

→
←

3 The settings can also be changed from the service menu. On the service menu, start
select and program select can be changed independently.

Press f6 <Service Utilities> while holding down [ENABLE], and select [1

＋ Teach/Playback Condition].
>> The [1 Teach/Playback Condition] setting screen now appears.

4 Align the cursor with “2 MotorsON/START sel.source” and “3 Playback mode

prog.sel.”, and set these two items.
To make changes, use [ENABLE] + [left or right].
＋

5 Upon completion of the changes, press f12 <Complete>.

>> The settings are now stored in the memory, and operation returns to the original
screen.

5-10
 5.5 Operations in different operation modes

5.5 Operations in different operation modes

Operations in five operation modes are described here.
The explanation given below describes the start and stop methods using the [START BUTTON] and [STOP
BUTTON].
When the external start method is used, read the following as the alternatives of the [START BUTTON] and
[STOP BUTTON].

Fig. 5.5.1 Alternatives for the [START BUTTON] and [STOP BUTTON]
When the external start method is used
Press the [START BUTTON]. Input the start signal.
Press the [STOP BUTTON]. Input the stop signal.

Before initiating playback, check that no one is near the robot.

If the robot should come into contact or sandwich a person, death or serious injury may
result.
DANGER

Step playback
First, to ensure safety, check the operations of the robot during step playback.

1 Select step playback.

2 Specify the step at which playback is to start.

To play back from the start of the program, press [PROG/STEP], [0] and then
[Enter].
>> The cursor now moves to step 0.

To play back from step 2, press [PROG/STEP], [2] and then [Enter].

Concerning the designation of the step

You can specify a step prior to beginning playback when “Internal Startup
INFO. Method” is employed.
When “External Startup Method” or “Multi-Station Startup Method” is used, you
cannot specify a step prior to beginning playback. (Playback will always start with
Step 0 for the first startup.) However, if you stop after beginning playback, you
can specify a step using the method described above.

3 Press [START BUTTON].

>> While the button is held down, the robot moves from the current position to the
specified step.

4 In the step playback mode, the robot stops at the next step.
To continue playback, press the [START BUTTON] again.
>> While the button is held down, the robot moves again to the next step.

5-11
5.5 Operations in different operation modes

Cycle playback
Next, check the operation of the robot during cycle playback.

1 Select cycle playback.

2 As with step playback, specify the step at which playback is to start.

3 Press [START BUTTON].

>> When the button is pressed once, the robot moves from the current position to the
specified step, and operates as far as the last step. When the [START BUTTON] is
pressed again after the last step has been reached, the robot operates again from
the first step.

4 To stop the robot at any time, press the [STOP BUTTON].

5 To restart the robot, press the [START BUTTON] again.

Continuous playback
Proceed as follows to initiate continuous playback.

1 Select continuous playback.

2 As with step playback, specify the step at which playback is to start.

3 Press [START BUTTON].

>> When the button is pressed once, the robot moves from the current position to the
specified step, and operates as far as the last step. When the last step is reached,
operation proceeds again from the first step, and cycle playback is repeated.

4 To stop the robot at any time, press the [STOP BUTTON].

5 To restart the robot, press the [START BUTTON] again.

Cycle playback (step by step)

Proceed as follows to perform cycle playback in the step by step mode.

1 Select cycle playback (step by step).

2 As with step playback, specify the step at which playback is to start.

3 Press [START BUTTON].

>> When this button is pressed once, the robot operates from the current position to the
specified step.

4 To advance to the next step, press f8 <Step by Step> while holding down
＋ [ENABLE].
>> The robot operates as far as the next step.
Repeat this procedure to check the operation as far as the last step.
When the [START BUTTON] is pressed again after the last step has been reached,
the robot operates again from the first step.

5-12
 5.5 Operations in different operation modes

Continuous playback (step by step)

Proceed as follows to perform cycle playback in the step by step mode.

1 Select continuous playback (step by step) by following the procedure.

2 As with step playback, specify the step at which playback is to start.

3 Press [START BUTTON].

>> When the button is pressed once, the robot operates from the current position to the
specified step.

4 To advance to the next step, press f8 <Step by Step> while holding down
＋ [ENABLE].
>> The robot operates as far as the next step.
Repeat this procedure and check.
When the last step is reached, the robot operates again from the first step.

5-13
5.5 Operations in different operation modes

NOTE

5-14
 Chapter 6 File operations

This chapter describes how to copy, delete and back up files.

6.1 Copying, deleting and renaming programs .................................................6-1

6.1.1 Copying programs.................................................................................6-1
6.1.2 Deleting programs.................................................................................6-2
6.1.3 Renaming (renumbering) programs ......................................................6-3
6.2 Concerning the file operation menu ............................................................6-4
6.2.1 File operation menu selection and common operations........................6-4
6.2.2 Types of usable storage media .............................................................6-7
6.2.3 Operable files........................................................................................6-8
6.2.4 Folder structure of internal memory ......................................................6-9
6.2.5 Selection method of Files....................................................................6-12
6.3 Inserting the USB Memory........................................................................6-13
6.3.1 Types of USB memory that can be used.............................................6-13
6.3.2 Inserting the USB Memory ..................................................................6-13
6.4 Copying files .............................................................................................6-16
6.5 Displaying a list of the files .......................................................................6-21
6.6 Deleting files .............................................................................................6-23
6.7 Setting protection for files .........................................................................6-27
6.8 Verifying files.............................................................................................6-32
6.9 Initializing the USB memory......................................................................6-35
6.10 Backing up files.......................................................................................6-36
6.11 Restoring files from backup.....................................................................6-39
6.12 Performing automatic backup .................................................................6-45
6.13 Restricting file copy.................................................................................6-47

Do not switch the power off when using any of the file operation menus explained in this
chapter, or while the automatic backup function is operating. Switching off the power
while the controller is accessing various files may cause unexpected damage to files in
CAUTION the controller. This may prevent the controller from starting.

Precautions when using USB Memory:

For commercially available USB memory operation is not covered by warranty. Only the USB
memory in “Controller Maintenance” section of the instruction manual is guaranteed to operate.
When using USB memory that has been accessed by a different device with this controller, always
CAUTION check using commercially available anti-virus software that there are no viruses or other malicious
software on the USB memory before connecting it to the controller.
 6.1 Copying, deleting and renaming programs

6.1 Copying, deleting and renaming programs

This section describes the operations to copy, delete and rename programs inside the internal memory.

6.1.1 Copying programs

How to copy programs is described here. The operations described here enable a single program
to be selected and copied. To specify a multiple number of programs and copy them, refer to page
6-16 “6.4 Copying files”.

Copying programs
1 While holding down [ENABLE], press [PROG/STEP].
＋ >> The [Program Selection] window now opens.

2 Select “Copy.”

3 Press [Enter].
>> The [Program copy] screen now appears.

4 Select the programs to be copied.

If the programs do not fit into 1 screen, they are displayed over multiple pages.
In this case, search the program targeted for the operation using f9 < > or f10 < >.

5 Press [Enter].
>> It is now possible to input the number of the copy destination program.

6 Input the number of the copy destination program, and press [Enter].
Number >> The program is copied, and the operation returns to the previous screen.
input

6-1
6.1 Copying, deleting and renaming programs

6.1.2 Deleting programs

How to delete programs is described here. The operations described here enable a single
program to be selected and deleted. To specify a multiple number of programs and delete them,
refer to page 6-23 “6.6 Deleting files”.

Deleting programs
1 While holding down [ENABLE], press [PROG/STEP].
＋ >> The [Program Selection] window now opens.

2 Select “Delete.”

3 Press [Enter].
>> The [Program deletion] screen now appears.

4 Select the program to be deleted.

If the programs do not fit into 1 screen, they are displayed over multiple pages.
In this case, search the program targeted for the operation using f9 < > or f10 < >.

5 Press [Enter].
>> A confirmation screen now appears.

6 Select “OK” and press [Enter].

>> The program is deleted, and the operation returns to the previous screen.

6-2
 6.1 Copying, deleting and renaming programs

6.1.3 Renaming (renumbering) programs

How to rename (renumber) programs is described here.

Rename the program.

1 While holding down [ENABLE], press [PROG/STEP].
＋ >> The [Program Selection] window now opens.

2 Select “Rename.”

3 Press [Enter].
>> The [Program number conversion] screen now appears.

4 Select the program to be changed.

If the programs do not fit into 1 screen, they are displayed over multiple pages.
In this case, search the program targeted for the operation using f9 < > or f10 < >.

5 Press [Enter].
>> The new program number can now be input.

6 Input the number of the program after changing, and press [Enter].
>> A confirmation screen now appears.

7 Select “OK” and press [Enter].

>> The number of the program is changed, and the operation returns to the previous
screen.

6-3
6.2 Concerning the file operation menu

6.2 Concerning the file operation menu

Selecting the file operation menu enables operations for not only programs but also constant files, etc. to be
performed.

This menu has the following functions which can be selected in either the teach mode or playback mode.

Table 6.2.1 Functions of file operation menu

Operation menu Details
This is for copying files.
File Copy Files can be copied not only between internal memories, but also from an
internal memory to an external storage device using a USB memory (stored), or
from an external storage device to an internal memory (read).
This is for displaying a list of the files stored in the internal memory or external
Directory
storage device.
This is for deleting the files stored in the internal memory or external storage
File Delete
device.
This is for setting protection for the files stored in the internal memory or
File Protect
external storage device.
This is for verifying whether the contents match between two files or between all
Verify
the files on different storage media match.
Format IC card/Floppy This is for initializing the USB memory. Initialization can only be executed by
disk “RC External Storage.”
File Backup This stores all the files in an external storage device.
This is for restoring all the backed up files in the controller.
Backup restore An operator must have the qualifications class of EXPERT or above to use the
backup restore function.
This is for automatically backing up the files under the specified conditions. An
Automatic backup operator must have the qualifications class of EXPERT or above to use this
function.
FDV4.22 and later This is for restricting file copy to the external media.
File copy restriction It is necessary to have operator qualification of EXPERT or above.

6.2.1 File operation menu selection and common operations

This section describes how to select the file operation menu and how to perform operations after
its functions have been selected.

Selecting the file operation menu

1 Press f4 <File>.
If this soft key is not provided, the menu can be opened from the service menu.
In this case, select “7 File Manager” from the service menu, and press [Enter].
>> The file operation menu such as the one shown below is now opened.

2 By selecting a desired function and press [Enter], each function can be chosen.

6-4
 6.2 Concerning the file operation menu

Common operation using file operation menu

This section describes the common operations performed after the functions have been selected
on the file operation menu.

1 When copy is selected, for instance, the screen shown below appears.

1 2 3 5

FDV4.22 or after

1 9 3 2 5

6 10

6-5
6.2 Concerning the file operation menu

2 Move through fields 1 to 8, and set the items required.

To move through each field (1 to 8), use the left and right keys.
To select the items displayed in the fields, use the up and down keys.

1 Device selection field (for details, refer to page 6-7 “6.2.2 Types of usable storage
media”)
Select the device containing the file targeted for operation.
To copy a file, select the copy source device in field 1 and the copy destination
device in field 6.
2 Program input field
To specify a program to be copied or deleted, input its number in this field
(program files in ¥WORK¥PROGRAM can be specified). To display a list of files and
select one or more of these files, specify “PROGRAM” in field 4.
3 File type selection field (for details, refer to page 6-8 “6.2.3 Operable files”)
Select the file type. Select the type here when performing file operation by type of
file such as program file or constant file.
4 older selection field (for details, refer to page 6 6-9 “6.2.4 Folder structure of internal
memory”)
To search the file targeted for operation, specify the folder that contains the file.
5 File directory
If a folder is specified in 4, a list of files is displayed in 5. To select an individual file
or files and perform file operations, select the files here.
FDV4.22 and later
In case of selecting file at “Method” of ９ then, only file will indicate. In case of
selecting folder, only folder will indicate.
6 Device selection field (when copying only)
Select the copy destination device.
7 Program input field (when copying only)
Input the number of the program to be copied.
8 Folder selection field (when copying only)
Specify the copy destination folder.
FDV4.22 and later
9 Method（For more detail, page 6-12『6.2.5 Selection method of Files』）
Designate selection method of the file to be target operated.

10 Folder indication field of copy destination（Only when copying）

When executing copy with the current setting, this indicates which folder files to be
copied

6-6
 6.2 Concerning the file operation menu

3 If a folder is specified in 4, a list of files is displayed in 5. In this case, the

sequence in which the files are arranged can be switched using f7 <Name> or f8
<Ascending>.

4 Upon completion of the necessary settings, press f12 <Execute>.

>> The file operation is now executed.

To stop the processing during a file operation, press f11 <Quit>.

>> A confirmation message now appears.

Processing is aborted by pressing any key.

5 To exit the operation, press [RESET/R].

>> Operation returns to the file operation menu.

6.2.2 Types of usable storage media

This controller is equipped with a USB port for external storage devices, and USB memory can be
used as storage media. Data can be stored in an external storage device, or conversely, data can
be read from an external storage device.
USB ports for external storage devices are equipped to both the controller and the teach pendent.
To access the external storage device, it is necessary to select the target beforehand.
See table 6.2.2.

Table 6.2.2 Usable storage media

External storage device
Details
(media)
This accesses the USB memory connected to the USB port on the
RC External memory 1
controller.
This accesses the USB memory connected to the USB port on the
TP External memory
teach pendant.

Before files are stored in an external storage device, the storage media must have been
initialized.
See page 6-35 “6.9 Initializing the USB memory ”.

Do not connect any other type of USB device other than USB memory to the
USB port.
CAUTION

There are two RC external memory USB ports. Do not use them at the same
time.
IMPORTANT

6-7
6.2 Concerning the file operation menu

6.2.3 Operable files

The files that can be operated using the file operation menu are listed below.

Table 6.2.3 Operable files

File Description of file
This kind of file contains the created programs.
Program file
[Example] SH166.**** (**** denotes numbers)
This kind of file is for the position data used in the robot language.
Pose file
[Example] SH166_P.**** (**** denotes numbers)
This is a program file which is described in the robot language.
Language file It is a text file.
[Example] SH166_A.**** (**** denotes numbers)
This kind of file contains the values inherent to the robots and
various settings.
Constant file It is an INI format text file.
[Examples] MECHANISM.CON (mechanism definition file)
TOOTOL01.C01 (tool constants file)
This kind of file contains error histories, welding histories etc.
Log file It is an INI format text file.
[Example] LG-ERR001.LOG (Error history file 001)

PLC program This is a PLC program (ladder program) used by the software PLC.
(Ladder program) [Example] ********.stf (******** denotes any name)

These are the arc start/end condition files which are used with arc
Arc welding condition welding.
files [Example] AS###ARCW.*** (### denotes the type of welder and
*** denotes number)
These are the weaving start/end condition files used when weaving
with arc welding.
Weaving condition files
[Examples] WFP.*** (*** denotes number)
WAX.*** (*** denotes number)

6-8
 6.2 Concerning the file operation menu

6.2.4 Folder structure of internal memory

The internal memory of the controller is structured in the following way.
The operator must be familiar with the folder structure when performing operations for files stored
in the internal memory
Internal Memory

CONVERT (1)

INI (2)

A_APPLICATION (2.1)

EU (2.1.1)

JPN (2.1.2)

SETUP (2.1.3)

USA (2.1.4)

APPLICATION (2.2)

AUTOCAL (2.3)

ERROR (2.4)

HELP (3)

PLCENGINE (4)

WORK (5)

A_APPLICATION (5.1)

AE (5.1.1)

AS (5.1.2)

OFFSET (5.1.3)

SENS (5.1.4)

WELD (5.1.5)

WS (5.1.6)

AUTOCAL (5.2)

LOG (5.3)

PLC (5.4)

PROGRAM (5.5)

TRACE (5.6)

UNDO (5.7)

UNIT (5.8)

USERERROR (5.9)

PRGFLD (5.10)
Fig. 6.2.1 Folder structure of internal memory

6-9
6.2 Concerning the file operation menu

Table 6.2.4 Files stored in folders

Filename (example)
No. Folder Files stored in folders
(“***” denotes numbers)
(1) CONVERT Folder used by conventional model format conversion ¥AW, ¥EX
function
(2) INI Initial value files (serving as source for generating AC00SOFTKEY.INI,
constant files when constants are to be prepared) Ac01arcw.ini, etc.

(2.1) INI¥A_APPLICATION (Valid only for arc welding applications) AS01arcw.ini,

Initial value files used specifically for arc welding AE01arcw.ini, etc.
applications (initial value data related to arc welding,
initial value files for sensor applications, etc.)
(2.1.1) INI¥A_APPLICATION¥EU Initial value files listed below for arc welding power
supply (European specifications)
Welding characteristics data files $WTBD***
Waveform control data files $WPLS***
(2.1.2) INI¥A_APPLICATION¥JPN Initial value files listed below for arc welding power
supply (Japanese specifications)
Welding characteristics data files $WTBD***
Waveform control data files $WPLS***
(2.1.3) INI¥A_APPLICATION¥SETUP mprg_dm.bin,
Control software of arc welding power supplies. ¥Update¥AL-111.bin
(2.1.4) INI¥A_APPLICATION¥USA Initial value files listed below for arc welding power
supply (U.S. specifications)
Welding characteristics data files $WTBD***
Waveform control data files $WPLS***
(2.2) INI¥APPLICATION Initial value files used for specific applications (such A_C00CTRL.INI,
as spot welding, arc welding and handling) A_S00SIGL.INI, etc.

(2.3) INI¥AUTOCAL Initial value files used by automatic calibration function nv6.kin
(option) nv6.prm, etc.

(2.4) INI¥ERROR Error files Err****.ini

(3) HELP AX-HELP*.chm,
Help files AX-HELP*.hhc,
AX-HELP*.hhk
(4) PLCENGINE IsaGRAF.exe,
Files related to software PLC IsaIXL.dll, etc.
(5) WORK C00ctrl.con,
Constant files S00sigl.con, etc.
(5.1) A_APPLICATION (Valid only for arc welding applications) ¥AE, ¥AS, ¥OFFSET,
Folder for files (5.1.1 to 5.1.6) listed below ¥SENS, ¥WELD, ¥WS

(5.1.1) A_APPLICATION¥AE AE##ARCW.***

Arc end condition files (“##” denotes the type
of welder)
AE##arcw1.CON
Arc end condition initial value files (“##” denotes the type
of welder)
(5.1.2) A_APPLICATION¥AS AS###ARCW.***
Arc start condition files (“##” denotes the type
of welder)
AS###arcw1.CON
Arc start condition initial value files (“##” denotes the type
of welder)
(5.1.3) A_APPLICATION¥OFFSET Files listed below used by multipass welding function
(option)
Offset files OFSARCW.***
Multi offset files MOFSARCW.***
(5.1.4) A_APPLICATION¥SENS Files related to sensor devices (touch sensors, arc ST01sens1.CON,
sensors, TIG arc sensors, laser search, laser sensors) ET01sens1.CON, etc.

6-10
 6.2 Concerning the file operation menu

Filename (example)
No. Folder Files stored in folders
(“***” denotes numbers)
(5.1.5) A_APPLICATION¥WELD Welding characteristics data files $WTBD***
Wire feed characteristics data files $WFCD***
Waveform control data files $WPLS***
Welding condition database files WDB***
(5.1.6) A_APPLICATION¥WS Fixed pattern weaving condition files WFP.***
Joint weaving condition files WAX.***
Taught weaving (option) condition files WSF.***
Fixed pattern weaving initial value files WFP-*.CON
Joint weaving initial value files WAX-*.CON
Taught weaving (option) initial value files WSF-*.CON
(5.2) WORK¥AUTOCAL Data files used by automatic calibration function Setup_ac.csv, etc.
(option)
(5.3) WORK¥LOG Error log files LG-Err***.log
lg-MTBF_MTTR_A.bin,
MTBF/MTTR files etc.
Overhaul prediction files Lg-pmd.log
Program diagnosis files LG-PMD0P****.LOG
Stop log files LG-STOP.log
(5.4) WORK¥PLC Ladder program *.STF
(5.5) WORK¥PROGRAM Program files NV6.**** , etc.
Pause files NV6_P.**** , etc.
Language files NV6_A.**** , etc.
(5.6) WORK¥TRACE Measurement data prepared by oscilloscope function TRACE**.CSV
(5.7) WORK¥UNDO Undo operation history files NV6_Undo_0.001, etc.
(5.8) WORK¥UNIT Unit-dependent constant files U00UNIT001.CON, etc.
(5.9) WORK¥USERERROR User error definition file Err7***.ini
(5.10) WORK¥PRGFLD Program management file ****NV6.**** etc.

Some of the files listed in the above table may not be displayed depending on whether the
optional functions concerned are provided and on the qualifications level of the operator.
IMPORTANT

6-11
6.2 Concerning the file operation menu

6.2.5 Selection method of Files

FDV4.22 and later

Possible way for designation as a selection method of a file is as shown below.
Table 6.2.5- File selection method

Selection method Contents

Use this in case of desired to select the file to be operated from file list, which is
displayed at file directory.
File
In case of designating “File” at Method, then only files are shown on File
directory.
Use this in case of desired to select the folder to be operated from file list, which
is displayed at file directory.
Folder
In case of designating “Folder” at Method, then only files are shown on File
directory.
Use this in case of desired to select the file to be operated by designating
program No.
Program No.
Only in case of designating “Program No.” at Method, Program input field and
File type selection field are shown.
Use this, in case of desired to select the file of operation target according to the
File Type types of file like work program file or Constant file.
Only in case of selecting “File type” at Method, File type selection field is shown.

6-12
 6.3 Inserting the USB Memory

6.3 Inserting the USB Memory

This controller is equipped with USB ports as a standard feature.
To prepare to back up the data, plug a USB memory into the USB port.

Backing up the data on a frequent base is advised.

POINT If, by any chance, the data is accidentally lost by an incorrect operation, the data
can be restored from the backup.

Do not connect any other type of USB device other than USB memory to the
USB port.
CAUTION

6.3.1 Types of USB memory that can be used

For details on the types of USB memory that can be used and for precautions for use, see the
“Controller Maintenance” section of the instruction manual.

6.3.2 Inserting the USB Memory

To save files onto the USB memory, plug the USB memory into the USB port of the controller or
teach pendant in advance.
If there are two storage devices available which USB memories are inserted into, it is advisable to
use them as shown in table 6.3.1 below.

Table 6.3.1 USB memory uses

External Storage Device

Use
(Media)
Suitable for transferring large files, such as for backup
RC External memory 1 etc. Use this when the USB memory is always connected
for automatic backup.
Suitable for transferring small files, such as for copying
TP External memory
files etc.

6-13
6.3 Inserting the USB Memory

Inserting USB memory into the robot controller (RC External Memory)

Only insert and remove the USB memory when the robot controller power is
switched off.
Inserting or removing the USB memory when the power is on may corrupt the
WARNING data saved on the USB memory.

1 Turn off the power of the robot controller, and open the door.
Insert the USB memory into “CNUSB2” or “CNUSB3” on the CPU board.
The CPU board is installed in the rack unit.
Insert the USB memory in the correct orientation. It cannot be inserted in the
wrong orientation.

Front (Internal)
正面図（内部） Enlarged rack unit diagram
ラックユニット拡大図
ラックユニット
Rack unit CPU CPU
Board
基板
CNUSB3
CNUSB2

USB Memory
USBメモリ

There are 2 USB ports in the CPU board. The USB memory will work
irrespective of which USB port it is connected to. However, do not connect 2
IMPORTANT USB memories at the same time.

2 Close the door of the controller, and turn the power on.

3 Perform backup and other tasks.

4 The USB memory can be used continually when connected.

Before removing the USB memory, always be sure to turn off the controller
power.

6-14
 6.3 Inserting the USB Memory

Inserting USB memory into the teach pendant (TP External Memory)

During LED of the USB memory has been flashing, please don't remove the
USB memory from the USB port. Data may break.
IMPORTANT

1 Remove the USB cap from the back of the teach pendant.

USB Cap

2 Insert the USB memory.

>> Insert the USB memory in the correct orientation. It cannot be inserted in the wrong
orientation.

3 Perform file copying and other tasks.

4 When the tasks are complete, remove the USB memory.

When the USB memory is removed, firmly close the USB cap on the back of the
teach pendant.

Only connect USB memory to the USB port when operating files. When the TP
external storage memory is not being used, always close the USB cap on the
back of the teach pendant.
Leaving the USB cap open for long periods may hinder the dust protection and
CAUTION waterproofing properties, which may lead to failure.

6-15
6.4 Copying files

6.4 Copying files

When files are copied, files with the same contents can be created in the internal memory or stored in an
external storage device. The files that can be copied are listed below.

• Program file
• Pose file
• Language file
• Constant file
• Log file
• All files (all of the above files)

Opening the copy screen

1 Select “1 File Copy” on the file operation menu, and press [Enter].
>> The [File Copy] screen is now opened.

FDV4.22 and later

2 To copy the files, perform on the above screen.

To move through each field, use the [left or right] keys.
To select the items displayed in the fields, use the [up or down] keys.

6-16
 6.4 Copying files

Specify a file and copy it.

As an example, the steps taken to copy program “1” stored in the internal memory as program
“10” in the internal memory will be described.

1 Select “Memory” at device selection field of the copy source.

2 After moving to the program input field, input “1” and press [Enter].
>> The program “1” in “¥WORK¥PROGRAM" is selected for copying.
For FDV4.22 and later, conduct this operation after procedure ３

When you copy a program by specifying the program number, the program
copied will always be in a folder with the same name as the original folder, no
matter what folder is specified or displayed. In this case, the folder is
POINT “¥WORK¥PROGRAM”.
If there is no folder that has the same name, a new folder is made.
Concerning the details of the file types and the structure of the stored folder,
refer to “6.2.4 Folder structure of internal memory”.

3 Move to the file type selection field, and select “Program”.

FDV4.22 and later

Select “Program No.” at Method.

Select “Program” at “File”.

4 Move to the copy destination device selection field, and select “Memory”.

6-17
6.4 Copying files

5 Move to the program input field, and input “10”.

FDV4.22 and later

If the initial value for the copy location program number is not changed, the
program is copied as number 0. Be careful.

6 Press f12 <Execute>.

>> Copying now starts.

Specifying and copying a multiple number of files

As an example, the steps taken to select a multiple number of programs stored in the internal
memory and copy them onto a USB memory stick will be described.

1 Select “Memory” in the copy source device selection field.

2 Move to the file type selection field, and select “Program”.

6-18
 6.4 Copying files

3 Move to the folder selection field, and select “PROGRAM”.

>> A list of the programs now appears.

Any settings may be used for the program input field and file type selection field.
(The selection made from the file list takes precedence over the program input field
and file type selection field settings.)

FDV4.22 and later

4 Select a file using the up or down key, and press [Enter]. The selected file is
highlighted in blue.
A multiple number of files can be selected by repeating these steps.

FDV4.22 and later

Selected files are colored by green.

To release the selected status, select the file to be released, and press [BS].

5 Move to the copy destination device selection field, and select “RC ExMem1.”

6-19
6.4 Copying files

6 Move to the folder selection field, and select the destination folder.

FDV4.22 and later

7 Press f12 <Execute>.

>> Copying now starts.

Copying all the files

As an example, the steps taken to copy all the programs stored in the Memory onto a USB
memory stick will be described.

1 Select “Memory” in the copy source device selection field.

2 Move to the file type selection field, and select “All programs”.
FDV4.22 and later
Select “File Type” at “Method”.
Select “All programs” at “File”.

3 Move to the copy destination device selection field, and select “RC ExMem1.”

4 Move to the folder selection field, and select the copy destination folder.

5 Press f12 <Execute>.

>> This now completes the copying.

Switching to display list screen

FDV4.22 and later
1 While holding down [Enable] key, press f7 < File directory > at “Copy” screen.
＋ >> [File Directory] screen opens up.

6-20
 6.5 Displaying a list of the files

6.5 Displaying a list of the files

When the display list function is used, what files are stored in the internal memory or external storage device can
be checked.

Displaying a list of the files

1 Select “2 Directory” on the file operation menu, and press [Enter].
>> The [Directory] screen now appears.

2 In the device selection field, select the device whose files are to be listed and
displayed.

3 In the folder selection field, select the folder whose files are to be listed and
displayed.
As an example of a program, select the “PROGRAM” folder.
>> A list of the programs is displayed.

FDV4.22 and later

4 To exit the display list, press [RESET/R].

>> Operation returns to the file operation menu.

6-21
6.5 Displaying a list of the files

Switching to copy screen

FDV4.22 and later
１ Press f9 < File Copy > at “Directory” screen.
>> [File copy] screen will open up.

Switching to file deletion screen

FDV4.22 and later
１ Press f10 <File Delete > at “Directory” screen.
>> [File Delete] screen will open up.

Switching to file protect screen

FDV4.22 and later
１ Press ［Enable］+ f10 < File Protect > at “Directory” screen.
＋ >>［File Protect］screen will open up.

Switching to verify screen

FDV4.22 and later
１ Press ［Enable］+ f10< Verify > at “Directory” screen.
＋ >>［Verify］screen will open up.

Switching to list display screen

FDV4.22 and later
１ Press ［Enable］+ f7< File Directory > at “File Copy” screen.
＋
>>［Directory］screen will open up.

6-22
 6.7 Setting protection for files

6.6 Deleting files

The files stored in the internal memory or external storage device can be deleted.
The files that can be deleted are as follows.

• Program files (deleted individually or altogether)

• Pose files (deleted individually or altogether)
• Language files (deleted individually or altogether)
• Log file (deleted altogether)

Opening the deletion screen

1 Select “3 File delete” on the file operation menu, and press [Enter].
>> The [File delete] screen is now opened.

FDV4.22 and later

2 Files are deleted on this screen.

To move through each field, use the left and right keys.
To select the items displayed in the fields, use the up and down keys.

6-23
6.7 Setting protection for files

Specifying one file and deleting it

As an example, the steps taken to delete program “1” stored in the Memory will be described.

1 In the device selection field, select “Memory”.

2 Move to the file type selection field, and select “Program”.

FDV4.22 and later

Select “Program No” at “Method” field.
Select “Program” at “File” selection field.

3 After moving to the program input field, input “1” and press [Enter].

FDV4.22 and later

4 Press f12 <Execute>.

>> This completes the file deletion.

6-24
 6.7 Setting protection for files

Specifying a multiple number of files and deleting them

As an example, the steps taken to select a multiple number of programs stored in the internal
memory and delete them will be described.

1 In the device selection field, select “Memory”.

2 Move to the file type selection field, and select “Program”.

FDV4.22 and later
Select “File” at “Method”(File selection field).
3 Move to the folder selection field, and select “PROGRAM”.
>> A list of the programs now appears.

Any settings may be used for the program input field and file type selection field.
(The selection made from the file list takes precedence over the program input field
and file type selection field settings.)

FDV4.22 and later

6-25
6.7 Setting protection for files

4 Select a file using the up or down key, and press [Enter]. The selected file is
highlighted in blue.
A multiple number of files can be selected by repeating these steps.

FDV4.22 and later

Selected files are colored with green.

To release the selected status, select the file to be released, and press [BS].

5 Press f12 <Execute>.

>> This completes the file deletion.

Deleting all the files

As an example, the method for deleting all programs saved on the USB memory will be described.

1 In the device selection field, select “RC ExMem1.”

2 Move to the file type selection field, and select “All programs”.

FDV4.22 and later

Select “File Type” at “Method”(file selection field).
Select “All programs” at “File”(file type selection field”.

3 Press f12 <Execute>.

>> This completes the file deletion.

Switching to list display screen

1 Press ［Enable］+ f7< File Directory > at “File Delete” screen.
＋
>>［Directory］screen will open up.

6-26
 6.7 Setting protection for files

6.7 Setting protection for files

Protection settings are used for files in order to prohibit them from being changed or deleted.
There are three types of protection: complete protection, partial protection and playback protection. When these
settings are used, files can no longer be deleted or changed, as shown below.

Table 6.7.1 Protection types and functions

All protect Partial protect
(Either complete or partial protection Playback protect
only can be selected.)
Display mark (highlighting in red) 1 2 P
Modification of position data × ◎ ◎
Modification of all other data × ◎
File Delete × ◎
Playback or check go from step 0 ◎ ×
Playback or check go after step 1
◎ ◎

◎：Possible
×：Cannot be performed (= protected)

・ When opening a program for which protection has been set, the protection status is
displayed.

・ Complete protection (or partial protection) and playback protection can be used
simultaneously.(With a combination of “O” and “×”, “×” takes precedence.)
In this case, The display mark that indicates the protection status of the file is a
combination of the two display marks.
・ For constant files, partial protection has the same significance as complete
protection. Playback protection cannot be set for these files.
・ When files are copied, the protection information is also copied.

6-27
6.7 Setting protection for files

Opening the protection setting screen

1 Select “4 File Protect” on the file operation menu, and press [Enter].
>> The [File Protect] screen is now opened.

FDV4.22 and later

2 The protection is set on this screen.

To move through each field, use the left and right keys.
To select the items displayed in the fields, use the up and down keys.

6-28
 6.7 Setting protection for files

Select a file, and set the type of protection for it.

As an example, the steps taken to set “All protect” for program “1” stored in the internal memory
will be described.

1 In the device selection field, select “Memory”.

2 Move to the protection type field, and select “All protect”.

3 Move to the file type selection field, and select “Program”.

FDV4.22 and later

Select “Program No” at “Method” (file selection field).
Select “Program” at “File” (File type selection field).

4 Move to the program input field, and input [1].

FDV4.22 and later

5 Press f12 <Execute>.

>> The protection setting is now completed.

6-29
6.7 Setting protection for files

Setting protection for all files

As an example, the steps taken to set “All protect” and “Playback protect” for all the programs
stored in the internal memory will be described.

1 In the device selection field, select “Memory”.

2 Move to the protection type field, and select “Playback protect”.

3 Move to the file type selection field, and select “All programs”.

FDV4.22 and later

Select “File Type” at file selection field.
Then, go to “File” (file type selection field) and select “All programs”.

4 Move to the folder selection field, and select “PROGRAM”.

>> A list of the programs now appears.

5 Press f12 <Execute>.

>> This sets “Playback protect” for the files.

“P” appears in the attribute field.

FDV4.22 and later

6 Move to the protection type field, and select “All protect”.

6-30
 6.7 Setting protection for files

7 Press f12 <Execute>.

>> This sets “All protect” for the files.

“1P” appears in the attribute field.

Switching to list display screen

FDV4.22 and later
１ While holding down [Enable] key, press f7 < File Directory > at “File Protect”
＋ screen.
>>［Directory］screen will open up.

6-31
6.8 Verifying files

6.8 Verifying files

This is for verifying whether the contents match between two files or between all the files on different storage
media match.
The files which can be verified are as shown below.

• Program file
• Pose file
• Language file
• Constant file
• Log file
• All files (all of the above files)

Opening the verify screen

1 Select “5 Verify” on the file operation menu, and press [Enter].
>> The [Verify] screen is now opened.

2 Files are verified on this screen.

To move through each field, use the left and right keys.
To select the items displayed in the fields, use the up and down keys.

Specifying a file and verifying it

As an example, the steps taken to verify programs “1” and “2” stored in the Memory will be
described.

1 In the device 1 selection field, select “Memory”.

2 Move to the program input field, and input [1].

FDV4.22 and later

Select “Program No” at “Method”. (file selection field)
Input “1” at “program” input field.
3 Move to the file type selection field, and select “Program”.

4 Move to the device 2 selection field, and set “Memory”.

5 Move to the program input field, and input [2].

6-32
 6.8 Verifying files

6 Press f12 <Execute>.

>> Verifying now starts.

If the contents of the two files are identical, the screen such as the one shown
below appears.

If the contents of the two files are different, the screen such as the one shown
below appears.

If the numbers of movements are the same, the details can be seen.
INFO.
In that case, the screen such as the one shown below appears.

“When “Details” is selected, the different parts are shown as below

To close screen, select “End”.

To close the screen, press [RESET/R].

6-33
6.8 Verifying files

Verifying all files

As an example, the method for verifying whether all of the files saved in the internal memory
correspond with those in the USB memory is described.

1 In the device 1 selection field, select “Memory”.

2 Move to the file type selection field, and select “All files”.

FDV4.22 and later

Select “File Type” at “Method”. (File selection field)
Select “All files” at “File”. (File type selection field)

3 Move to the device 2 selection field, and select “RC ExMem1.”

4 Press f12 <Execute>.

>> Verifying now starts.

Switching to list display screen

FDV4.22 and later
1 While holding down “Enable” key, press f7 < File Directory > at “Verify” screen.
＋ >>［Directory］screen will open up.

6-34
 6.9 Initializing the USB memory

6.9 Initializing the USB memory

To save data onto an external storage device, the USB memory needs to be initialized in advance.
Initialization is only required the first time the USB memory is connected to the controller. (If initialization is
done once, these steps are no longer required).
Also, initialization is performed to erase all of the contents of the media.

• When the USB memory is initialized, all of the data stored on it is

deleted. Be extra careful when initializing the memory.
IMPORTANT • Connect the USB memory to be used to the CPU board in this controller
to initialize it. When initializing USB memories using an external device such
as a personal computer, initialize it to “FAT32” format.
• Do not remove the USB memory, and switch off the power while the
USB memory is initialized.

Initializing the USB Memory

1 Select "6. Format IC card/Floppy disk" on the file operation menu, and press
[Enter].
>> The [Format IC card/Floppy disk] screen now appears.

2 In the device selection field, select the USB memory to be initialized.

3 Press f12 <Execute>.

>> Initializing now starts.

6-35
6.10 Backing up files

6.10 Backing up files

All the files stored in the internal memory can be backed up and saved.
Differences with file copying are as follows.
 There is no need to select which files to copy.
 Important parameters such as option protection information that is not copied when “Specify and copy all files”
are also copied.
Either the internal memory or external storage device may be used as the storage media.
Backup does not include copying the system (operating system and the software itself).

The name of the backup folder is given automatically using the following format.

INFO. NRA2011-2011-11-06-0932
Date Time

The external storage device is recommended for the backup destination device.
POINT
If the backup destination to the internal memory, please make sure you have enough free
space in internal memory
(As estimation: Requires more than 10MB free space after the backup finished.)

Opening the backup screen

1 Select “10 File Backup” on the file operation menu, and press [Enter].
>> The [File Backup] screen is now opened.

2 Files are backed up on the above screen.

To move through each field, use the left and right keys.
To select the items displayed in the fields, use the up and down keys.

6-36
 6.10 Backing up files

Creating folders in the storage media

To back up and store the files of a multiple number of robots in a single storage media, create
folders under the kind of names that will enable the robots to be identified.

1 Press f9 <Make Folder>, and input the folder name.

The soft keyboard starts up. Input the folder name.
For details on how to input text, refer to “2.5 To input characters”.

2 Press f12 <Complete>.

>> A folder is now created in the storage media.

Setting the file verification

For this setting, it is necessary to switch operator class to EXPERT or above.

1 Press f-key <File Verify Setting>.

>> The setting screen shown as below appears.

2 Set the each setting.

3 After completion of the all settings, press f12 <Complete>

>> File verification will be done using the settings on this screen when executing backup
process.

Table 6.10.1 File Verification Settings for Manual Backup

Default
Parameter Input range Description
setting

Enabled / Set the file verification Enabled/Disabled when

Verify Disabled
Disabled executing the backup.
Discontinuance / Select the process to be executed when an error
Abnormal Retry
Retry occurs while the file verification.

6-37
6.10 Backing up files

Backing up the folders

1 In the device selection field, select “RC ExMem1”.

2 Move to the folder selection field, select the backup destination folder, and press
[Enter].

3 Press f12 <Execute>.

>> Backup now starts.

6-38
 6.11 Restoring files from backup

6.11 Restoring files from backup

The steps taken to restore all the files using the stored backup data in order to restore normal operation after
trouble has occurred or on other such occasions will be described.
When restoration has been performed, all the files including the constant files, program files and history files (all
the files in 6.2.4 Folder structure of internal memory) inside the internal memory are destroyed and replaced with
the backup data files.
Restoration should be done by an operator with the qualifications class of EXPERT or above.
For details on switching operator qualifications, refer to the instruction manual "SETUP MANUAL".

1) Do not execute backup restoration so lightly except when upgrading accompanied

with replacement of the system CF or restoring after a trouble occurred.

2) At the shutdown after backup restoration and at the power restoration, the status
restoration processing of the auto resume function (restoration of the manual status,
playback and others) cannot be executed. This is one of the safety measures
against the mismatch in the system configuration before and after the restoration
operation.

After FDV3.22 When you perform restoration of auto resume status during restoring
backup, auto resume status when it was backup is restored.

3) Follow the directions described in the instruction manual for the endless rotation
function to execute the backup restoration operation when the endless rotation
CAUTION function is used.

4) When restoring the backup, it is necessary to change the settings of the system
memory maintenance function. For details, see the “Controller Maintenance” section
of the instruction manual.
5) While the user task is running, backup restoring operation cannot be executed. All
user tasks must be stopped to do backup.
6) In case of using “Overhaul period detect function”, take a note of the value of
all axes “Operating hours until present time” before restoring the backup
data, and input the value after restoration. Please refer to the chapter of
“Robot Diagnosis” of FD CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL “Control and
Maintenance Function” for more detail.

Opening the File Restore screen

1 Select “11 File Restore” on the file operation menu, and press [Enter].
>> The [File Restore] screen now appears.

2 To move through each field, use the [Left/Right] keys.

To select the items displayed in the fields, use the [Up/Down] keys.

6-39
6.11 Restoring files from backup

Setting the file verification

For this setting, it is necessary to switch to operator class EXPERT or above.

1 Press f-key <File Verify Setting>.

>> The setting screen shown as below appears.

2 Set the each setting.

3 After completion of all the settings, press f12 <Complete>.

>> File verification will be done using the settings on this screen when executing
restoring process.

Table 6.11.1 File Verification Settings for Restoring File

Default
Parameter Input range Description
setting

Enabled / Set the file verification Enabled/Disabled when

Verify Disabled
Disabled executing the file restore.
Discontinuance / Select the process to be executed when an error
Abnormal Retry
Retry occurs while the file verification.

6-40
 6.11 Restoring files from backup

Restoring all files from the backup

1 Stop the robot, and set the motor power to OFF.
Backup data cannot be restored while the robot is operating.
Before proceeding, the robot must be stopped and the motor power set to OFF.

2 Select “11 File Restore” on the file operation menu, and press [Enter].
>> The [File Restore] screen now appears.

3 In the device (source) selection field, select the device on which the backup data
to be restored is saved.
For example, if backup data is saved to the USB memory and the USB memory is
inserted in the controller, select “RC ExMem1.”

4 Move to the folder selection field, select the folder containing the backup data to
be restored, and press [Enter].

The folder in which the backup data is stored must have “read-only”
attributes. (Backup folders are automatically given “read-only” attributes
when data is backed up manually or automatically.)
If the USB memory is accessed by a PC or other devices and the attributes
IMPORTANT of the backup folder are changed to an attribute other than “read-only,”
the folder cannot be selected because it is not recognized as a backup
source folder.

5 Press f12 <Execute>.

>> Backup restoration now starts.

6 If a preserve data for the Power Failure detection function is included in the
backup data, the following message will be displayed (FDV3.22 or after).

If “YES” is selected, the preserve data (e.g. Step No, signal conditions, or Variables
etc.) will be restored.

6-41
6.11 Restoring files from backup

If the Preserved data for the Power Failure detection function (Manual
operation status, playback status, etc.) is restored, an error of “E2518” will be
displayed when trying to operate the robot after shutting down and powering ON
CAUTION operation.
This is a sort of safety measurement to avoid unexpected movement of the
robot when the conditions of the robot before and after the restore process are
different.
If the robot posture or the configuration is not the same, it is very dangerous to
move the robot. Therefore, please do not forget to move the robot to the safe
position in advance by e.g. the step selection and the check go operation.

In the following cases, it is not possible to restore the preserved data for the
Power Failure detection function because the backup data does not include the
IMPORTANT preserved data.

1. The backup was executed with the power failure detection function has been
disabled
2. The backup was executed with the FDV3.21 or before.

The following message will be displayed. Press [OK] to continue the restore
operation.

7 The following message is displayed. Press any key to shutdown.

Do not switch off the power during shutdown.

6-42
 6.11 Restoring files from backup

Selecting the restored files from backup

FDV4.15 and later
Please switch operator qualification to EXPERT or above to conduct setting in advance.
Restored files can be selected by following setting.

Table 6.11.2 Selecting the restored files from backup

Parameter Description of function

All (initial setting) All backup files are restored.

Only checked files (marked in check box) are restored from backup.
Selecting items are
・Robot program
・Pose file
・Tool constant
・IO (Input & output signal)
Select ・User coordinate
・Interface panel data
・PLC file
・Field bus setting file
・Other application files
・User definition error
・Robot monitoring unit (including Virtual Safety Fence)
Only checked files (marked in check box) are excepted from restoration.
Selecting items are
・Encoder correction data
・Axis constant
Exclude ・Moving envelope
・Error history
・Overhaul data
・Oscilloscope file
・Robot monitoring unit (including Virtual Safety Fence)

１ In “File Restore” screen, press <Restore All> key.

≫Next screen now appears.

２ Select only one method among“All”、“Select”、“Exclude”.

6-43
6.11 Restoring files from backup

３ In case “Select” method is selected, files to be restored are displayed with

checkbox.

４ Check mark needs to be ON for restored file.

５ After completion of all the settings, press f12 <Complete>.

≫F key <Restore All> in “File Restore”screen now changes to <Select to restore>.

→
≫Restoration procedure is executed under the designated condition.

６ In case “Exclude” method is selected, files to be excepted from restoration are

displayed with checkbox.

７ Check mark needs to be ON for excepted file.

８ After completion of all the settings, press f12 <Complete>.

≫F key <Restore All> in “File Restore”screen now changes to <Exclude to restore>.

→
≫Restoration procedure is executed under the designated condition.

6-44
 6.13 File operations

6.12 Performing automatic backup

This function is used to back up all the files contained in the NRA2011¥WORK folder at the predetermined time,
day of the week and date in order to store a history of the robot’s operation statuses at regular intervals. These
files can also be automatically backed up when the power is turned on or when the mode is switched.
By utilizing this function, the robot’s operation statuses can be accurately recognized so that restoration can be
initiated promptly when trouble has occurred.
An operator must have the qualifications class of EXPERT or above to use this function.
For details on switching operator qualifications, see the instruction manual "SETUP MANUAL".

Automatic backup procedure

1 Select “12 Automatic Backup” on the file operation menu, and press [Enter].
>> The “Automatic Backup” screen is opened.

2 Set the conditions listed on Table 6.12.1, and press f12 <Execute>.
>> Automatic backup starts when the set conditions are met.

Table 6.12.1 Automatic backup settings

Initial
Parameter Input range Description of function
setting
Dev. Internal Internal This is for selecting the media that is to make backup files.
memory memory/ "TP external memory" cannot be used in automatic
RC External backup.
memory 1/
Host 1/
Host 2
Max. backup 0 0 to 10 This is for setting the maximum number of backup folders.
number Up to 10 folders can be created.
Folders are given names as follows on the basis of their
dates and times.
(Folder name) NRA2011-2011-09-26-1834
If automatic backup is performed when the maximum
number of backup folders already exists, the oldest
backup folders will be deleted.
Verify Enable Enable/Disable This is for setting the file verification systems when backup
files are created.
Abnormal Disconti Discontinuance/ This is for setting the processes to be done when
nuance Retry abnormality has occurred during file verification.
Power on Disable Enable/Disable This is for setting whether automatic backup is to be
performed when the control power is turned on.

6-45
6.13 Restricting file copy

Initial
Parameter Input range Description of function
setting
Mode change Disable Enable/Disable This is for setting whether automatic backup is to be
performed when the mode has been switched (from
teaching to playback or vice versa).
Frequency Disable Disable/ This is for setting the automatic backup frequency.
Every day/
Every week/
Every month
Day Sunday Monday - This is for setting the day of the week on which the data is
Sunday to be backed up when “Every week” has been selected as
the backup frequency.
Date 1 1 to 31 This is for setting the day of the month on which the data is
to be backed up when “Every month” has been selected as
the backup frequency.
If 29, 30 or 31 has been set as the day of the month but the
day concerned does not exist, backup will be performed at
the end of the month.
Time 00:00 00:00 to 24:00 This is for setting the time at which the data is to be
backed up when “Every month,” “Every week” or “Every
day” has been selected as the backup frequency.
Automatic backup is not performed when 00:00 has been
set as the time. To start backup at 00:00 AM, set “24:00.”

If the “Dev.” is set to “Host 1” or “Host 2”, the backup folder is generated on the
INFO. FTP server that is set in the FTP client function. In this case, the backup folder in
generated on the initial folder that is set in the FTP client function. For the details
of the FTP client function, refer to the instruction manual of “Ethernet function”.

Displays during automatic backup

Automatic backup is commenced when the backup execution conditions which were set on the
“Automatic backup” menu are met.
When automatic backup is started, an icon is displayed in the variable status display area.
The progress status shown as “##%”, during automatic backup.
Once the automatic backup is completed, the icon disappears.

If the destination device is set to "Host 1" or "Host 2", the attribute of the backup
folder that will be created on the FTP server is not "Read Only". And, the
attribute of the initial folder on the FTP server is "Read Only"; the backup folder
IMPORTANT cannot be created. Therefore, remove the "Read Only" attribute from the initial
folder on the FTP server in advance.

6-46
 6.13 Restricting file copy

6.13 Restricting file copy

FDV4.22 and later
This function is to restrict the file copy to the external media.
Please switch operator qualification to EXPERT or above to conduct setting in advance.
Refer to Instruction manual “Set up” for the procedure of switching operator.

Setting the restriction of file copy

１ Select [14. File copy restriction], and press［Enter］ key at file operation menu.
>> [File copy restriction] screen opens up.

２ Set the restriction of file copy, and press f12 < Complete >.
>> Restriction of file copy is set.
In case that restriction of file copy is set as “Limited”, then operation function of file will
be restricted as Table 6.13.1.

Table 6.13.1 Contents of copy restriction of file

Function Restricted contents
Copy Selection field of the device (Destination) will be only “Memory”.,
Selection can be made only at “Memory” as copy destination.
File transfer
Ether-net FTP F8< > does not displayed on the screen, therefore it becomes impossible to

transfer files from controller to external.

Backup Selection field of the device (Destination) will be only “Memory”.

Selection can be made only at “Memory” as backup destination.

6-47
6.13 Restricting file copy

Note

6-48
Chapter 7 Useful functions

Some useful functions which are frequently used are described in this section.

7.1 Using short-cuts..........................................................................................7-1

7.2 Monitoring various information of the robot.................................................7-2
7.2.1 Starting a multiple number of monitors..................................................7-2
7.2.2 Switching and closing the monitors.......................................................7-4
7.2.3 Operating the Use Inputs and Outputs monitors ...................................7-5
7.3 Setting the output signals ON or OFF manually..........................................7-6
7.4 Using help for information on functions.......................................................7-7
7.4.1 Calling the help top page ......................................................................7-7
7.4.2 Directly calling a function to be checked out .........................................7-9
7.4.3 Searches using keywords ................................................................... 7-11
7.5 Displaying T/P Key Help ...........................................................................7-13
7.5.1 Displaying the T/P Key Help ...............................................................7-13
7.5.2 Operating T/P Key Help ......................................................................7-14
7.6 Managing programs in folders ..................................................................7-16
7.6.1 Setting displaying the Folder list .........................................................7-16
7.6.2 Creating, deleting and renaming folders .............................................7-18
7.6.3 Assign the stored folder inside programs ............................................7-20
7.6.4 Copying and transferring programs within folders...............................7-21
7.7 Customizing the Hard Keys ......................................................................7-22
7.8 Customizing the “Softkey”.........................................................................7-24
7.8.1 Changing the Softkey Allocation .........................................................7-25
7.8.2 Changing the Maximum Number of Pages for Softkey .......................7-37
7.8.3 Setting the Softkey Condition Enable/Disable.....................................7-38
7.8.4 Saving the Softkey Settings ................................................................7-39
7.8.5 Loading Softkey Settings from the File................................................7-41
7.9 Selecting the Program Number from the Program List .............................7-42
7.9.1 Selecting the Program Number from the Program List .......................7-42
7.9.2 Displaying Programs for Each Unit .....................................................7-44
7.9.3 Checking Program Contents ...............................................................7-45
7.10 Editing Step Comments ..........................................................................7-46
7.10.1 Inputting step comments ...................................................................7-46
7.11 Displaying Language Switching Function................................................7-48
7.12 Selecting a Function Command Step and Operating ..............................7-49
7.12.1 Selecting the playback operation from the function command ..........7-49
7.12.2 Skipping the Step Selected Function Command and Operating .......7-50
7.12.3 Performing Check Go Operation from the Step Selected Function
Command ....................................................................................................7-51
This is dummy page. DO NOT ERASE.

7.12.4 Performing Playback Operation from the Step Selected Function

Command ....................................................................................................7-52
7.13 Estimated power consumption monitor...................................................7-53
7.13.1 Estimated power consumption monitor .............................................7-53
7.13.2 How to initialize the value..................................................................7-54
7.13.3 Cable length setting ..........................................................................7-55
7.14 Input robot language for the function parameter .....................................7-56
7.14.1 How to input the robot language style parameter..............................7-56
7.15 Banning the operation by locking TP ......................................................7-58
7.15.1 Locking of R316 TP...........................................................................7-58
7.15.2 Password change for locking R317 TP .............................................7-58
 7.1 Using short-cuts

7.1 Using short-cuts

The controller comes with a short-cut function for selecting functions quickly.
Normally, even with operations where one menu is opened from another, a target operation can be quickly
accessed simply by inputting a short-cut code (a number with up to 3 digits). It is a good idea to learn frequently
used short-cut codes to memory.

For details on the short-cut codes that can be used, refer to the Help function contained in the robot controller.

Using short-cuts
1 On the teach or playback mode top screen, press the [RESET/R] key.
>> The [Shortcut R code Entry] screen now appears.

2 If the number of the target function is not known, press the [up or down] key.
>> The list of codes in the center of the screen is scrolled, and the usable short-cut
codes (R codes) are displayed.

3 Align the cursor with the desired short-cut code, and press the [Enter] key.
If the number is already known, input the code number directly into the edit box
at the bottom of the screen, and press the [Enter] key.

4 This completes the selection procedure.

The short-cut which has been input is now executed.
If, for instance, R17 (display program file list) has been input, a list of the programs of
the current unit picked out from among the files stored in the internal memory is
displayed.

7-1
7.2 Monitoring various information of the robot

7.2 Monitoring various information of the robot

With this controller, various information from the robot can be monitored and displayed on the teach pendant.
Monitors 1 to 4 (maximum of 4) can be started and their information can be displayed simultaneously on the
teach pendant. The program display screen is one of these monitors, and this is set at the factory as monitor 1.

The monitor updating cycle is approximately 100 [msec].

The next screen shows an example where all four monitors were started simultaneously. Programs are
monitored on monitor 1, general-purpose input signals are monitored on monitor 2, general-purpose output
signals are monitored on monitor 3, and errors are monitored on monitor 4.

7.2.1 Starting a multiple number of monitors

As an example, the steps taken to allocate the display of the general-purpose input signals to
monitor 2 and the display of the general-purpose output signals to monitor 3 will be described.

Starting a multiple number of monitors

1 The signals can easily be displayed on monitor 2 by operating an f key.
Press <Monitor 2>.
>> The monitor 2 setting screen now appears.

7-2
 7.2 Monitoring various information of the robot

2 Align the cursor with “7 User Inputs”, and press [Enter].

>> Monitor 2 now starts.

3 Monitor 3 is set from the service menu. Press <Service Utilities>.

(All four monitors 1 to 4 can be set from the service menu.)
>> The service screen now appears.

4 Select “5 Monitor 3”, and press [Enter].

>> The monitor 3 setting screen now appears.

5 Align the cursor with “8 User Outputs”, and press [Enter].

>> Monitor 3 now starts.

7-3
7.2 Monitoring various information of the robot

7.2.2 Switching and closing the monitors

Any one of a multiple number of monitors started can be selected to be operated or closed.

Switching and closing the monitors

1 To select a monitor to be operated from among a multiple number of monitors,
press [CLOSE/SELECT SCREEN].
>> Each time [CLOSE/SELECT SCREEN] is pressed; the monitor which can be
operated is switched.
The monitor which can be operated has a deep blue title bar.
Monitors that cannot be operated have light blue title bars.

In the case of the screen shown below, monitor 1 can be operated.

When deep blue:

The monitor can be operated.

When light blue:

The monitor cannot be operated.
(The information is updated.)

2 To close a monitor, select the monitor to be closed, and while holding down
＋ [ENABLE], press [CLOSE/SELECT SCREEN].
>> The monitor now selected is closed.

7-4
 7.2 Monitoring various information of the robot

7.2.3 Operating the Use Inputs and Outputs monitors

When a general-purpose input or output monitor is started, the ON/OFF statuses of the
general-purpose signal attributes can be viewed.

Using the general-purpose output monitor as an example, how to read the information and
perform the operations on the monitor screen will be described below.

Operating the User Inputs and Outputs monitors

1 By performing the steps on page 7-2, select “8 User Outputs”.
>> The statuses of general-purpose output signals 0001 to 2048 are now displayed.

Cursor When the cursor is

aligned here, a
description of the signal
is displayed.

A yellow background The bold and italic numbers

signifies “ON” whereas a signify the robot status signals.
gray background signifies The other numbers signify the
“OFF”. general-purpose signals.

2 There is a limit on the number of signals which can be displayed on one screen.
To view the statuses of other signals, move the cursor using the up and down
keys.
＋ When the up or down key is pressed while holding down [ENABLE], one page of
information can be scrolled on the screen.

3 Output signals can be turned on and off manually with the general-purpose
output monitor. (You cannot turn input signals on and off with the
generalpurpose input monitor.)

To set the signal to ON, press [1] while holding down [ENABLE] (or press
＋ [Enter]).
>> The specified signal is now set to ON.

To set the signal to OFF, press [2] while holding down [ENABLE].
＋ >> The specified signal is now set to OFF.

7-5
7.3 Setting the output signals ON or OFF manually

7.3 Setting the output signals ON or OFF manually

The output signals can be set to ON or OFF manually. (Each signal to be set to ON or OFF is specified using an
output signal number.)
This function can be used in the teach mode or playback mode (step by step).

Setting the output signals to ON or OFF manually

1 While holding down [ENABLE], press [OUT].
＋ >> The [Manual output signal] screen now appears.

2 Input the output signal number.

3 To set the signal to ON, press [1] while holding down [ENABLE] (or press
＋ [Enter]).
>> The specified signal is now set to ON.
or

To set the signal to OFF, press [2] while holding down [ENABLE].
＋ >> The specified signal is now set to OFF.

7-6
 7.4 Using help for information on functions

7.4 Using help for information on functions

This controller comes with a help function (built-in tutorial function).

For information on functions to be known or to be checked out, press [HELP]. The help function can be called
not only during teaching but also during playback.

7.4.1 Calling the help top page

The best way to browse carefully through the help information from the beginning is to call the top
page.
In order to call the top page, make sure that none of the functions has been selected, and press
the [HELP] key.

Calling the help top page

1 While making sure that none of the functions has been selected, press the
[HELP] key.
>> The help top page now appears.

This is the table of contents for help

● Select the desired item using [Up/Down], and press
[Enter].
● The information for the selected item appears in the
window on the right.
● If the contents window is partially covered, press
[Left/Right].

The current mode,

program number
and step number
are displayed here.

This is the help text.

● Once the item in the table of contents has
been selected, press [CLOSE/Select screen] to
set the window to active.
● The window can be scrolled using [Up/Down].
● Pages can be scrolled using [ENABLE] and
[Up/Down].

7-7
7.4 Using help for information on functions

2 Select the item to be viewed using the [Up/Down] key, and press [Enter].
>> The selected item now appears on the right.
For instance, select “Frequently used terms” under Basic Operations Manual to
obtain the following.

3 To manipulate the window showing the text information, press [CLOSE/

Select screen].
>> The text window is set to active.
To return to the table of contents window, press [CLOSE/Select screen] again

4 To scroll up or down, press [Up/Down].

The text can be scrolled quickly by press [Up/Down] together with [ENABLE].
or

5 To close help, either press [RESET/R] or press [ENABLE] and [CLOSE/Select

screen].
or

7-8
 7.4 Using help for information on functions

7.4.2 Directly calling a function to be checked out

For information on the constants menu, service menu, function commands or shortcuts, select the
menu, and then press the [HELP] key. The help text concerned is displayed straight away.

Directly calling a function to be checked out

1 Align the cursor bar with the menu.

When the constants menu or service menu has been selected

Align the cursor bar with the menu to be checked out. (The screen shown appears
when the service menu is selected.)

When a function command has been selected

First press [FN] on the top screen of the teach/playback mode, and then align the
cursor bar with the function command which is to be checked out.

7-9
7.4 Using help for information on functions

When a shortcut has been selected

First press [RESET/R] on the top screen of the teach/playback mode, and then
align the cursor bar with the function command which is to be checked out.

2 Press [HELP].
>> The help information on the selected menu item appears on the right.
For instance, when [HELP] is pressed with the “FN21: Step call” function command
selected, the help information on the step call command (FN21) is displayed.

3 To close help, either press [RESET/R] or press [ENABLE] and [CLOSE/Select

screen].
or

7-10
 7.4 Using help for information on functions

7.4.3 Searches using keywords

Help information can also be searched using the index prepared in advance or any keyword.

Searching using a keyword

1 Press [HELP].
>> This calls help.

2 While holding down [ENABLE], press [Right], and select the “Index” tab.
＋ >> The index tab appears.

3 In the Index tab, select the term using [Up/Down] and press [Enter].
>> The help information contained the selected word now appears

When inputting a keyword (term) to initiate a search, press [EDIT] in the “Type in the
keyword to find:” field. A soft keyboard appears so that the desired keyword can now
be input using its keys.
If, however, the input keyword is not included in the index, the search will not be
successful. Searches can be conducted only using the keywords which have been
registered in the index.

Take the following steps to search for all the help information using a particular
keyword.

4 While holding down [ENABLE], press [Right], and select the “Search” tab.
＋ >> The search tab appears.

7-11
7.4 Using help for information on functions

5 Align the cursor with the “Type in the keyword to find:” field, and press
[EDIT].
>> The soft keyboard now appears.

6 Use the keys on the soft keyboard to input the desired keyword, and press
f12 <Complete>.
>> The help topics containing the keyword are now displayed.

7 While holding down [ENABLE], press [Up/Down], and move to the “Select
＋ Topic to display:” field.
>> Check that the blue cursor bar is displayed.

8 Select the help topic to be displayed using [Up/Down], and press [Enter].
>> The help is now displayed.

7-12
 7.5 Displaying T/P Key Help

7.5 Displaying T/P Key Help

The name, position, and design of each operating key on the monitor screen can be checked. By displaying "68
T/P Key Help” on the monitor screen, the content can be checked when using either the teach mode or playback
mode.

7.5.1 Displaying the T/P Key Help

Display the T/P key help on the monitor screen.

Selecting from the monitor menu

1 Press <Monitor 2>
>> A list of monitor functions that can be displayed is shown.

2 Select “68 T/P Key help,” and press [Enter]. Alternatively, enter the numbers [6]
[8] directly into the edit box at the bottom, and press [Enter].
>> The T/P key help is displayed on the monitor screen.

Selecting from the shortcut function

1 Press the [RESET/R] key in the top screen of Teach/Playback mode.
>> The “Shortcut R Code Entry” screen is displayed.

2 Select "T/P Key help” with the [Up/Down] keys, and press the [Enter] key.
Alternatively, enter the number [9] directly into the edit box at the bottom, and
press the [Enter] key.

7-13
7.5 Displaying T/P Key Help

7.5.2 Operating T/P Key Help

This section explains the operations of the T/P key help. The structure of the T/P key help screen
is as shown below. Here, T/P key help is displayed in monitor 2.

２
１

1 Operation key list

Displays a list of operation keys. Selected operation keys are reverse highlighted
in blue.
2 Operation key arrangement
Displays the arrangement of the operation keys. Selected operation keys are
encircled by a blue line.
3 Key names
Displays the key name of the operation key selected in the operation key list or
operation key arrangement.

Searching for the operation key position and design from the name
Perform the following operations to search for the position and design of an operation key from
the name of the operation key.

1 Press the [Up/Down] key, and select the name of the operation key that you want
to search for from the “Operation Key List” on the left side of the monitor.
Alternatively, touch the key name in the “Operation Key List.”
>> The selected operation key is displayed in the “Operation Key Arrangement” on the
right of the monitor with a blue border.

7-14
 7.5 Displaying T/P Key Help

Searching for the operation key name from the position or design
Select the key name from the operation key arrangement.

1 Use [ENABLE] + cursor keys to scroll up, down, left, and right the "Operation
Key Arrangement” on the right side of the monitor screen, and display the
operation key that you want to research.
＋
>> The “Operation Key Arrangement” is scrolled up, down, left and right.

Use [ENABLE] + [Up/Down] to scroll vertically, and [ENABLE] + [Left/Right]

to scroll horizontally.

2 Touch the operation key that you want to research from the “Operation Key
Arrangement” on the right side of the monitor screen.
>> The name of the touched operation key is displayed in "Key Name” at the top of the
monitor screen.
Also, the same name also becomes selected in the “Operation Key List” on the left
of the monitor screen.

Moving the display area

When multiple monitors are running, part of the T/P key help screen may be hidden. In this
situation, the following operations can be used to display the hidden parts of the display area.

1 Press the [Left/Right] keys to scroll the T/P key help screen itself horizontally.

For example, if the “Operation Key Arrangement” is hidden press [Right], or if

the “Operation Key List” is hidden press [Left] to scroll the monitor screen itself.

INFO. If this operation is performed when no parts are hidden, the screen does not
scroll.

7-15
7.6 Managing programs in folders

7.6 Managing programs in folders

This controller comes with a function that manages programs in folders .
When there are many programs, you can create folders according to use and store organized related
programs in folder, which is useful to find out the programs easily.
The programs which are stored in folders can perform playback operation and teach modification.

When managing the programs in folders, there are constraints as following.

• The folders which can manage programs, which is a hierarchical folder of less than (5.5)
that is in PROGRAM folder of a memory (fig 6.2.2).
IMPORTANT • Programs that have the same program number cannot be stored in multiple folders.
• The programs stored in except these folders cannot be performed playback operation
and teach modification.

7.6.1 Setting displaying the Folder list

To manage the programs in folders are necessary setting as follows. This setting should be
done by an operator with the qualifications class of EXPERT or above.

Setting displaying the Folder list

1 Press f5<Constant setting>. Select [5 Operation Constants] - [10 Program folder
making] in the constant menu.
>> Next screen appears.

2 Align the cursor with “Program folder making” and holding down [ENABLE]
＋
and press [] to switch into “Enabled”.

3 After switching “Enabled”, press f12<Complete>.

>> The screen which is noticed the setting completion appears.

Press [Enter] or [RESET/R] to be completed the screen

or

7-16
 7.6 Managing programs in folders

Program numbers cannot be overlapped.

If program numbers are overlapped, the following screen is displayed, and “Make
IMPORTANT program folder” cannot be enabled.
In this case, the overlapped programs are displayed. Therefore delete these any of
programs or change the program number.

Overlapped program

4 Press [RESET/R] to return the former screen 1.

5 Holding down [ENABLE] and press [PROG/STEP].

＋
>> [Program Selection] screen appears.

6 Holding down [ENABLE] and press [].

＋
>> "Folder list "switches into “Display”.

7 When displaying a list of the folders align the cursor with “Directory” and press
[Enter].
>> The programs which have done to create are displayed.
You can confirm the stored programs in every folder.

7-17
7.6 Managing programs in folders

7.6.2 Creating, deleting and renaming folders

You can create the folders to be stored the programs, delete and rename the folders.

Creating folders
As an example, the procedures of creating a new folder below the PROGRAM folder are as
follows.

1 Holding down [ENABLE], press [PROG/STEP].

＋
>> The program selection screen will open.

2 Align the cursor to “Copy” and press [Enter].

>> The program copy screen will appear.

3 After the PROGRAM folder has been selected, press f8 <Make Folder>.
>> The soft keyboard appears and entering characters will become possible.

4 By using the soft keyboard, name the folder and press f12<Complete>.
In this section, the created folder has been named ”Folder01”.
>> The new folder will appear below the PROGRAM folder.

Created folder

Refer to Chapter 2 “2.5 To input characters” for the procedures of entering characters.

7-18
 7.6 Managing programs in folders

Renaming folders
As an example, the procedures of renaming a new folder below the PROGRAM folder are as
follows.

1 Holding down [ENABLE], press [PROG/STEP].

＋ >> ［Program Selection］screen appears.

2 Align cursor to “Rename” and press [Enter].

>> “Program number conversion” screen will appear.

3 After selecting the folder that is to be changed, press f8<Folder change>.

In this section, the selected folder is ”Folder01”.
>> The soft keyboard appears and entering characters will become possible.

4 Using the soft keyboard, enter the name of the folder that is to be changed and
press f12<Complete>.
In this section, the name entered for the folder is ”Folder01”.
>> The name of the selected folder changes.

Renamed folder

Refer to Chapter 2 “2.5 To input characters” for the procedures of entering characters.

Deleting folders
As an example, the procedures of deleting the folder listed below the PROGRAM folder will be
described.

1 Holding down [ENABLE], press [PROG/STEP].

＋ >> “Program selection “screen appears.

2 Align cursor to “Delete” and press [Enter].

>> ”Program deletion” screen appears.

3 After selecting the folder that is to be deleted, press f8<Folder deletion>.

In this section, the selected folder is “Folder01”.
>> Confirmation screen appears.

4 Select “OK” and press [Enter].

>> The selected folder and the programs stored inside it will be deleted.

7-19
7.6 Managing programs in folders

7.6.3 Assign the stored folder inside programs

When a newly teaching, the stored folder inside programs that will be created is assigned

Assign the stored folder inside programs

1 Select the Teach mode.

2 Holding down [ENABLE], press [PROG/STEP].

＋
>> ”Program selection screen “appears.

Input a 3 Input the newly program number into “Designated program”, and press [Enter].
newly >> ”Folder list display” appears.
number

Input
an When inputting an existing number and press [Enter], the assigned program is
existing opened directly. “Folder list display” does not appear.
number
4 When displaying an underneath folder, select ＋ folder and press [Enter].
>> The underneath folder which is selected in folder is developed.
The selected folder ＋ display is turning into －.

5 When an underneath folder makes no display, select － folder and press

[Enter].
>> The underneath folder which is selected is stored.
The selected folder － display is turning into ＋.

6 After select the stored folder, press f12<Execute>.

>> The program is created on the selected folder.

INFO. When you do not know an empty number.

When you do not know an empty number, once try to switch the Folder list
display “Hide” on the program selection screen.
After switching, check the programs already created by listing them on the
display.
Refer to Chapter 4 “4.2.2 Listing the programs on the display.”

7-20
 7.6 Managing programs in folders

7.6.4 Copying and transferring programs within folders

The programs can be copied and transferred into other folders. These functions are useful
when organizing the programs in the stored folders.

Copying and transferring programs within folders

The copied programs can be copied the selected programs into the assigned folders. Also the
transferred programs can be transferred into the assigned folders with the same procedure as
copying. How to transfer the programs are described here.

1 Holding down [ENABLE] and press [PROG/STEP].

＋
>> The “program number conversion” screen appears.

2 Align the cursor with “Rename” and press [Enter].

>> The “Program number conversion” screen appears.

3 When displaying an underneath folder, select ＋ folder and press [Enter].

>> The underneath folder which is selected in folder is developed.
The selected folder ＋ display is turning into －.

4 When an underneath folder makes no display, select － folder and press

[Enter].
>> The underneath folder which is selected is stored.
The selected folder － display is turning into ＋.

5 Select the transferred source folder.

>> The selected folder is highlighted in blue.

6 The transferred target program is selected.

>> The selected folder is highlighted in blue.

7 Press [Enter].
>> The transferred target program number can be input.

8 The transferred target folder can be selected.

>> The selected folder is highlighted in blue.

9 Input the transferred target program number and press [Enter].

Input
>> The programs are transferred and then put back the original screen.
number

7-21
7.7 Customizing the Hard Keys

7.7 Customizing the Hard Keys

In order to simplify the teaching operation of programs, the function commands of each application or movement
command can be taught by holding down the [ENABLE] key and pressing a number key (4~9).
When this operating method is enabled, the initial values of the operations allocated to [ENABLE] + number keys
(4~9) are shown in Table 7.7.1.

Table 7.7.1 Operation allocation to number keys (4~9)

Called Functions
Operation Key Changing
Other than Left Allocation
Arc Welding Use
Column

Function Group “Arc Weld”

Function Group “Weaving” Not allocated changeable

Function Group “Arc Sensor”

and “Laser Sensor”

[ENABLE] + Joint interpolation (JOINT) movement command

Linear interpolation (LIN) movement command Impossible

Circular interpolation (CIR) movement command

END Command Impossible

An operator qualification of EXPERT or higher is required to change hard key usage settings.
Operator qualifications below EXPERT cannot be used to change the settings, but can be used to search setting
contents.

Customizing the Hard Keys

1 Press [Constant Setting] - [7f-Keys] - [8 HARD KEY].
>> The hard key usage selection screen is displayed.

The items below “The instruction method of the movement order” are only displayed
when “Enable” is selected for “The use of the hard key.”

7-22
 7.7 Customizing the Hard Keys

2 Align the cursor to “The use of the hard key” or “The instruction method of the
＋ movement order,” then hold [ENABLE] and press [Left/Right].
When “Enable” is selected for hard key use, select one of the teach methods for the
movement command.

To only set the number keys for 7~9, press f12 <Complete> here.

3 Align the cursor with each key (4~6) of “Hard key assignment.”
>> The screen is as shown below.

4 When f7 <List> is pressed, the function group list is displayed.

>> The screen is as shown below.

5 Select the function group to be allocated using [Up/Down], and press [Enter].

6 After configuring all of the conditions, press f12 <Complete>.

>> The hard key usage settings are recorded.

7-23
7.8 Customizing the “Softkey

7.8 Customizing the “Softkey”

There are 12 f key (f1~f12) display areas on both sides of the teach pendant display screen. As various
functions can be allocated for these f-keys, we call each of them a “softkey”. It is available to set up the softkey
respectively for Teach mode and Playback mode. Usually, the most suitable function for each application is
allocated by default.

f1 f7

f2 f8

f3 f9

f4 f10

f5 f11

f6 f12

There are two ways for the softkey allocation both on the front and the back, which the front allows to operate
only by the softkey while the back, using both [Enable] key and f-key by pressing at the same time. However,
you will sometimes find it only allowed on the back depending on the function of that key.

Front Back
← By pressing [Enable], the key changes to a
mesh display.

← An icon with a mesh display can be

selected by pressing [ENABLE].

When [ENABLE]
is pressed, the
display changes.

← Some icons are displayed only after

[ENABLE] is pressed.

Also, it is available to set [Disable] on the softkey operation to make it disable the “Back” allocation. 7.8.3
Setting the Softkey Condition Enable/Disable

Types of softkey
Two types are available; Function and Operation switch.
INFO.
Function Functions such as various settings, R-code, Function
commands are allocated.
Operation This key allows to display and operate the lamp,
switch switches, and status of signals.

7-24
 7.8 Customizing the “Softkey

7.8.1 Changing the Softkey Allocation

For the softkey setting, select the icon from the list for each corresponding function, and
allocate it for each softkey.

Changing the Function key

1 Press f5<Constant setting> and select [7. f-Keys].

Choose either [2. Softkeys in Teach mode] or [3. Softkeys in Playback mode]
depending on the mode to set up the softkey.
* Currently, [4.Softkeys in High Speed Teach mode] is not available.

>> Next screen appears.

If you already know the code number of function, enter the number directly in the code
field.
2 If you are not sure about the code number, select the softkey to be set using
[UP/DOWN] key, and press f8<Code List>.
>> Next screen appears.

Select the function by [UP/DOWN] key, and confirm by pressing [Enter] key.

7-25
7.8 Customizing the “Softkey

3 On completion of the code setting, press f12<Complete>.

>> Then, the softkey setting is saved.

4 Now, the softkey is set as shown below.

INFO. Setting the operation switch is also available in the same way.
Setting the Operation switch

7-26
 7.8 Customizing the “Softkey

Table 7.8.1 List of softkey functions

Teach

Teach
back

back
Play

Play
Code Function Name Icon Code Function Name Icon

Start Laser Sensor

0 No Function ○ ○ 490 ○ ○
Tracking

1 Transparent ○ ○ 491 End Point Detecting ○ ○

End Laser Sensor

2 Net ○ ○ 492 ○ ○
Tracking

Groove point
3 Set Constant ◎ ○ 495 ○ ○
Detecting

Base plane of
4 Service ◎ ◎ 725 ○ ○
aiming angle base

Ref point of aiming

408 Spray Start ○ ○ 726 ○ ○
angle base

409 Spray End ○ ○ 1005 Select Starting ○ ○

414 Arc Start ○ ○ 1006 Select Program ○ ○

415 Arc End ○ ○ 1029 Select tool No. ○ ○

440 Weave Start ○ ○ 1245 Monitor1 ○ ○

443 Weave End ○ ○ 1246 Monitor2 ○ ○

470 Wire Extension ○ ○ 1247 Monitor3 ○ ○

One Direction
471 ○ ○ 1248 Monitor4 ○ ○
Search

473 Deviation call ○ ○ 1288 Wrist posture limit ○ ○

474 Dev Composition ○ ○ 1295 Connect Mec △ ×

479 Gap file generation ○ ○ 1296 Change Mec △ ×

One Direction
480 ○ ○ 1315 Select Spot ○ ○
search (Laser)
Groove Detection
483 ○ ○ 1320 Step Go/Back ○ ○
Search

487 Laser Sensor ON ○ ○ 1334 Record the spot ○ ○

488 Laser Sensor OFF ○ ○ 1400 Oscillo Scope ○ ○

Start point
489 ○ ○ 1503 Log In ○ ○
Detecting

7-27
7.8 Customizing the “Softkey

Teach

Teach
back

back
Play

Play
Code Function Name Icon Code Function Name Icon

2000 Drive Mode ○ ○ 2069 Step by Step ○ ○

2001 Cancel I-Wait △ △ 2070 Arc Weld ON ○ ○

2002 Cancel WI △ △ 2071 Weaving ON ○ ○

2003 High Override ○ △ 2072 External Signal ON ○ ○

2004 Select Step By Step ○ ○ 2073 Sensor ON ○ ○

2007 Use the file ○ ○ 2080 Change Stroke ○ ○

2011 Accuracy ○ ○ 2081 Spot Condition ○ ○

Continue/pause
2012 ○ ○ 2082 Spot Constant ○ ×
select

2013 Accel ○ ○ 2084 Manual Pressure ○ ○

2014 Smooth ○ ○ 2085 Status Monitor ○ ○

Speed Mechanism
2015 ○ ○ 2086 Spot Weld. Cond. ○ ○
Change
Conveyor status
2016 ○ ○ 2087 Station Monitor ○ ○
ON/OFF
Conveyor mode
2017 ○ ○ 2088 Manual welding ○ ○
change

Panel rigid type

2018 Fine motion select ○ ○ 2089 ○ ○
select

2053 Weld ON/OFF ○ ○ 2090 Change Stroke 1 ○ ○

2054 Spot Monitor ○ ○ 2091 Change Stroke 2 ○ ○

2058 Gun Status ○ ○ 2092 Change Stroke 3 ○ ○

2064 Station start setting ○ ○ 2093 Change Stroke 4 ○ ○

2065 Ret Condition ○ ○ 2094 Change Stroke 5 ○ ○

2066 Play condition ○ ○ 2095 Change Stroke 6 ○ ○

2067 Select Stroke ○ ○ 2096 Manual Pressure 1 ○ ○

Select starting and

2068 ○ ○ 2097 Manual Pressure 2 ○ ○
program

7-28
 7.8 Customizing the “Softkey

Teach

Teach
back

back
Play

Play
Code Function Name Icon Code Function Name Icon

Seam manu.
2098 Manual Pressure 3 ○ ○ 2160 △ △
rotation

2099 Manual Pressure 4 ○ ○ 2161 Seam manu. rot. sel. ○ ○

2100 Manual Pressure 5 ○ ○ 2162 Seam manu. rot. Dir. ○ ○

2101 Manual Pressure 6 ○ ○ 2163 Seam manu. weld △ △

2102 Manual welding 1 ○ ○ 2200 Select arc welder ○ ○

2103 Manual welding 2 ○ ○ 2201 Select Manipulator ○ ○

Inching
2104 Manual welding 3 ○ ○ 2202 ○ ○
(Low speed)
Retract
2105 Manual welding 4 ○ ○ 2203 ○ ○
(Low speed)
Inching
2106 Manual welding 5 ○ ○ 2204 ○ ○
(High speed)

Retract
2107 Manual welding 6 ○ ○ 2205 ○ ○
(High speed)

2108 Manual Cond Out 1 ○ ○ 2206 Check gas ○ ○

2109 Manual Cond Out 2 ○ ○ 2207 Arc Constant ○ ○

2110 Manual Cond Out 3 ○ ○ 2208 Arc Condition ○ ○

2111 Manual Cond Out 4 ○ ○ 2209 Arc Monitor ○ ○

2112 Manual Cond Out 5 ○ ○ 2210 AS Monitor ○ ○

Restart method in
2113 Manual Cond Out 6 ○ ○ 2211 ○ ○
Play mode

Recover to stopped
2114 Stop Playback ○ ○ 2212 ○ ○
position

Recover pos. after

2115 Weld schedule ○ ○ 2213 ○ ○
step set

2116 Adjust position ○ ○ 2214 Select sensor ○ ○

2120 Manual Speed INC. ○ ○ 2215 Trial Operation ○ ○

2121 Manual Speed DEC. ○ ○ 2216 Manual Laser ○ ○

2150 Vision mode switch ○ ○ 2217 Check Welding ○ ×

7-29
7.8 Customizing the “Softkey

Teach

Teach
back

back
Play

Play
Code Function Name Icon Code Function Name Icon

2218 SF2/ZF2 Check-Go ○ × 2401 Sealing flow △ △

2219 Robot RS ON/OFF ○ ○ 2402 Sealing reload △ △

2220 APCS Adjust ○ ○ 2500 Int. play start × △

MOVEX Record
2221 ○ ○ 2510 XYZ shift ○ ○
(Robot language)

Wrist Rotate
2222 Pilot arc ON/OFF ○ ○ 2511 ○ ○
Change

2223 Purge ON/OFF ○ ○ 2520 User Help ○ ○

ZF1/ZF2
2224 ○ ○ 2525 Test tracking ON ○ ○
Distance Data

2225 ZG1 Groove Data ○ ○ 2529 FLEX hand Clamp △ △

2253 Manual Grip △ × 2530 FLEX hand Clamp1 △ △

Select thermal
2300 ○ ○ 2531 FLEX hand Clamp2 △ △
spraying

Thermal spraying FLEX hand Clamp

2301 ○ ○ 2532 ○ ○
Constant state
Thermal spraying FLEX hand Clamp
2302 ○ ○ 2533 ○ ○
Constant state 1

Thermal spraying FLEX hand Clamp

2303 ○ ○ 2534 ○ ○
Monitor state 2
Thermal spraying FLEX hand Clamp
2304 ○ ○ 2535 ○ ○
ON/OFF Side
FLEX hand Hand
2305 Stopping release ○ ○ 2536 ○ ○
select

2400 Sealing condition ○ ○

○：Setting available
◎：Setting required
×：Setting unavailable
△：[Enable] needs to be pressed at the same time (when “Enable” is set ON).

About the function marked “◎”

Be sure to set up the function marked “◎”. Otherwise, the softkey setting cannot be
completed.
Functions that require the [ENABLE] key to be pressed at the same time (△)
 When enable switching is “enabled,” this function (△) cannot be allocated to the “Front
screen” to prevent incorrect operation.
IMPORTANT  When enable switching is "disabled,” an operator qualification of EXPERT or higher is
required to allocate this function (△).

For details of the softkey condition setting Enable/Disable, see the “7.8.3 Setting the
Softkey Condition Enable/Disable”.

7-30
 7.8 Customizing the “Softkey

Setting the Operation switch

There are various types of operation switch, which allows to set the color, signal, indicated
messages, etc.

1 Press f5<Constant setting> and select [7. f-Keys].

Choose either [2. Softkeys in Teach mode] or [3. Softkeys in Playback mode]
depending on the mode to set up the softkey..
>> Next screen appears.

If you already know the code number, enter the number directly in the code field.

2 If you are not sure about the code number, select the softkey to set using
[UP/DOWN] key, and press f8<Code List>.
>> Next screen appears.

7-31
7.8 Customizing the “Softkey

3 Select the desired Operation switch by pressing [Enable] + arrow key.

＋
>> Next screen appears.

Then, confirm it by pressing [Enter].

4 Pressing [Enable] + f9<Refer>, set the details of each operation switch.

＋

Now, each detail can be set.

5 On completion of the detail setting, press f12<Complete>.

6 On completion of the softkey setting, press f12<Complete>.

>> Now, the softkey settings can be saved.

7-32
 7.8 Customizing the “Softkey

Table 7.8.2 List of softkey operation switches

Teach

Teach
back

back
Operation switch Operation switch

Play

Play
Code Icon Code Icon
Name Name

3000 Round lamp ○ ○ 3011 Contact switch ○ ○

3001 Square lamp ○ ○ 3020 Display 3 digits ○ ○

Push button
3002 ○ ○ 3021 Display 6 digits ○ ○
(Stay)

Push button
3003 ○ ○ 3030 Input 3 digits ○ ○
(Release)

Flash Push Button

3004 ○ ○ 3031 Input 6 Digits ○ ○
(Stay)

Flash Push Button

3005 ○ ○
(Release)

Push Button
3006 ○ ○
(User task)

3010 ON/OFF switch ○ ○

○：Setting available
◎：Setting required
×：Setting unavailable
△：Necessary to press [Enable]. (When the [Enable] is set ON.)

Round/ Square Lamp

Indicates the status of input or output signal

Item Contents
Color of ON Lamp color when the signal is ON.
Color of OFF Lamp color when the signal is OFF.
Display data Selection of input /output signal
Input Signal Input signal No. to indicate
Output Signal Output signal No. to indicate
! mark Timing to indicate the mark “!”

Push Button

Outputs the preset signal

Item Contents
Color of ON Lamp color when the signal is ON.
Color of OFF Lamp color when the signal is OFF.
Output Sig. Signal number to be output when the button pressed
! mark Timing to indicate the mark “!”

7-33
7.8 Customizing the “Softkey

Flash Push Button

Outputs not only the status of input or output signal but also the preset signal
Item Contents
Color of ON Lamp color when the signal is ON.
Color of OFF Lamp color when the signal is OFF.
Display data Selection of input/output signal
Input Signal Input signal number to indicate
Output Signal Output signal number to indicate
Output Sig. Signal No. to be output when the button pressed
Operation method Choice of operation whether the [Enable] key needs to be pressed together
! mark Timing to indicate the mark “!”
Disabled operate Setting whether to disable the operation according to the status of common
switch
Touch Panel key Setting whether to disable the button operation on the touch panel

Push Button (User task)

Executes the user tasks

Item Contents
Color of ON Lamp color when the signal is ON.
Color of OFF Lamp color when the signal is OFF.
User Task Prog. No. Signal number to be output when the button pressed
! mark Timing to indicate the mark “!”

ON/OFF switch

Switches the output signal ON/OFF

Item Contents
Base color Color of switch base
Lever Color Color of switch lever
The place of ON Setting the position to place “ON” whether on the right or the left side of the
switch
Output Sig. Output signal number
Operation method Choice of operation whether the [Enable] key needs to be pressed together
when changing the status
Disabled operate Setting whether to disable the operation according to the status of common
switch

Contact switch

Switches ON/OFF of two output signals

Item Contents
Base color Color of switch base
Lever Color Color of switch lever
Output Signal1 Output signal number of the output signal 1
Output Signal2 Output signal number of the output signal 2
Operation method Choice of operation whether the [Enable] key needs to be pressed together
when changing the status
Disabled operate Setting whether to disable the operation according to the status of common
switch

7-34
 7.8 Customizing the “Softkey

Display 3 digit

Indicates the input/output signal and the variable integer by 3 digits

Item Contents
Base color Color of display base
Display data Choosing the data to display out of the following.
- Input Signal
- Output Signal
- Variable Integer
Method of read Choosing the data format to read out of the following.
- Binary
- BCD
Input Signal Setting the input signal to indicate by 12bit.
The data format is as preset by “Method of read”.
Output Signal Setting the output signal to indicate by 12bit.
The data format is as preset by “Method of read”.
Variable integer Setting the variable integer number to indicate.

Input 3 digit

Inputs the output signal and the variable integer by 3 digits

Item Contents
Base Color Color of display base
Method of Output Choosing the data format to read out of the following.
- Binary
- BCD
Output Sig Setting the output signal to indicate by 12bit.
The data format is as preset by “Method of read”.
Disabled operate Setting the variable integer number to indicate.

7-35
7.8 Customizing the “Softkey

Restoring the softkey to the default

1 Press f5<Constant setting> and select [7. f-Keys].
Choose either [2. Softkeys in Teach mode] or [3. Softkeys in Playback mode]
depending on the mode of softkey to set up.
>> Next screen appears.

2 Press f11<Set initial Code>.

>> Next screen appears.

Enter the number corresponding to the application currently in use, and press [Enter].
0: Standard (The case of the application is not 1 to 6)
1: Spot welding
2: Handling
3: Arc welding
4: Thermal spraying
5: Sealing
6: Painting

3 The default of softkey corresponding to the application chosen is now set. Then,
press f12<Complete>.

7-36
 7.8 Customizing the “Softkey

7.8.2 Changing the Maximum Number of Pages for Softkey

The softkey setting allows the maximum of 3 pages. Applying 3 pages (36), it is available to set
up the maximum of 72 (sum of the front and back) softkeys.

Changing the maximum number of pages for softkey

1 Press f5<Constant setting> and select [7 f-Keys] – [1 Softkey Condition]

>> Next screen appears.

12: 1 Page (f1 to f12, [Enable]+f1 to [Enable]+f12 )

24: 2 Pages (f1 to f24, [Enable]+f1 to [Enable]+f24 )
36: 3 Pages (f1 to f36, [Enable]+f1 to [Enable]+f36 )

When there are 2 or more units, please set up by each unit.

2 On completion of setting, press f12<Complete> to save the settings.

When setting 2 or more pages, the function key f1, f13, and f25 are automatically set
POINT out for the page shift. In this case, therefore, the number of softkeys you are able to
freely use is 11 + 11 = 22.

To reduce the number of pages, make sure that the functions in Table 7.8.1 “◎ (setting
required)” are still set when the pages are reduced.
IMPORTANT If not, you cannot reduce the number of pages.

7-37
7.8 Customizing the “Softkey

7.8.3 Setting the Softkey Condition Enable/Disable

Setting the softkey condition [Disable], it allows the maximum number of softkeys in 1 page
from f1 ~ f12 only.

INFO. Use this function when you are going to set only a few softkeys or you
are to reduce the [Enable] key operation.

For this operation, the operator qualification of EXPERT or higher is required.

Setting the softkey condition Enable/Disable

1 Press f5<Constant setting> and select [7 f-Keys] – [1 Softkey Condition]

>> Next screen appears.

Default is set at [Enable].

When there are 2 or more units, please set up by each unit.

2 On completion of setting, press f12<Complete> to save the settings.

 For functions marked "◎ (functions that require settings)” in Table 7.8.1, always set
the “Front screen” before performing the enable switch “Disable” settings. If the
settings are not performed, enable switching cannot be “Disable.”
 When “Enable Key” is changed from “Disable” to “Enable,” it is not checked whether
IMPORTANT functions that require the [ENABLE] key to be pressed at the same time are allocated
to the “Front screen.” Always be sure to allocate functions as failure to do so may
increase the possibility of incorrect operation.

7-38
 7.8 Customizing the “Softkey

7.8.4 Saving the Softkey Settings

The softkey settings can be saved in the external memory.

Saving the softkey settings

1 Press f5<Constant setting> and select [7 f-Keys] – [1 Softkey Condition]

>> Next screen appears.

2 Press f10<File Write>.

>> Next screen appears.

Select Device, and folder.

3 Press F12<Execute>.
>> Next screen appears.

Enter a 2-digit number.

7-39
7.8 Customizing the “Softkey

4 Press [Enter].
>> Next screen appears.

Press “Enable" + “Edit” key to enter the comment.

5 Press f12<Execute> to save the settings.

This setting is now saved in a file :
ACXXTPKEY.CON (XX: Version No. fixed in saving)

7-40
 7.8 Customizing the “Softkey

7.8.5 Loading Softkey Settings from the File

You are able to load the softkey settings from the file.

Loading the softkey settings

1 Press f5<Constant setting> and select [7 f-Keys] – [1 Softkey Condition]

>> Next screen appears.

2 Press f11<File Read>.

>> Next screen appears.

Choose a desired file, and press f12<Execute>.

 If the settings of the “Enable Key Enable/Disable” differ between the controller and soft
key setting file, the soft key setting file cannot be read.
IMPORTANT  To read the file in such a condition, the operator qualification of EXPERT or higher is
required.

7-41
7.9 Selecting the Program Number from the Program List

7.9 Selecting the Program Number from the Program List

In the function record, the program number can be selected from the program list. In addition to the function
record, the program number can also be selected in the same way, in the robot program screen edit or constant
settings, or the service screen. Furthermore, when selecting the program, the list can be displayed for each unit,
and the contents of the program checked.

7.9.1 Selecting the Program Number from the Program List

Function Record

1 When inputting the program number in the function record status screen, hold
＋ [ENABLE] and press [PROG/STEP].
>> The [Program List] screen is displayed.

2 Select the program from the program list, and press [Enter].
>> The selected program number is displayed in the function record status.
When the function parameter is only the program number, steps are recorded
without returning to the function record status screen.

When the program list is displayed from CALL/JUMP type functions, only the programs
for the currently selected unit are displayed.
When the program list is displayed from FORK/CALLFAR type functions (call outside
IMPORTANT the unit), programs for units other than the currently selected units are displayed.

7-42
 7.9 Selecting the Program Number from the Program List

Screen Edit

1 In the robot program screen edit, select the program number, hold [ENABLE] and
＋ press [PROG/STEP].
>> The [Program List] screen is displayed.

When the program list is displayed from CALL/JUMP type functions, only the programs
for the currently selected unit are displayed.
When the program list is displayed from FORK/CALLFAR type functions (call outside
IMPORTANT the unit), programs for units other than the currently selected units are displayed.

Constant Settings/Service

1 In the constant settings screen or service screen, select the edit box for entering
＋ the program number, hold [ENABLE] and press [PROG/STEP].

>> The [Program List] screen is displayed.

Monitor

1 Open the monitor in which the program number can be set, and press [Edit].
>> The monitor switches to edit mode.

Select the edit box for entering the program number, hold [ENABLE] and press
＋ [PROG/STEP].
>> The [Program List] screen is displayed.

7-43
7.9 Selecting the Program Number from the Program List

7.9.2 Displaying Programs for Each Unit

When multi-unit specifications are used, it is possible to limit the programs displayed in a list for
each unit.

1 Hold [ENABLE] and press [PROG/STEP].

＋
>> The program list is displayed.
At the top right of the screen, the name of the unit whose program list is displayed is
shown.
“ALL UNIT”  The programs of all units are displayed.

2 Hold [ENABLE] and press f10 < >.

＋
>> Only the programs for UNIT 1 are displayed.
The unit name is displayed at the top right of the list.

( )

When the previous unit/next unit f keys are pressed, the units transit as shown below.
Other unit displays are applied when the unit external program is selected.
Also, units that do not exist are skipped.
All units display Other units display

All units Other unit

Programs from all Programs from units

units are displayed. other than the

currently selected
Unit 1 Unit 1
unit are displayed.

The currently selected

Unit 9 Unit 9
unit is skipped.

Previous unit/Next unit Previous unit/Next unit

F key operation F key operation

7-44
 7.9 Selecting the Program Number from the Program List

7.9.3 Checking Program Contents

You can check an overview of programs when they are shown in the program list display. If the
pose record is enabled, the contents of pose files can also be checked.

1 Hold [ENABLE] and press [PROG/STEP].

＋
>> The program list is displayed.

2 Select the program, and press f11 <Refer>.

>> The program properties are displayed.
Press [Reset/R] to close the display.

The displayed contents are as shown below.

Item Details
File name File name of the program
Unit name Unit name
Comment The comment registered for the step 1is displayed.
Last Update Latest date on which the program was changed
File Protect Protect status (All/Part/Playback)
No. of Steps Total number of steps
Movement command (*1) Number of steps for the movement command
Function command (*1) Number of steps for the function command
Date for each application is displayed.
For spot welding, the number of spot welds is
Application data (*1) displayed.
Depending on the application, this may not be
displayed.
The content of programs can be checked.
Program preview (Maximum of 16 steps)
It can be scrolled using the Up/Down key.
(*1) This is not displayed when pose record is enabled.

7-45
7.10 Editing Step Comments

7.10 Editing Step Comments

Comments can be added to each step of the program. This comment is called a step comment. Adding step
comments makes the meaning of steps easier to understand.

7.10.1 Inputting step comments

Step comments can be added and edited in the screen edit.

1 Set the robot program monitor to the operable state, and press [Edit].
>> The [Screen edit] screen is displayed.

For details of the basic operations for screen edit, see “Chapter 4 Teaching.”

2 Align the cursor with the step you want to add a step comment to, and press
[Right].
>>Align the cursor to the position in the figure.

3 Hold [ENABLE] and press [Edit].

＋
>>The soft keyboard is displayed.

7-46
 7.10 Editing Step Comments

4 Enter the step comment using the soft keyboard, and press f12 <Complete>.
>> The step comment entered at the cursor position is displayed.

5 Press f12 <Complete>, and the step comment is written to the program.

INFO.
If a step comment is already input, it can be edited using the same procedure.

Programs which step comments are written to require data space enough to save
them. For this reason, the number of steps that can be registered to one program is
smaller compared to programs that do not have step comments. If step comments are
added to a program that has many steps, “A2150: Too many steps” may be displayed.
As explained in “4.3.8 Number of recordable steps,” use the program call etc. to divide
IMPORTANT the program so that the number of steps does not exceed 300 per program.
The maximum number of steps that can be assigned differs depending on the number
of characters in the step comment etc.

7-47
7.11 Displaying Language Switching Function

7.11 Displaying Language Switching Function

With this controller, the display of the operation screen can be switched to Japanese or to English. In addition, if
optional languages are added, switching to and displaying those languages are also possible. Switching the
display language can be done easily with the shortcut command R348. The power-on display language is turned
on can also be set.

POINT In order to set the candidate languages, switch the operator qualification to EXPERT.

Switching of setting the languages for display

1 Shortcut command R348,
＋[3],[4],[8] Select [Constant Setting] - [2 Screen Constants] - [2 Language Selection].
>>The following setting screen is displayed.

If a language option has not been added (Japanese and English only), when running
POINT R348, the above language selection menu will not appear, and the language will be
switched to the other language. In addition, the following steps will not be necessary.

2 Select language.

3 When the selections are completed, press f12 <Complete>.

>> The display language will be switched to the selected language.

Setting the languages selection at power-on

1 Select [Constant Setting] - [2 Screen Constants] - [1 Language Selection at
power-on].
>>The following setting screen is displayed.

2 Select language.

3 When the settings are completed, press f12 <Complete>.

>> The power-on display language selection and the display language is switched to
the selected language.

7-48
 7.12 Selecting a Function Command Step and Operating

7.12 Selecting a Function Command Step and Operating

With this controller, you can select a function command step from the teach pendant, and perform playback
operation or check operation. As this function is set to “Prohibited” by default, settings are required in order to
use it.

7.12.1 Selecting the playback operation from the function command

The following three types of operation are available for selecting the function command step from
the teach pendant, and performing playback operation or check operation. They are set to
“Prohibited” by default.

Table 7.12.1 Playback operation settings from the function command

Setting Controls for Check Operation Controls for Playback
Check operation cannot be Playback operation cannot be
Disable
performed. performed.
After selecting the function command
in the step selection, press [Check go]
or [Check back] and the current step
moves to movement command
Playback operation cannot be
Skips nearest to the operation direction.
performed.
None of the function commands that
exist between the function command
in which the step was selected or the
movement commands are executed.
When a function command is selected in the step selection and “*” is displayed
in the appropriate step of the program monitor, check go operation and
playback operation are available. Depending on the selected function
Enable
command, "*” may not be displayed, and there may be some function
commands that cannot be executed.
Check back operation and reverse playback operation cannot be performed.

Setting the playback operation for the function command after step selection
1 In the teach mode, select [29 How to play after selecting step] in <Service
Utilities> - [1 Teach/Playback Condition].
>> The following setting screen is displayed.

2 Select using [ENABLE] + [Left/Right].

＋
>> Select from the settings shown in Table 7.12.1.
When “Skips" or “Enable” is selected, the “Display of message” becomes
selectable.

7-49
7.12 Selecting a Function Command Step and Operating

3 Align the cursor with “Display of message” and select using [ENABLE] +
＋ [Left/Right].

Table 7.12.2 Message Settings

Setting Details of Operation
Enabled After selecting the function command in the step selection, a
confirmation message is displayed when check operation or playback
operation controls are performed.
Disabled After selecting the function command in the step selection, a
confirmation message is not displayed even if check operation or
playback operation controls are performed.

4 When the settings are completed, press f12 <Complete>.

>> The settings are saved to the internal memory.

7.12.2 Skipping the Step Selected Function Command and Operating

When <Service Utilities - [1 Teach/Playback Conditions] – [29 How to play after selecting step]
is set to “Skip,” step selection can be performed for function command, and check operation
controls can be performed. In this case, if [Check go] or [Check back] is pressed, the function
command for which steps were selected is skipped, and the current step can be transferred to the
closest movement command.

Skipping the Step Selected Function Command and Operating

1 Press [PROG/STEP], and select the function command step.

2 While grasping the [Enable Switch], press [Check go] (or [Check back]).
>> The current step is transferred to the movement command closest to the check
＋ operation direction.
(If a movement command does not exist, the current step is not transferred.)

When “Confirmation message” is set to “Enabled” (see Table 7.12.2), a confirmation

message is displayed after the current step is transferred.

In this operation, just the current step is moved (re-selected), and the function command
IMPORTANT is not executed.

7-50
 7.12 Selecting a Function Command Step and Operating

7.12.3 Performing Check Go Operation from the Step Selected Function

Command
When <Service Utilities - [1 Teach/Playback Conditions] – [29 How to play after selecting step]
is set to “Enable”, check go operation can be executed for the function command in which steps
were selected.

Skipping the Step Selected Function Command and Operating Check Go

1 Press [PROG/STEP], and select the function command step.
>> When an executable function command is selected, “*” is displayed for the
applicable steps in the program monitor.

2 While grasping the [Enable Switch], press [Check go].

When “Confirmation message” is set to “Enabled” (see Table 7.12.2), the following
＋ confirmation message is displayed. At this point, the function command is not
executed.

Press any key to close the confirmation message.

Once again, grasp the [Enable Switch], press [Check go].

3 The robot remains in the current position, and the function command for the
current step is executed.

The function command is executed in the current robot position. For this reason,
the position is different to the position taught by the program (position when the
program is played from the start), and that function command may be executed.
Before performing check go controls, always check the current position of the
CAUTION robot.

 Depending on the function command, check go operation may not be available

for this control.
IMPORTANT  Check back operation cannot be performed.

POINT In order to execute the function command, <Service Utilities> – [1 Teach/Playback

conditions] – [9 Check with function] needs to be set to “Enabled” (or “I-enabled”).

7-51
7.12 Selecting a Function Command Step and Operating

7.12.4 Performing Playback Operation from the Step Selected Function

Command
When <Service Utilities> - [1 Teach/Playback Conditions] – [29 How to play after selecting
step] is set to “Enable,” playback operation can be executed for the function command in which
steps were selected.

Skipping the Function Command in which Steps were Selected and Performing
Playback Operation
1 Press [PROG/STEP], and select the function command step.
>> When an executable function command is selected, “*” is displayed for the
applicable steps in the program monitor.

2 Press the [Start Button].

When “Confirmation message” is set to “Enabled” (see Table 7.12.2), the following
confirmation message is displayed. At this point, playback operation is not started.

Press any key to close the confirmation message.

Press the [Start Button] again.

3 Playback operation starts.

The function commands taught from the function commands in which steps were
selected until the next move command are all executed in the current robot position.
For this reason, the position is different to the position taught by the program
(position when the program is played from the start), and the function command may
be executed.
CAUTION Before performing playback operation, always check the current position of the
robot.

 Depending on the function command, playback operation may not be available for
this control.
 Multiple function commands may be taught from the function command in which
steps were selected to the next movement command. If there are function
IMPORTANT commands that cannot be executed because of this function in the function
commands, an error occurs when those function commands are played.

7-52
 7.13 Estimated power consumption monitor

7.13 Estimated power consumption monitor

This robot controller can estimate the consumed power by the robot motion.

7.13.1 Estimated power consumption monitor

1 Open <Service Utilities> - [3-6 Monitor 1 - 4] – [70 Estimated power consumption].
>> The "Estimated power consumption"

Item Description
The measuring time from the controller power is
turned ON. This is initialized when turning the
Measuring time
controller power ON or when initialization operation is
executed.
The estimated power consumption is displayed here.
This value is the cumulative value to the present time
Power cons.
from when turning ON the controller power or when
initializing the values.
The estimation calculation is applied only for the
supported mechanism. If the mechanism is not
Supported Mechanism
displayed here, the power consumption estimation is
not executed for the mechanism.

This is a function to estimate the power consumption by a simple calculation. If an

accurate value is necessary, please prepare a measurement device for the power
IMPORTANT consumption.

POINT The "Measuring time" and the "Power cons." are cleared to zero when turning the
controller power OFF.

7-53
7.13 Estimated power consumption monitor

7.13.2 How to initialize the value

The estimation of the "Power consumption" value will start when the controller's power is turned ON.
To check the power consumption amount for 1 cycle, please follow these steps;

1. Power ON the controller

2. Initialize the value in the "Estimated power consumption" monitor
3. Playback the work-program for 1 cycle
4. Check the estimated value after 1 cycle playback

To initialize the values, please follow these steps;

Initialization operation
1 Open the "Estimated power consumption" monitor and press [EDIT] key.
>>Thus title bar color changes and <Clear Power consumption> key appears on the
screen. (Upper right position)

2 Press <Clear Power consumption > key.

>>A confirmation screen appears.

3 Select "YES" and press [Enter].

>>The "Measuring time" and the "Power cons." will be cleared to 0.

7-54
 7.13 Estimated power consumption monitor

7.13.3 Cable length setting

The power consumption amount varies from the length of the “wire-harness” (the cable
between the robot and the robot controller).
When shipping, the cable length is set to “30m”. But, to get more accurate calculation result, it
is necessary to input the accurate cable length.
In this section, how to set the cable length is described. For this operation an operator class of
SPECIALIST is required.

1 Open <Constant Setting> [3 Machine Constants] [11 Motor and Encoder].

2 Display the concerned page and change the value of “Cable length”.

Input the cable length of your robot. (5, 10, 15, 20, 25, or 30m) for the all axes.
(Generally, all of these values should be the same)

3 After changing the values, save the data by pressing f12 <Complete>.

7-55
7.14 Input robot language for the function parameter

7.14 Input robot language for the function parameter

It is possible to use a robot language style description for the function parameter. For example, it possible to
use descriptions like “Vn%”(integer number variable) or “Vn!” (real number variable) (1<n<500) for the “FN50
DELAY”. By setting the function parameter like this method, it is possible to improve the maintainability of the
program. And, it is also possible to modify a executable program that was created by the robot language.

Table 7.14-1 Available functions (Available in the system software FDV03.21 or after)
Function Number Command Name
50 DELAY Timer delay
58 SHIFTA XYZ shift
68 LETR Set shift value
330 VRESET Vision reset
331 VSTART Vision start
333 VSHIFT Vision shift

7.14.1 How to input the robot language style parameter

The robot language style parameter can be added / edited in the screen editor.
1 Select the “Robot program monitor” window and press [Edit] key.
>>The screen editor will be displayed.

For details on the basic operation of the screen, refer to the chapter 4 “Teaching”.
2 Set the cursor to the parameter to be edited.
>>In this example, set the cursor to the parameter for the “FN50 DELAY”.

3 Press [Enable] + [Edit] key.

＋ >>The software keyboard will be displayed.

7-56
 7.14 Input robot language for the function parameter

4 Input “V1!” for the parameter using the software keyboard and then press f12
<Complete>.
>>The inputted description is displayed at the cursor position.

5 Save the edited parameter to the program file by pressing f12 <Complete>.

INFO. When using a number for the function parameter, the number can be inputted
directly by using the numeric keys of the teach pendant. (The software
keyboard is not used)

INFO. For the register variable parameter and the step number parameter, only
constant number can be set.

INFO. Only the following variables, constants, and arithmetic operators are
available for inputting the parameter. For details, refer to the instruction
manual “Robot Language”.

Variables;
Vn% Global variable(integer value)
Vn! Global variable(real number)
Ln% Local variable (integer number)
Ln! Local variable (real number)

Example;
DELAY [ (V1!+V2!)/V3! ]
SHIFTA [ 0,L![1],L![2],L![11] MOD L![12] ]

7-57
7.15 Banning the operation by locking TP

7.15 Banning the operation by locking TP

By using shortcut R-code, it is possible to lock TP.

7.15.1 Locking of R316 TP

By inputting the password for locking TP, TP is locked.
Once the TP is locked, then operation cannot be done except R-key.
Initial password is ”000”.

Item Contents Setting range

Password for Input the password, which is used for 1 to 10 letters of
locking TP locking TP. numbers

When [Reset /R] key is pressed in the state of TP has locked, then the password input screen is
indicated. If inputting password at that time then, lock will be released.
Also, it is possible to release the lock with the password of SPECIALIST or above.

7.15.2 Password change for locking R317 TP

Change the password, which is using for locking TP.

Item Contents Setting range

Password for Input the new password. 1 to 10 letters of
locking TP numbers

7-58
Chapter 8 Basic spot welding operations

This chapter describes the basic spot welding operations for operators who will be
using the robot for the spot welding application.

8.1 Terms frequently used with spot welding ....................................................8-1

8.2 f key layout..................................................................................................8-2
8.3 Spot welding command...............................................................................8-3
8.4 Teaching .....................................................................................................8-4
8.4.1 Spot welding command recording .........................................................8-4
8.4.2 Manual pressurizing and manual welding .............................................8-5
8.4.3 When using multiple number of welders .............................................8-10
8.5 Sets the spot welding conditions............................................................... 8-11
8.6 Setting the spot weld sequences ..............................................................8-13
8.7 Spot welding ON/OFF...............................................................................8-15
This is dummy page. DO NOT ERASE.
 8.1 Terms frequently used with spot welding

8.1 Terms frequently used with spot welding

The basic terms frequently used in connection with spot welding in this manual are defined below for the benefit
of first-time operators of the robot.

Table 8.1.1 Terms frequently used with spot welding

Terms Explanation
Spot welding controller This is the controller that controls the spot welding directly. A controller made by a
specialist manufacturer must be provided in addition to the robot controller.
It may also be referred to simply as the welder or timer contactor.
Spot welding tool This is a tool which comes into contact with the work piece and supplies the
power.
It is also called the “gun”.
Air gun This refers to the kind of gun which is driven pneumatically.
Servo gun This refers to the kind of gun which is powered by a servo drive.
It utilizes the servo control of the robot controller. With the robot controller, the gun
is treated as a mechanism as is the case with a positioner or travel device, and
highly accurate position control is exercised in coordination with the manipulator.
Welding conditions This is a general term used to refer to the data such as the welding current and
welding force that determine the welding conditions.
The conditions are edited using the teach pendant.
A total of 255 items of the welding conditions data can be registered per welder.
Weld sequence This is a general term used to refer to the data items that define the I/O
sequences between the robot controller and welder (timer contactor).
The conditions are edited using the teach pendant.
A total of 64 items of the weld sequence data can be registered per welder.
Tip consumption This is a technical term used with servo guns.
amount compensation As welding is performed over and over again, the electrodes gradually start to wear
down, and their length shortens. An equalizing function is not generally provided
with servo guns. For this reason, when the electrodes start to wear down, the fixed
side electrode is no longer pressed against the work, resulting in a deficient welding
force on the fixed side and extra stress on the work, resulting also in a
deterioration of the simultaneous arrival of the top and bottom electrodes and an
increase in the cycle time.
Therefore, in order to maintain the correct welding position, a “wear amount
compensation function” is provided to shift the welding target point at the fixed and
moving sides by the distance equivalent to the wear amount.
Gun search This is a technical term used with servo guns.
In order for the wear amount to be compensated, this amount has to be detected.
A predetermined operation pattern is played back for this, and the wear amount is
calculated on the basis of the position of the gun at this time. This action is known
as the “gun search”, and three different detection methods are provided.
Bending compensation This is a technical term used with servo guns.
The gun arm bends as the welding force is increased. It may bend not only in the
welding force direction (Z direction) but also on the plane (XY direction)
perpendicular to the welding force direction depending on the shape of the gun
arm.
This function compensates for bending to achieve the proper welding position by
measuring these characteristics in advance.

8-1
8.2 f key layout

8.2 f key layout

The initial settings of the f keys displayed along both edges of the LCD screen when the robot is to be used for
the spot welding application are shown below.
The f keys are arranged in a layout which is optimally suited to the settings of the specific application such as
spot welding or arc welding. Since initial settings are performed at the factory to suit the application for which the
particular type of robot is normally used, the customer does not normally need to re-arrange the f keys.

Table 8.2.1 Initial layout of f keys for spot welding

Teach mode
When pressed on its When pressed together When pressed on its When pressed together
own with [ENABLE] own with [ENABLE]
Switches Sets the teach
between weld or playback Sets the teach or
f1 No function ON, weld OFF f7 conditions playback
and squeezing exclusively for conditions.
off. spot welding.
Selects spot Selects the Switches the
f2 No function f8
welder stroke. stroke.
Spot welding Forcibly initiates I
f3 Sets monitor 2. f9 No function
monitor release.

f Forcibly initiates
f4 File Manager No function No function
10 WI release.

Sets the spot f Initiates manual

f5 Sets the constant. No function
constant. 11 spot welding.
Sets the spot
Calls the service f Sets the Performs the
f6 welding
menu. 12 accuracy. smooth setting.
conditions.

Playback mode
When pressed on its When pressed together When pressed on its When pressed together
own with [ENABLE] own with [ENABLE]
Switches
between weld Sets the teach Sets the teach or
f1 No function ON, weld OFF f7 or playback playback
and squeezing conditions. conditions.
off.
Simultaneously
switches the
f2 No function start f8 No function Step feed
select and
program select.
Spot welding Forcibly initiates I
f3 Sets monitor 2. f9 No function
monitor release.

f Forcibly initiates
f4 No function Step continuous No function
10 WI release.
Switches
Speed override
between cycle, f
f5 No function No function (up in 10%
continuous and 11
increments)
step.
Sets the spot Speed override
Calls the service f
f6 welding No function (down in 10%
menu. 12
conditions. increments)

8-2
 8.3 Spot welding command

8.3 Spot welding command

Depending on the drive system of the welding gun used, spot welding is classified into two kinds: “air gun” and
“servo gun”. The air welding gun is driven pneumatically where as the servo welding gun is driven by servo
control.
This section describes the basic operation methods common to both air guns and servo guns.

The data required in order to perform spot welding fall into two main categories: the welding conditions such as
the welding current and welding force that determine the conditions of the welding itself, and the weld
sequences that define the I/O sequences between the robot controller and welding controller (timer contactor).
With this controller, each set of data is stored in a separate file, namely the “Welding conditions file” and the
“Weld sequence file”. An “indirect reference format”, in which only the numbers of the sets of data stored in these
files from the programs are referenced, is used.

Spot welding condition file

Program Set of data for welding condition 1
Set of data for welding condition 2
...
...
・・・ condition W1
Set of data for welding
Set of data for welding condition W2
...
Step M Data is read ...
Set of data for welding condition 255
Spot welding command using
Spot welding condition number = W1 condition
Spot welding sequence number = S1
numbers.
Spot welding condition file
Set of data for welding sequence 1
Step N Set of data for welding sequence 2
...
Spot welding command Data is read ...
Spot welding condition number = W2 Set of data for welding sequence S1
Using Set of data for welding sequence S2
Spot welding sequence number = S2 sequence ...
numbers. ...
Set of data for welding sequence 64

Fig. 8.3.1 Indirectly referenced spot welding data

The “welding condition files” and “weld sequence files” are completely separate from the programs. Data such
as the welding current and welding force is not directly written in the program. If the same conditions or
sequences are to be used, they can be called from a multiple number of programs and/or steps for use over and
over again.
This comes in handy if, for instance, the welding conditions for “3-layer overlap spotting” are used, and if they
can be given numbers for the same set of data and referenced using these numbers in each step. In this way, all
the welding conditions for 3-layer overlap spotting can be changed at once simply by changing the set of welding
conditions data for 3-layer overlap spotting.

8-3
8.4 Teaching

8.4 Teaching

8.4.1 Spot welding command recording

The spot welding command is an function command. As with the timer commands or input/output commands, it
can be recorded using the [FN] key.
Mnemonic Number Command
SPOT FN119 Spot weld
(Common to both the air gun and servo gun)
Parameter
Data Description, setting range
Parameter Welder This parameter specifies the number of the
No.1 number first welder for which the welding control signal
is output.
(1 to 6)
Parameter Welding This parameter specifies the number of the
No.2 condition welding condition that determines the welding
number force and welding condition signal.
(1 to 255)
Parameter Weld This parameter specifies the number of the
No.3 sequence welding sequence that determines the timings
number at which the squeezing signal, weld command
signal and stroke signal are to be output, etc.
(1 to 64)
Parameter Welding point Use this parameter when controlling the
No.4 number welding points. The welding point numbers are
output when welding trouble has occurred to
enable the hitting points to be specified. Set
this to "0" when the welding point numbers are
not going to be used.
(0 to 16000)

Nevertheless, insofar as only the spot welding function is concerned, automatic recording of the spot welding
function at the same time as the movement commands are recorded is enabled in order to improve the
operational ease. Simply by moving the robot to the hitting point position and pressing the [O.WRITE/REC] key,
the two steps of recording the position concerned (movement command) and recording the spot welding
(function command) can be performed at the same time. The procedure is described below. (To present the
simplest scenario, the procedure is described using only one welder.)

>> A description of the basic operations for the teaching work will be omitted here:
instead, the description starts from the recording of the spotting points.
1 Move the robot to the spotting position.
Contact the settled-side electrode of servo gun with the workpiece, manually
pressurize it (by pressing [ENABLE] + [CLAMP/ARC] keys at the same time) and
grasp the workpiece with the servo gun.

2 Press the [CLAMP/ARC] key on the teach pendant once.

>> The
red circle appear in the application area (in the section enclosed by the red frame
immediately below the comment in the figure below) on the status window.
When a movement command is now recorded, the FN119 spot welding function
will be recorded at the same time.

3 Press the [O.WRITE/REC] key.

>> When a movement command is now recorded, the FN119 spot welding function
will be recorded at the same time. In the example given on this page, a movement
command is recorded in step 3 and the spot welding command is recorded in step
4.

8-4
 8.4 Teaching

Step1: Movement Command

Step 2: Movement Command

Step 3: Movement Command

Step 4: Spot welding command

Initial welding point

Fig. 8.4.1 Teaching the spot welding commands

>> The contents of the parameters when the spot welding command has been
recorded can be decided upon exactly as desired. For further details, refer to
“8.5 Sets the spot welding conditions” and “8.6 Setting the spot weld sequences”.

>> For details on how to edit the welding conditions and weld sequences which are
referenced, refer to “8.5 Sets the spot welding conditions” and “8.6 Setting the spot
weld sequences”. These descriptions will be skipped here.

4 Press the [CLAMP/ARC] key again to prepare for the recording of the next step.
>> The red circle in the application area is cleared.
From now on, the spot welding command will not be recorded simultaneously
even when a movement command is recorded. When a hitting point is reached
again, repeat the same operations starting with step 2.

Concerning the [CLAMP/ARC] key

This hard key on the teach pendant is used only with welder 1.
When more than one welder is used, its operation is performed by the f key for the second and subsequent
welders.
For further details, refer to “8.4.3 When using multiple number of welders”.

8.4.2 Manual pressurizing and manual welding

The welding operation can be performed manually when the spotting positions or welding quality is to be
checked. The operation differs slightly depending on whether the air gun or servo gun is used.

When proceeding with manual operation, keep away from the spot welding gun.
If a dry run is to be performed, be absolutely sure to turn off the power (weld OFF) before
proceeding so that the welding current will not flow even when a manual welding operation
is performed by mistake.
DANGER If a person got sandwiched or receive an electric shock, death or serious injury may result.

8-5
8.4 Teaching

Manual pressurizing (without welding)

1 Select the teach mode.

2 Move the robot to the pressurizing position.

When using the air gun

3 Press the [ENABLE] and [CLAMP/ARC] keys together.

＋
>> The welding force control signal and pressurizing signal are output. → The gun
performs the pressurizing operation. The power-on signal is not output. → The
welding current does not flow.0

＋ ＋

Welding force control signal (air gun only)

Welding force control signal

Pressure signal
Pressure signal

Fig. 8.4.2 Air gun manual pressurizing

Actually, the welding force control signal which was set in the “welding conditions
applying for manual welding” is output.
The welding force signal is output in accordance with the ON or OFF setting for the
pressurizing signal output which was set in the “weld sequences applying for manual
welding”.

4 Press the [ENABLE] and [CLAMP/ARC] keys together once more.

＋ >> The welding force control signal and pressurizing signal are now turned off.
→ The gun is released.

When using the servo gun

3 While grasping the [ENABLE SWITCH], press the [ENABLE] and [CLAMP/ARC]
keys together.
＋ >> The gun axis moves to the “pressurizing stroke” position which is a
condition among the spot constants/servo gun conditions, and it stops there for the
time being. (The fixed electrode on the robot body does not move.)
＋
Moving side Pressurizing
electrode stroke

＋
＋

Settled side
electrode
＋

Pressurizing stroke position Pressurizing position

Fig. 8.4.3 Servo gun manual pressurizing

If the [CLAMP/ARC] key or [ENABLE SWITCH] is released during the pressurizing

operation, the operation is suspended immediately.

8-6
 8.4 Teaching

4 Once more, while grasping the [ENABLE SWITCH], press the [ENABLE] and
[CLAMP/ARC] keys together.
＋ >> The gun axis moves to the pressurizing position. (The fixed electrode on the robot
body does not move.)
The welding force complies with the setting for the welding conditions which were set
＋ in the “welding numbers applying for manual welding”.

5 From this point, whenever the [ENABLE] and [CLAMP/ARC] keys are pressed
together, the movement of the pressurizing stroke position and pressurizing
position will alternate.

8-7
8.4 Teaching

Welding manually
1 Select the teach mode.

2 Move the robot to the position where manual welding is performed.

When using the air gun

3 Press the [ENABLE] and <Manual Weld> keys together.

＋ >> Following exactly the same procedure as for playback.
Proceed with spot welding using the welding conditions which were set in the
“welding conditions applying for manual welding” and the weld sequences which
were set in the “weld sequences applying for manual welding”.

4 The gun will not be released unless the welding completion signal (WI) is input
＋ from the welding controller. If the welding controller is being adjusted, the gun
can be forcibly released by pressing the [ENABLE] and <Cancel WI> keys
together.

When using the servo gun

3 While grasping the [ENABLE SWITCH], press the [ENABLE] and <Manual Weld>
keys together.
＋ >> The robot moves to the pressurizing stroke position, and stops there for the time
being.

＋ 4 Once more, while grasping the [ENABLE SWITCH], press the [ENABLE] and
<Manual Weld> keys together.
>> Following exactly the same procedure as for playback
Proceed with spot welding using the welding conditions which were set in the
“welding conditions applying for manual welding” and the weld sequences which
were set in the “weld sequences applying for manual welding”.
Unlike manual pressurizing, the fixed electrode on the robot body also moves.
(Equalizing operation)

When “Yes” is selected for the equalizing operation in the manual mode
Moving side electrode

Stroke (upon completion)

Stroke (during pressurizing)

Fixed clearance amount Fixed clearance amount

Settled side
electrode

Pressurizing position Clearance position Pressurizing Release

Fig. 8.4.4 Servo gun manual welding

5 The gun will not be released unless the welding completion signal (WI) is input
＋ from the welding controller. If the welding controller is being adjusted, the gun
can be forcibly released by pressing the [ENABLE] and <Cancel WI> keys
together.

6 From this point, whenever the [ENABLE] and <Manual Weld> keys are pressed
together, the welding operation from the pressurizing stroke position will be
repeated.
The pressurizing stroke clearance position is the distance between the tip and work
piece immediately prior to pressurizing when the spot welding command (SPOT:
FN119) is played back.
It is set in the constants/spot welding application/servo gun conditions.

8-8
 8.4 Teaching

Switching the stroke manually

“Stroke switching” refers to changing the release amount of the spot welding gun.
In the case of an air gun, this amount can be switched to one of two levels (fully open = wide release; semi open
= narrow release) by turning the “fully open signal” or “semi-open signal” to ON or OFF. Connect either the “fully
open signal” or “semi-open signal” or both signals to an air gun that supports stroke switching.
In the case of a servo gun, the gun axis is servo-controlled and so can be stopped at any position. However, out
of consideration for ease of teaching, by design it is possible to release the gun by a single-touch action to one
of four stroke settings.

1 Select the teach mode.

2 Move the robot to the pressurizing position.

When using the air gun

3 Press the [ENABLE] and <Stroke Change> keys together.

＋ >> The semi-open signal is set to OFF, and the fully open signal is set to ON.

Fully open signal ＋ ＋

Semi-open signal

Fig. 8.4.5 Air gun manual stroke switching

4 Once more, press the [ENABLE] and <Stroke Change> keys together.
＋ >> Conversely, the semi-open signal is set to ON, and the fully open signal is set to
OFF.
In this way, the semi-open signal and fully open signal are repeatedly set to ON or
OFF alternately.

When using the servo gun

3 First, press the <Stroke Select> key, and select the desired setting from among
the four stroke settings.
>> The number at the top left of the <Stroke Select> key is switched in the following
sequence: 0 → 1 → 2 → 3.
Under the initial setting, the lower the number, the wider the release amount.
4 While grasping the [ENABLE SWITCH], press the [ENABLE] and <Stroke
Change> keys together.
＋ >> The gun axis moves to the position of the stroke which was set on the
previous page.
Moving
＋ side
electrode
Wide release point

Pressurizing stroke

Settled
side
electrode

＋
Fig. 8.4.6 Servo gun manual stroke switching

8-9
8.4 Teaching

8.4.3 When using multiple number of welders

When a multiple number of welders (welding controllers) are used, the user must first declare which welders are
the target of the operations.
This operation method is described below.
The operation procedure below shows how the <Select Spot> f key is used. If the <Select Spot> f key is not
displayed, it can be allocated using <Constants> - [7 T/P keys] - [2 Soft key layout].
The same operation can be performed using the R315 shortcut.

1 In the teach or playback mode, press the <Select Spot> f key.

>> A screen such as the one shown below now appears. Now input all the numbers of
the welders that will be the target of the operations performed from this point.

If, for instance, the operations are to apply to both welders 1 and 2, either 12 or 21 may
be input. Input the welder numbers so that they are enumerated.
Here, only the numbers for the welders registered ahead of time can be input.

>> The numbers of the welders targeted for the current operation are displayed in the
application area on the status window. They are indicated by the bold numbers on
the top row.
In the example below, welders 1, 2, 3 and 4 are targeted.

>> From this point, the manual welding and spot welding commands are recorded for
the welders targeted for operation.

8-10
 8.5 Sets the spot welding conditions

8.5 Sets the spot welding conditions

The spot welding conditions refer to the groups of data that determine the welding current, welding force and
other conditions of the spot welding itself. The spot welding conditions are completely separate from the
programs, and they are stored on a one-file-per-welder basis. A file can contain groups of up to 255 conditions.
During playback, the FD11 controller outputs the numbers of the welding conditions written among these
conditions to the welding controller.
The actual welding current and schedule must be taught ahead of time on the welding controller side.

Welder Controller
Gun (Timer contactor)
Power-on based on
preset welding conditions Welding condition number

(Electro-pneumatic Welding force control Welding condition 1 data

Welding condition 2 data
proportional valve) condition
...
Air Gun
Welding condition W1 data
Welding condition W2 data
...
Welding force directly controlled using servo control Welding condition 255 data
Servo Gun

Fig. 8.5.1 Spot welding condition

As is shown in the figure above, how the control is exercised differs depending on the drive system used for the
spot welding gun: this means that the setting screen for the spot welding conditions differs slightly depending on
whether air guns or servo guns are used. The spot welding condition files are separate from the program files so
it is possible to revise the contents of the welding conditions even during the playback operations of the robot.
How to edit spot welding conditions is described below.
This manual does not provide a detailed description of the significance of each parameter. For a detailed
explanation, see "Application Section (Spot Welding)” in the instruction manual.

When using the air gun

1 In the teach or playback mode, press the f6 <Spot Weld. Cond.> key.
Alternatively, select <Service Utilities> followed by [20 Spot welding application]
- [2 Welding condition/Sequence].
>> The welding condition editing screen such as the one shown below now appears.

2 If a multiple number of welders are being used, press the [CLOSE/SELECT

SCREEN] key.
Each time this key is pressed, the tab provided for each welder is switched.
The “Common for all welder” tab has the welding conditions used in common
for all the welders.

3 A total of 255 conditions can be stored. Align the cursor with “Condition#”,
input the number of the condition and press [Enter] or press the <Prev No> or
<Next No> f key to select the desired welding condition number.

8-11
8.5 Sets the spot welding conditions

4 Set the data.

>> This manual does not provide a detailed description of the significance of each
parameter.

5 Upon completion of the settings, press the f12 <Complete> key.

The settings are written in the spot welding condition file.
>> If the playback operation is underway, the changes in the settings are reflected
immediately.

When using the servo gun

1 >> The editing screen changes to a configuration resembling the one shown below.
With a servo gun, the welding force is controlled directly so that the setting data for
this differs from the data used with the air gun.

>> Otherwise, there are no differences from when air guns are used.
This manual does not provide a detailed description of the significance of each
parameter.

8-12
 8.6 Setting the spot weld sequences

8.6 Setting the spot weld sequences

A spot welding sequence refers to the data which defines the I/O sequences, etc. between the robot controller
and welder. The spot welding sequences are completely separate from the programs, and they are stored on a
one file per welder basis. A file can contain up to 64 sequences per welder. During playback, the controller
controls the welding flow in accordance with these sequences.
The spot welding sequences do not determine the sequences of the welding itself such as its power-on cycle
and cooling cycle. The sequences of the welding itself must be taught ahead of time at the welder side.

Welder Controller
(Timer contactor)
Gun
Pressurizing valve Pressurizing command,
ON/OFF power-on command
Welding completion Welding sequence 1 data
Stroke switching valve Welding sequence 2 data
ON/OFF ...
Stroke switching Welding sequence S1 data
Air Gun Welding sequence S2 data
Welding force directly controlled using servo control ...
Servo Gun Welding sequence 64 data

Fig. 8.6.1 Spot Weld Sequence

Depending on the drive system used for the spot welding gun, the setting screen for the spot weld sequences
differs slightly. The spot weld sequence files are separate from the program files so it is possible to revise
sequences even during the playback operations of the robot. How to edit spot weld sequences is described
below.
This manual does not provide a detailed description of the significance of each parameter. For a detailed
explanation, see "Application Section (Spot Welding)” in the instruction manual.

When using the air gun

1 In the teach or playback mode, press the <Spot Weld. Cond.> f key.
Alternatively, select <Service Utilities>followed by [20 Spot welding
application]- [2 Welding condition/Sequence].
>> The spot welding condition editing screen mentioned before now appears.

2 Press the [Weld. Cond./Sequence] f key.

>> The spot welding condition editing screen and spot weld sequence editing
screen can now be selected alternately. When this key is set to “Sequence”,
the spot weld sequence editing screen such as the one shown below appears.

8-13
8.6 Setting the spot weld sequences

3 All the weld sequence settings may not always fit onto one page of the
＋ screen.
The screen page displayed can be switched using the [ENABLE] and [Page
Up/Down] keys.
>> Shown below is the second page of the setting screen when air guns are used.

4 If a multiple number of welders are being used, press the [CLOSE/SELECT

SCREEN] key.
Each time this key is pressed, the tab provided for each welder is switched.
The “Common for all welder” tab has the sequences used in common for all
the welders.
5 A total of 64 sequences per welder can be stored. Align the cursor with “Weld
sequence number”, input the number of the condition and press [Enter] or
press the <Prev No> or <Next No> f key to select the desired weld sequence
number.
6 Set the stroke and other data.
>> This manual does not provide a detailed description of the significance of each
parameter or timing charts, etc.
7 Upon completion of the settings, press the <Complete> f key on each page.
The settings are written into the spot weld sequence file.
>> If the playback operation is underway, the changes in the settings are reflected
immediately.

When using the servo gun

1 >> The editing screen changes to a configuration resembling the one shown
below.
With the servo gun, any setting can be selected for the stroke. The data set
which is related to this is where there is a difference from the air gun data.

>> Otherwise, there are no differences from when air guns are used.
This manual does not provide a detailed description of the significance of each
parameter.

8-14
 8.7 Spot welding ON/OFF

8.7 Spot welding ON/OFF

In cases where, for instance, the spotting positions are to be checked, a setting must be performed to
temporarily halt the welding. This is generally referred to as “weld ON/OFF”, and it can easily be set and
checked from the teach pendant.
Either the teach or playback mode may be established.

1 In the teach or playback mode, press the <Weld ON/OFF> f key.

＋ Each time it is pressed, one of the four statuses in the table below is selected
in turn.

Display Status Details

Weld ON Welding is implemented in accordance with the settings of the
weld sequences specified by the spot welding command
(FN119).
Weld OFF Weld command signal is not output. At all other times,
welding is implemented in accordance with the weld
sequences.
Squeezing The squeezing signal and weld command signal are not
OFF output. Neither is the WI wait processing performed. At all
other times, welding is implemented in accordance with the
weld sequences. The welding counter does not count up.
Input Weld ON, weld OFF or squeezing OFF is determined in
signal accordance with the “weld ON” and “squeezing OFF”
statuses of the input signal.

The f keys also serve to provide displays so that the current status can be
ascertained at a glance.

2 This now completes the settings.

3 The same selections as above can be accomplished by selecting <Service

Utilities> followed by [20 Spot welding application] and [1 Spot Teach/Playback
Condition].
The same result is achieved whichever settings are used.
>> A setting screen such as the one shown below now appears.

4 After selecting the settings of the "Weld On/Off"

5 Press f12 <Complete>.

When the input signals “Weld ON” and “Squeezing OFF” are used, execute the “Weld
On/Off” status at least up to 100 msec before the program starts.
IMPORTANT If the status is changed with the “Weld On/Off” input signal at program start, the changes
may not be reflected immediately.

8-15
8.7 Spot welding ON/OFF

NOTE

8-16
Chapter 9 Basic arc welding operations

This chapter describes the basic arc welding operations for operators who will be
using the robot for the arc welding application. Read through the chapter, acquire
the knowledge that is minimally required for arc welding, and master the basic
operating procedures.
For details of other functions relating to arc welding, reference should be made to
the Application Manual (Arc Welding).

9.1 Terms frequently used with arc welding ......................................................9-1

9.2 f key layout..................................................................................................9-2
9.3 Basic arc welding operations ......................................................................9-4
9.3.1 Inching and retracting the wire ..............................................................9-4
9.3.2 Inching/Retracting the Wire with the [JOG DIAL] ..................................9-5
9.3.3 Switching between welding ON and OFF..............................................9-9
9.3.4 Checking the shielding gas ...................................................................9-9
9.3.5 Switching the welders .........................................................................9-10
9.3.6 Switching between weaving ON/OFF ................................................. 9-11
9.4 Teaching arc welding ................................................................................9-12
9.5 Teaching of weaving .................................................................................9-17
9.6 Creating condition files .............................................................................9-19
9.6.1 Creating condition files........................................................................9-19
9.6.2 Copying, deleting and renaming condition files...................................9-21
This is dummy page. DO NOT ERASE.
 9.1 Terms frequently used with arc welding

9.1 Terms frequently used with arc welding

For the benefit of operators who will be using the robot for the first time, this section explains the basic terms
relating to arc welding which come up frequently in this manual.
Table 9.1.1 Terms frequently used with arc welding
Terms Explanation
Arc welding power supply This device directly controls arc welding. In some cases this is simply the welding
power supply or welding device.
For this controller, the specialized Daihen robot dedicated welding power supply or
semi-automatic welding power supply can be controlled, and welding power supply
for other manufacturer’s devices can be connected and controlled.
Robot dedicated welding Welding power supply with an internal or internally available robot interface
power supply function. Welbee Inverter series welders or D series welders are available.
Welding interface This is required to connect the semi-automatic welding power supply, that does
not contain the functions for interfacing with the robot, to the robot.
Arc start This refers to generating the arc in order to commence welding.
Arc start failure This is when an arc fails to occur at the welding start point. It has many and varied
causes: for instance: “bad passage of electrical current due to slag in the welding
base metal,” “misaligned wire aim,” “out of wire,” “wire jam,” “wire misfeeding,” or
“trouble in power supplied to tip” may be to blame for the failure.
Arc run-out This denotes that the arc has run out even though there is no arc stop command
from the robot during welding. It has many and varied causes: for instance, “out
of wire”, “wire jam”, “wire misfeed”, “wire penetration” or “trouble in power
supplied to tip” may be to blame for the failure.
Pre-flow This refers to the blowing out of the shielding gas from the nozzle a number of
seconds before the welding arc is to be generated.
Arc voltage This refers to the voltage between both ends of the arc. When the arc voltage is
(welding voltage) raised, the disadvantage is that some defects may occur: for instance, the arc
may increase in length or the beads may increase in width or there may be a
tendency for overlapping or blow-holes to form. On the other hand, raising the arc
voltage minimizes spatter.
Welding current This is the current that is supplied in order to provide the heat required for the
welding. When the welding current is raised, the penetration is deepened.
In the case of thin sheets, holes may form or burst. Further, the amount of wire
that melts increases, thereby extending the leg length.
Welding speed Moving speed of the welding torch. Generally shows the movement distance
(cm/min) for 1 minute. When the speed is raised, the heat input per unit length
decreases so that a number of defects may occur: for instance, the beads may
become thinner, the penetration may become too shallow, there may be the
tendency for undercutting or the gas shielding may be impaired. On the other
hand, when the speed is lowered, overlapping may tend to occur.
Welding condition These are the conditions for performing the welding, and they refer to a group of
data consisting of the welding current, welding voltage, welding speed, etc.
Welding ON/OFF This refers to switching between welding ON and welding OFF.
Crater This refers to the indentations that form at the trailing end of the beads.
Crater treatment This refers to the treatment where the arc is continuously generated for the
prescribed period of time so that the craters will be filled in under the conditions
which are below the regular welding conditions.
Deposition This refers to the fact that the tip of the melted wire has adhered to the base metal
upon completion of the welding. It is avoided by retracting the wire or conducting
burnback processing upon completion of the welding.
Anti-sticking This refers to a way in which deposition is prevented. Normally, upon completion
of the welding, a no-load voltage (burnback voltage) is applied to the wire while
the wire feed is shut down. If the wire touches the base metal, a current flows, and
the resulting heat causes the wire to flare up, thereby enabling deposition to be
prevented.
WCR This is an abbreviation for welding current relay which is used as the name of the
signal that indicates the welding current ON/OFF status.

9-1
9.2 f key layout

9.2 f key layout

When the robot is used for the arc welding application, the initial settings of the f keys that appear at both sides
of the LCD screen are as shown below.
The f keys are arranged in a layout which is optimally suited to the settings of the specific application such as
spot welding or arc welding. Since initial settings are performed at the factory to suit the application for which the
particular type of robot is normally used, the customer does not normally need to re-arrange the f keys.

Table 9.2.1 Initial layout of f keys for arc welding (teach mode)
■Teach mode (page 1: when the keys are simply ■Teach mode (page 1: when the keys are pressed
pressed) together with [ENABLE])
Arc start Arc end
key f key
f1 command f7 f1 command f7
switching switching
selection selection
Weaving start Weaving end
Welding ON/
f2 command f8 f2 Welder select command f8
OFF
selection selection
Forcibly initiates
Allocates Weaving ON/
Weaving ON/ I release.
f3 station f9 f3 OFF target f9
OFF (Input wait
startup robot switching
release)
File Wire inching Wire inching
f4 f10 f4 No function f10
operations (low-speed) (high-speed)

Arc constant Wire retract Sets the Wire retract

f5 f11 f5 f11
setting (low-speed) constant. (high-speed)

Arc welding
Service
f6 Condition Gas check f12 f6 No function f12
menu
setting

■Teach mode (page 2: when the keys are simply ■Teach mode (page 2: when the keys are pressed
pressed) together with [ENABLE])
Sets the teach
f key f key
f1 or playback f7 f1 No function f7
switching switching
conditions
Manual speed
Sensor ON/
f2 Switching f8 f2 No function No function f8
OFF
(speed up)
Manual speed
Input/output
f3 switching f9 f3 No function No function f9
ON/OFF
(speed down)

f4 Sets monitor 2 No function f10 f4 No function No function f10

Pass/
Tool Sets the
f5 f11 f5 No function positioning f11
switching accuracy.
setting
Automatic
Step Clear/ operation
Change Performs the pause status Acceleration
f6 f12 f6 f12
Specified Smooth setting. release (only setting
Return during station
startup)

9-2
 9.2 f key layout

Table 9.2.2 Initial layout of f keys for arc welding (playback mode)
■ Playback mode (page 1: when the keys are ■ Playback mode (page 1: when the keys are
simply pressed) pressed together with [ENABLE])
f key Arc welding f key
f1 switching Condition setting
f7 f1 switching
Service Menu f7

Welding ON/
f2 OFF
No function f8 f2 Welder select Step feed f8

Forcibly initiates I
Weaving
Weaving ON/ release.
f3 OFF
No function f9 f3 ON/OFF target
(Input wait
f9
robot switching
release)

Wire inching Step

f4 Arc monitor
(low-speed)
f10 f4 continuous
No function f10

Switches
Wire retract between cycle, Speed override
f5 No function
(low-speed)
f11 f5 Continuous and (10% up)
f11
step.

Speed override
f6 Stop Gas check f12 f6 Stop f12
(10% down)

■ Playback mode (page 2: when the keys are ■ Playback mode (page 2: when the keys are
simply pressed) pressed together with [ENABLE])
Sets the teach
f key f key
f1 or playback f7 f1 No function f7
switching switching
conditions.

Sensor ON/
f2 No function f8 f2 No function No function f8
OFF
Step Clear/
Change
f3 No function f9 f3 No function No function f9
Specified
Return
Changing the
method for
returning to the Wire inching
f4 No function f10 f4 No function f10
stopped (high-speed)
position for
normal startup
Changing the
method for Wire retract
f5 No function f11 f5 No function f11
starting up after (high-speed)
a step set.
Simultaneously
switches the
start select and
f6 Stop No function f12 f6 Stop f12
program select
or station
monitor

Table 9.2.3 Initial layout of f keys for arc welding (when the CLAMP/ATRC key has been pressed)

f key Move command f key Start

f1 f7 f1 f7
switching (JOINT) switching allocation

Weld start Move command Step jump SET

f2 f8 f2 f8
command(AS) (LINE) command(JMP) command

Program call
Weld end Move command RESET
f3 f9 f3 command f9
command (AE) (CIRCLE) command
(CALLP)
Fixed pattern Joint weaving ON wait
Wire inching
f4 Weaving start f10 f4 Start command command f10
(low-speed)
Command (WFP) (WAX) (WAITI)

Weaving end Wire retract OFF wait

f5 f11 f5 No function f11
Command (WE) (low-speed) command (WAITJ)

END Timer command

f6 Gas check f12 f6 No function f12
instruction (DELAY)

9-3
9.3 Basic arc welding operations

9.3 Basic arc welding operations

This section describes the basic operating procedures relating to arc welding such as wire inching and retract
and switching between welding ON and OFF.

9.3.1 Inching and retracting the wire

Inching refers to the action that extends the welding wire from the tip; conversely, retracting refers
to the action that draws the wire back into the tip. In the motor power status, it does not matter if
these functions are OFF. (There is no need to grasp the [Enable switch]). The wire can be inched
or retracted in the teach mode or playback mode unless the robot is operating.

Inching and retracting the wire

1 To inch the wire, press f10 <Inching>.
>> The wire is now extended slowly from the tip.

2 To retract the wire, press f11 <Retract>.

>> The wire is now drawn back slowly into the tip.

3 To inch the wire at high speed, press f10 <Inching> while holding down [ENABLE].
＋ >> The wire is now extended rapidly from the tip.

4 To retract the wire at high speed, press f11 <Retract> while holding down
＋ [ENABLE].
>> The wire is now drawn back rapidly into the tip.

To change the inching/retract operation patterns

You can select from among “Normal”, “Limit” and “Hold” for the inching or
retract movement pattern with <Arc Constant> — [3 Constant of weld] —
[Inching/Retract Key operation].
● The initial setting is “Normal”, whereby inching/retract is done only while
the key is being pressed.
INFO. ● When this is set to “Limit”, inching/retract will halt after the set time has
elapsed, even if the key continues to be pressed. When you release the
key during the set time period, inching/retract will halt immediately.
● When this is set to “Hold”, pressing the key once will cause inching/retract
to be done for the set time period. Inching/retract will continue even if you
release the key during the set time period.
Using this setting will allow you to always do inching/retract for a fixed
length. (However, there will be slight variations.) When using the “Hold”
setting, please adjust the time to the desired length.

9-4
 9.3 Basic arc welding operations

9.3.2 Inching/Retracting the Wire with the [JOG DIAL]

When the “Wire inching/retracting function” is assigned to the [JOG DIAL], wire inching/ retracting
can be performed using the rotate operation of the [JOG DIAL].

Operation patterns using the [JOG DIAL]

There are three operation patterns when controlling inching/retracting with the
[JOG DIAL], namely “Low pitch feed,” “High pitch feed,” and “Variable speed
feed.” Select one of the patterns.
When this function is assigned to the [JOG DIAL], the initially selected pattern is
“Low pitch feed.”
You can confirm which pattern is selected by the icon displayed in the variable
status display area.

Pattern Display Icon Function Overview

INFO.
When the [JOG DIAL] is rotated 1
notch, inching/retracting is
Low pitch feed
performed at low pitch (approx.
Yellow
1mm).
When the [JOG DIAL] is rotated 1
notch, inching/retracting is
High pitch feed
performed at high pitch (approx.
Green 15mm).
20% When the [JOG DIAL] is rotated 1
Variable speed notch, the inching/retracting
feed 20% speed increases or decreases
Light blue 10%.

Adjusting the amount of wire supply

POINT If the amount of wire supply is not at the desired length, it can be adjusted.
For details, see “Application section (Arc welding)” in the instruction manual.

POINT Switch the operator level to EXPERT or higher.

Assigning the wire inching/retracting function to the [JOG DIAL]

1 Select the robot program monitor in the teach mode, hold down [Shift] and press
the [JOG DIAL].
＋
>> A [JOG DIAL] function allocation dialog such as the one shown below is displayed.

9-5
9.3 Basic arc welding operations

2 Rotate the [JOG DIAL] to select the “inching/retracting” icon, and press the [JOG
DIAL]. Alternatively, touch the “inching/retracting” icon.
>> The “Wire inching/retracting function" is allocated to the [JOG DIAL], and the icon is
displayed in the “variable status display area.”

To clear the function allocation

When the icon is being displayed, hold down [Shift] and rotate the [JOG DIAL]. The
function allocation is cleared and the icon display disappears.
When the mode is switched (teach -> playback, playback -> teach), the allocation is
automatically cleared.

To change the function allocation

Touch the icon in the display. The [JOG DIAL] function allocation dialog is displayed,
and the allocated function can be changed.

Check the wire supply direction

1 Before performing wire supply, rotate the [JOG DIAL] and check the wire supply
direction.
>> The icon display changes according to the rotation direction of the [JOG DIAL], and
the supply direction can be checked.

Wire is not supplied simply by rotating the [JOG DIAL]

POINT If the [JOG DIAL] is rotated without pressing [ENABLE] or [Shift], wire is not
supplied.

INFO. About wire supply direction settings

The wire supply direction can be set in <Arc constant settings>. For details,
see “Application section (Arc welding)” in the instruction manual.

If the icon display does not change when the [JOG DIAL] is rotated, the
robot program monitor is not selected. Wire feed cannot be performed in
this state. Touch the robot program monitor area.

IMPORTANT

9-6
 9.3 Basic arc welding operations

Performing feed at low pitch

1 Assign the Wire inching/retracting function” to the [JOG DIAL].

2 Inching
＋ Hold [Shift], and rotate the [JOG DIAL] 1 notch in the inching direction.
>> The “Inching” icon (yellow) is displayed, approximate 1mm of wire inching is
performed, and the wire feed automatically stops.

(Yellow)

Retracting
Hold [Shift], and rotate the [JOG DIAL] 1 notch in the retracting direction.
>>The “Retracting” icon (yellow) is displayed, approximate 1mm of wire retracting is
performed, and the wire feed automatically stops.

(Yellow)
3 Release [Shift].
>> If wire feed is being performed, the feed stops.

 Directly after switching the wire feed direction, the stipulated length of wire
POINT may not be fed.
 Hold down [Shift] and continue to rotate the [JOG DIAL] to continuously feed
the wire.

Performing feed at high pitch

1 Assign the “Wire inching/retract function” to the [JOG DIAL].

2 Inching
＋ Hold [ENABLE], and rotate the [JOG DIAL] 1 notch in the inching direction.
>> The “Inching” icon (green) is displayed, approximate 15mm of wire inching is
performed, and the wire feed automatically stops.

(Green)

Retracting
Hold [ENABLE], and rotate the [JOG DIAL] 1 notch in the retracting direction.
>> The “Retracting” icon (green) is displayed, approximate 15mm of wire retracting is
performed, and the wire feed automatically stops.

(Green)

3 Release [ENABLE].
>> If wire feed is being performed, the feed stops.

 Directly after switching the wire feed direction, the stipulated length of wire
POINT may not be fed.
 The wire feed direction cannot be switched during feed.
Temporarily release [ENABLE].

9-7
9.3 Basic arc welding operations

Performing variable speed feed

1 Assign the “Wire inching/retracting function” to the [JOG DIAL].

2 Press the [JOG DIAL] to switch to “Variable speed feed.”

>> The icon display color changes to light blue.
0%

The “%” shown in the icon represents the current feed speed (as a percentage of the
maximum feed speed).
After switching to “Variable speed feed,” the display always shows “0%.”

Each time the [JOG DIAL] is pressed, feed switches between “Variable speed feed” and
“Low pitch feed.”

3 Inching
＋ Hold the [Shift] key, and rotate the [JOG DIAL] 1 notch in the inching direction.
>> The wire is fed at slow speed (10%).

Retracting
Hold the [Shift] key, and rotate the [JOG DIAL] 1 notch in the retracting direction.
>> The wire is reverse fed at slow speed (10%).

The speed increases by 10% for every notch on the [JOG DIAL].
POINT If the [JOG DIAL] is rotated in the opposite direction, the speed reduces by 10%
for every notch.

4 Release [Shift].
>> The speed returns to “0%.”
If wire feed is being performed, the feed stops.

POINT The feed direction cannot be switched during feed.

Temporarily release [Shift].

9-8
 9.3 Basic arc welding operations

9.3.3 Switching between welding ON and OFF

Prior to shipment from the factory, this setting is at ON so that welding will be executed without fail.
To disable welding temporarily, switch “welding ON/OFF” to “OFF”.
Use the f keys for the switching operations. Switching is possible at any time regardless of
whether the teach or playback mode is established. (Switching is also possible during the
playback of welding sections.)

Switching between welding ON and OFF

1 Press f2 <Weld ON/OFF>.
>> Each time this key is pressed, the welding ON/OFF status is switched as follows.

Display Status Details

Weld ON Welding is performed during automatic operation.

Weld
Welding is not performed during automatic operation.
OFF

The input Welding ON/OFF is determined by the “welding ON /

signal is OFF” signal which is input from the external source.
complied The f key display changes in accordance with the status
with. of the “welding ON/OFF” signal.

2 Press the key until the desired status is established.

>> The robot proceeds with the welding in accordance with the welding ON/OFF setting
status.

9.3.4 Checking the shielding gas

Whether the shielding gas used for welding is being output properly can be checked using the
teach pendant. One of the f keys is used to perform the operations.

Checking the shielding gas

When a multiple number of welders are used, select the one for which this operation is to be
performed before proceeding with the gas check.

1 Press f12 <Gas>.

>> The shielding gas is output while the key is pressed.

2 To stop the shielding gas, release f12 <Gas>.

Leave the welder’s gas check switch at OFF.

POINT To check the gas from the teach pendant, the gas check switch provided on
the welder must be left at OFF without fail.
If it is at the ON position, the gas cannot be checked from the robot.

To change the shielding gas output patterns

For the shielding gas, you can select from among “Normal”, “Limit” and “Hold”
with <Arc Constant> — [3 Constant of weld] — [Gas check operation].
The initial setting is “Normal”, whereby gas is output only while the key is being
INFO. pressed.
When this is set to “Limit”, gas will halt after the set time has elapsed, even if
the key continues to be pressed. When you release the key during the set time
period, gas will halt immediately.
When this is set to “Hold”, pressing the key once will cause gas to be output
for the set time period. Output will continue even if you release the key during
the set time period.

9-9
9.3 Basic arc welding operations

9.3.5 Switching the welders

Multiple welders can be connected to this controller. When two or more welders are connected to
this controller, it is necessary to select the welder to be controlled in advance.

Switching the welders

1 To switch the welders, use <Select Arc>. This is possible both in the teach mode
and playback mode.

“W1” appears at the bottom left of the f key. This denotes that “welder 1” is the target of
operation. When “welder 2” is selected, “W2” appears.
When the control power is turned on, “welder 1 (W1)” is always selected.

2 If, when two welders have been connected for example, f2 <Select Arc> is pressed,
＋ the target of operation is switched to “welder 2”. (The display changes to “W2”.)

3 When f2 <Select Arc> is pressed again, the next welder is selected.

>> If two welders are connected, the target of operation returns to “welder 1”.
(The display changes to “W1”.)

9-10
 9.3 Basic arc welding operations

9.3.6 Switching between weaving ON/OFF

Switching between weaving ON and OFF is performed to disable weaving temporarily such as
when the weld lines are to be checked.
Switching is possible at any time regardless of whether the teach or playback mode is established.
(Switching is also possible during the playback of weaving sections.)

If a multiple number of robots have been connected under the multi-unit specifications, the robot
targeted for weaving ON/OFF switching must be selected first.

Switching between weaving ON/OFF

1 If a multiple number of robots have been connected under the multi-unit
＋ specifications, press f3 <Select Robot> while holding down [ENABLE] to select
the target robot first.
If the multi-unit specifications do not apply (if only one robot is being used), this operation
need not be performed.

“M1” appears at the bottom left of the f key. This indicates that “manipulator 1” has been
selected as the target of operation. “M2” appears if “manipulator 2” has been selected.
When the control power is turned on, “manipulator 1 (M1)” is always selected.

2 Press f3 <Weaving ON/OFF>.

>> Each time the key is pressed, the weaving ON/OFF status is switched as shown
below.

Display Status Details

Weaving ON Weaving is performed.

Weaving OFF No weaving is performed.

Weaving ON/OFF is determined by the “weaving

ON” signal which is input from the external
The input signal is source.
complied with.
The f key display changes in accordance with the
status of the “weaving ON” signal.

3 Press the key until the desired status is established.

>> The robot proceeds with the weaving in accordance with the weaving ON/ OFF
setting status.

9-11
9.4 Teaching arc welding

9.4 Teaching arc welding

Let’s now try teaching some actual welding steps.
This will not be difficult. The only steps that must be taken are to record AS at the position where welding is to
start and AE where it is to end.

Using the following work program as an example, the welding steps will now be taught. However, details on
recording the movement commands and other basic teaching operations will be omitted here.

Teaching start position

Step 1
(Work home point) Step 8

Step 2 Arc start Arc end Step 7

position position

Step 3 Step 5
Step 4：AS Step 6：AE

Fig. 9.4.1 Example of teaching

When using number keys

When teaching is performed with numeric keys, “The use of the hard
POINT key“ needs to be set the “Enable”.
For details on the setting procedure, see “Section 7.7 Customizing the Hard
Keys” in “Chapter 7 Useful Functions.”

Teaching the arc welding start command

1 Record this command up to the arc start position (step 3).

2 Press f7 <AS>.
Alternatively, press the f2 <AS> after pressing [CLAMP/ARC].
>> The screen for setting the arc welding start conditions now appears. The method
or used to specify the conditions is described here using a case where the WB-M350L
is being operated as an example. The same operations are performed even when
other welders are used.

9-12
 9.4 Teaching arc welding

Concerning the method used to select the arc welding start command
INFO.  The arc weld start command is FN414.
It can also be selected using [FN] -> ”414” -> [Enter].
 You can also hold [ENABLE] and press [4] to call the function
group, and select the arc welding start command.

3 When “0” is specified as the “AS Cond. file”, the conditions can be specified by
number. In this case, proceed from step 5.

4 To specify a condition using a file, either input the file number directly or select
the file from the list of files.

When selecting from the file list

To select a file from the list of files, press f8 <Select>.
>> The arc start condition files which have been prepared are displayed.

Select a file using the [up or down] key, and press [Enter].
>> The designated arc start condition file is called.

5 Specify the number of the arc retry file in the “Retry cond. no.”.
If “0” is specified, the standard arc retry is executed when arc start has failed.
Leave “0” as is if you are not used to operating the robot.
When executing arc retry defined by the user, specify an arc retry file which has already
been created.

6 Specify the number of the arc retry file in the “Restart. no.”
When specifying the created arc retry file, the arc restart is performed when
lucking of arc as failure. Leave “0” as is if you are not used to operating the robot.

7 Align the cursor with “Welding process” and “Current cond.”, press [Enter], and
select the desired conditions from among the selection items displayed.

9-13
9.4 Teaching arc welding

8 The remaining welding conditions are set on the second and subsequent pages.
Press [Scroll page].
>> The page now changes.

Depending on the welder used, there may be no conditions to set on the second and
subsequent pages. In a case like this, perform step 11.

9 Move the cursor using the [Up], [Down], [Left] and [Right] keys, and input the
“Welding curr.”, “Welding speed” and “Arc length tuning”.

10 If there are a third page and subsequent pages, press [Scroll page] to display the
screen, and then input the conditions by following the same procedure as
described up until this point.

11 Once all the conditions have been set, press f12 <Complete>.
>> The arc welding start command (AS) is recorded as step 4.

Concerning the step displays after recording

Outlined below is the significance of the step displays after the arc welding
start command has been recorded.

INFO.
Welder number Welding conditions,
溶接機 s peed, etc.
OFF (specified by number) Arc retry condition
or file number.
Welding condition file number.

9-14
 9.4 Teaching arc welding

Teaching the arc welding end command

Try recording the arc welding end command (AE) at the arc end position.

Teaching start position

Step 1
(Work home point) Step 8

Step 2 Arc start Arc end Step 7

position position

Step3 Step 5
Step4：AS Step 6：AE

Fig. 9.4.2 Example of teaching

1 Record the arc end position (step 5).

2 While pressing [ENABLE], press f7 <AE>.

＋ Alternatively, press the f3 <AE> after pressing [CLAMP/ARC].
>> The screen for setting the arc welding end conditions now appears.
or

Concerning the method used to select the arc welding end command
INFO.  The arc weld end command is FN415.
It can also be selected using [FN] -> ”415” -> [Enter].
 You can also hold [ENABLE] and press [4] to call the function
group, and select the arc welding end command.

3 When “0” is specified as the “AS Cond. File,” the conditions can be specified by
number. In this case, proceed from step 5.

4 To specify a condition using a file, either input the file number directly or select
the file from the list of files.

9-15
9.4 Teaching arc welding

When selecting from the file list

To select a file from the list of files, press f8 <Select>.

>> The arc welding condition files which have been prepared are displayed.

Use "Up/Down” to select the file, and press [Enter].

>> The specified arc welding condition file is called.

5 Align the cursor with “Weld method,” “Current conditions classification” and
press [Enter], select the desired conditions from the displayed selection items.

6 Set the remaining weld conditions on the 2nd and subsequent pages. Press [Turn
page].
>> The page is turned.

Depending on the welder used, there may be no conditions to set on the second and
subsequent pages. In a case like this, perform step 8.

7 If there are setting items on the 3rd and subsequent pages, press [Scroll page] to
display the screen, and then input the conditions using the same operations.

8 Once all the conditions have been set, press f12 <Complete>.
>> The arc welding end command (AE) is recorded as step 6.

9-16
 9.5 Teaching of weaving

9.5 Teaching of weaving

Weaving is used when there are gaps in the work piece or the leg length is to be shortened.

Using the following work program as an example, this section describes how to teach fixed pattern weaving
(WFP).
However, details on recording the movement commands and other basic teaching operations will be omitted
here.

Teaching start position

Step 1
(Work home point) Step 10

Step 2 Arc start Arc start Step 9

position position

Step 3 Step 6
Step 4：AS Step 7：WE
Step 5：WFP Step 8：AE

Fig. 9.5.1 Example of teaching

When using number keys

When performing teaching using the number keys, it is necessary to set the use
POINT hard key settings to “On.”
For details on the setting procedure, see “Section 7.7 Customizing the Hard
Keys” in “Chapter 7 Useful functions.”

Teaching the weaving start command

1 Record the command up to step 4.

2 Press f8 <WS>.Alternatively, press the f4 <WFP> after pressing [CLAMP/ARC].

>> The screen for setting the fixed pattern weaving conditions now appears.

or

9-17
9.5 Teaching of weaving

Concerning the method used to select the weaving start command

INFO.  The weaving start command is FN440.
It can also be selected using [FN] -> ”440” -> [Enter].
 You can also hold [ENABLE] and press [4] to call the function
group, and select the weaving start command.

3 Move the cursor using [Up], [Down], [Left] and [Right], and set the weaving
conditions.
The method used to specify the conditions using a file is the same as for the arc start and
arc end commands
The “Move at Stop Time” and “Weave Start Direct.” conditions are switched by
＋ pressing [left or right] while holding down [ENABLE].

4 Once all the conditions have been set, press f12 <Complete>.
>> The fixed pattern weaving start command (WFP) is recorded as step 5.

Teaching the weaving end command

1 Record the command up to step 6.

2 While pressing [ENABLE], press f8 <WE>.

＋ Alternatively, press the f5 <WE> after pressing [CLAMP/ARC].
>> The weaving end command (WE) is recorded as step 7.
or

Concerning the method used to select the weaving end command

INFO.  The weaving end command is FN443.
It can also be selected using [FN] -> ”443” -> [Enter].
 You can also hold [ENABLE] and press [4] to call the function
group, and select the weaving end command.

9-18
 9.6 Creating condition files

9.6 Creating condition files

The method used to specify files as welding conditions or weaving conditions is useful because it cuts the time
required for teaching and revisions and it facilitates the management of the conditions.

For instance, it yields the following advantages when the same welding conditions are used in more than one
place.

・ At the teaching stage, only the file number need be specified as the welding conditions.
・ When revising the welding conditions, only the specified file need be revised. (There is no need to revise
each of the conditions in each welding section in the work program.)

A comment for easy identification can be attached to the condition files.

9.6.1 Creating condition files

Let’s now try to create an actual condition file.

Creating condition files

1 Press f6 <Arc Condition>.
>> The screen for setting the arc welding application now appears.
This screen is the same one that appears when <Service Utilities> — [21 Arcwelding
application] have been selected.

The following operations can be performed from this menu.

[2 Arc start condition] … For creating or revising arc start condition files.
[3 Arc end condition] … For creating or revising arc end condition files.
[4Arc retry condition] … For creating or revising arc retry condition files.
[5 Weaving condition] … For creating or revising weaving condition files.
[11 Robot move condition] … or creating or revising robot move condition files.
[12 Rs condition] … or creating or revising RS condition files.

9-19
9.6 Creating condition files

2 For instance, to create an arc start condition file, select [2 Arc start condition], and
press [Enter].
>> The screen for creating the arc start condition file now appears.
The screen shown below is the setting screen that appears when the DP-350 is
used. Depending on the type of welder, the display screen may differ from the one
shown below, but operation is the same.

3 Input a file number from 1 to 999 in the “AS Cond. file” field, and press
[Enter].
>> When a new file is created, the initial conditions are displayed.
When an existing file number has been input, the contents of the file concerned are
displayed.
When selecting an existing file from the file list
To select a file from the list of files, press f8 <Select>.
>> The arc start condition files which have been prepared are displayed.

Select a file using the [up or down] key, and press [Enter].
>> The designated arc start condition file is called.

4 Select “Welding process” or “Current cond.” by performing the same operations

as the ones at the teaching stage.
Depending on the type of welder used, these conditions are not displayed.
(The conditions need not be set if they are not displayed.)

5 Move the cursor to the “Comment” field. A comment can be attached.

＋ To attach a comment, press [EDIT] while holding down [ENABLE].
For details on how to input characters, see “2.5 To input characters” in Chapter 2.

6 Set the remaining conditions using the same method as the one used at the
teaching stage.

9-20
 9.6 Creating condition files

7 Upon completion, press f12 <Complete>.

The revised conditions are reflected in the file concerned. If a new file is to be created,
the new file is created and stored in the internal memory.

9.6.2 Copying, deleting and renaming condition files

This section describes the methods used to copy and delete condition files which have been
created.

Files can be copied and deleted using the file operation menu as well.
Although files can be copied and deleted using the file operation menu as well,
INFO. the operator must be aware of the folder structure of the internal memory and
know which files are stored in which folders when the file operation menu is
used.
It is easier to copy or delete condition files by following the procedure below.

Copying, deleting and renaming condition files

1 Press f6 <Arc Condition>.
>> The screen for setting the arc welding application now appears.

2 Select the type of file to be copied or deleted, and press [Enter].

For instance, to copy or delete an arc start condition file, select [2 Arc start condition].
>> The screen for creating the selected file now appears.

3 Press f8 <Select>.
>> The arc start condition files which have been prepared are displayed.
On this screen, files can be copied, deleted and renamed.

4 To copy a file:
(1) Press f7 <Copy>
(2) Select the copy source condition file and press [Enter]
(3) Input the number of the copy destination file, and press [Enter].

5 To delete a file:
(1) Press f11 <Delete>
(2) Select the condition file to deleted, and press [Enter].

6 To rename a file:
(1) Press f8 <Rename>
(2) Input the new number of the file, and press [Enter].

7 Upon completion of the operation, exit by pressing [RESET/R].

9-21
9.6 Creating condition files

NOTE

9-22
 http://www.nachi-fujikoshi.co.jp/

Shiodome Sumitomo Bldg. 17F,

Phone: Fax:
Japan Main Office 1-9-2 Higashi-Shinbashi
+81-3-5568-5245 +81-3-5568-5236
Minato-ku, TOKYO, 105-0021 JAPAN
Nachi Robotic Systems Inc. (NRS) http://www.nachirobotics.com/
North America Headquarters Phone: 248-305-6545 Fax: 248-305-6542 46200 W.12 Mile Rd. Novi, Michigan 48377, U.S.A.

Indiana Service Center Phone: 248-305-6545 Fax: 248-305-6542 Greenwood, Indiana

Ohio Service Center Phone: 248-305-6545 Fax: 248-305-6542 Cincinnati, Ohio

South Carolina Service Center Phone: 248-305-6545 Fax: 248-305-6542 Greenville, South Carolina

Canada Branch Office Phone: 905-760-9542 Fax: 905-760-9477 89 Courtland Ave., Unit No.2, Concord, Ontario, L4K 3T4, CANADA

Av. 100 Metros 1112-A, N. Industrial Vallejo, Gustavo A. Madero,

Mexico Branch Office Phone :+52-555312-6556 Fax:+52-55-5312-7248
CDMX, 07700, MEXICO

NACHI EUROPE GmbH http://www.nachi.de/

Phone: Fax:
Central Office Germany Bischofstrasse 99, 47809, Krefeld, GERMANY
+49-2151-65046-0 +49-2151-65046-90

Phone: Fax: Unit 3, 92, Kettles Wood Drive, Woodgate Business Park,
U.K. branch
+44-0121-423-5000 +44-0121-421-7520 Birmingham B32 3DB, U.K.

Phone: Fax: Obchodni 132, 251 01 Cestlice, PRAGUE-EAST

Czech branch
+ 420-255-734-000 +420-255-734-001 CZECH REPUBLIC

Phone: Fax: Ataturk Mah. Mustafa Kemal Cad. No:10/1A 34758

Turkey branch
+ 90-(0)216-688-4457 +90-(0)216-688-4458 Atasehir / Istanbul - TURKEY

NACHI AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD. http://www.nachi.com.au/

Robotic Division & Phone: Fax:
38, Melverton Drive, Hallam, Victoria 3803, , AUSTRALIA
Victoria office +61-(0)3-9796-4144 +61-(0)3-9796-3899

Phone: Fax:
Sydney office Unit 1, 23-29 South Street, Rydalmere, N.S.W, 2116, AUSTRALIA
+61-(0)2-9898-1511 +61-(0)2-9898-1678

Phone: Fax:
Brisbane office 7/96 Gardens Dr,Willawong,QLD 4110, , AUSTRALIA
+61-(0)7-3272-4714 +61-(0)7-3272-5324

NACHI SHANGHAI CO., LTD. http://www.nachi.com.cn/

Phone: Fax: 11F Royal Wealth Centre, No.7
Shanghai office
+86-(0)21-6915-2200 +86-(0)21-6915-2200 Lane 98 Danba Road Putuo District, Shanghai 200062, China

NACHI KOREA http://www.nachi-korea.co.kr/

2F Dongsan Bldg.
Phone: Fax:
Seoul office 276-4, Sungsu 2GA-3DONG, Sungdong-ku,
+82-(0)2-469-2254 +82-(0)2-469-2264
Seoul 133-123, KOREA

Copyright NACHI-FUJIKOSHI CORP.

Robot Division
1-1-1, FUJIKOSHIHONMACHI, TOYAMA CITY, JAPAN 930-8511
Phone +81-76-423-5137
Fax +81-76-493-5252
NACHI-FUJIKOSHI CORP. holds all rights of this document. No part of this manual may be photocopied or
reproduced in any from without prior written consent from NACHI-FUJIKOSHI CORP. Contents of this document
may be modified without notice. Any missing page or erratic pagination in this document will be replaced.
In case that an end user uses this product for military purpose or production of weapon, this product may be liable
for the subject of export restriction stipulated in the Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Control Law. Please go
through careful investigation and necessary formalities for export.
Original manual is written in Japanese.